― 55 ―

1. SELECTIONS

Nisenan prayer Ralph Beals, “Ethnology of the Nisenan”

	Who is tending this sun, [this] moon?
	Who moves them around?
	There must be somebody to look after this world …

― 57 ―

CREATION SONGS

1A

	Deserted it was,
	Deserted it was,
	Deserted, the earth.

	First they appeared,
	First they came out,

	First Mukat,
	First Tamayowet,

	First the chiefs,
	First the ancients.

1B

	His heart roared,
	His heart thundered,
	Water and mud roared.

	Then outside, toward the door,
	Themselves they lay down,
	Mukat outside,
	Tamayowet then,
	Themselves they lay down:

Cupeño song, Salvadora Valenzuela, 1920
Paul Faye, collector

	Where it was bare, where it was lonely,
	Themselves they laid down,
	Where dust was, where mist was.

― 59 ―

1. Kwaw Labors to Form a World

Atsugewi 1996 Darryl Babe Wilson

It is said by the old ones that a thought was floating in the vastness. Thought manifested itself into a voice. Voice matured into Yeja, an everlasting medicine song. Song sang itself into being as Kwaw, Silver Gray Fox. By continuing the song, Kwaw created all that we know. He sang the universe into being. His singing spawned Reason, but not sufficiently, so we shall never know all that moves within this universe.

It was Song, infusing itself with both beauty and power, that caused the outer world to tremble and the inner world to quake, and instructed the stars to become one with the vastness and the vastness to become one with the stars.

The “new” universe created a new kind of emptiness, within which Kwaw grew lonesome—wanting somebody to talk with. Laboring over what to do with so much nothingness, he decided to make another being, much like himself. Some haste on Kwaw's part caused that being to be created with a defect: vanity. That being came to my people as Ma'kat'da, Old Coyote.

Kwaw instructed Ma'kat'da to sleep while he busied himself with making “something shiny.” Kwaw sang for a million years or more, and in

― 60 ―

the distance something shiny appeared, a mist. Mist contained no voice and no song, but it possessed a magic.

Kwaw kicked Ma'kat'da awake, showing him the shiny mist. They sang together and Mist moved ever to them. It approached silently, like a soap bubble on a summer afternoon, floating upon the breeze. Kwaw caught it in his hands and it rested there. Ma'kat'da thought that Kwaw could not possibly know what to do with Mist, so he grabbed for it. There was a struggle. In the conflict, Kwaw dropped the mist. Ma'kat'da and Kwaw wrestled over the possession of Mist for eons. Meanwhile, Mist dropped slowly down, ever down. And, just before Mist struck Nothingness, Kwaw broke free from Ma'kat'da, reached under it, and gently nudged it back into the safety of his hands.

Here, then, if there ever was one, is “the beginning,” according to the keepers of our ancestral knowledge. For it was from the birth of the mist sung into being that all of the stars and moons of the universe were created; earth, also. Our earth, they say, is an infant, being fulfilled after all of the rest of the universe.

It is said that Mist took on substance, forming into something much more solid. It became more pliable, like bread dough, and they kneaded it and stretched it as they sang and danced. They danced harder and fragments separated from the mist-gel and moved out in a vast circle, tumbling ever away. These became the stars and the Milky Way.

Kwaw labored to form a world. But everything he created, Ma'kat'da changed. Vanity caused Ma'kat'da to think that he knew best. Kwaw created, Ma'kat'da changed. Then Ma'kat'da grew angry because all he could accomplish was “change.” He became destructive.

Seeing that he could not teach Ma'kat'da, Kwaw decided to remove himself. He entered his chema-ha, his sweat lodge, lifted the center post, and dropped down through into this world, carefully replacing the center post so Ma'kat'da would not see where it was disturbed. When he arrived here, there was only water. Kwaw sang land into being, then sang a chema-ha to rest upon the land. He created himself a fresh home upon new earth—with no Ma'kat'da!

Then Kwaw set about making the world as we know it today, thinking that Ma'kat'da would be satisfied with the world beyond the sky and would never come to this one. He made all that we know: the geese and

― 61 ―

salmon, the mornings and the mountains, the rivers and streams, the seasons and the songs of all the birds. He made it wonderful and, it is said, he made it good.

Ma'kat'da searched for Kwaw in the world beyond the sky and could not find him. So Ma'kat'da, whose best power is fire, found a little basket in Kwaw's abandoned chema-ha and threatened it with cremation if it did not tell. Little Willow Basket, not wanting to perish in flames, said, “He went through there,” pointing to the center post of the chema-ha. So Ma'kat'da, employing his own magic, came to this world like Kwaw after all …

This explanation came to me through Ramsey Bone Blake, who received it from White Horse Bob. White Horse Bob was given the song that Kwaw sang upon the inception of Life. The song was his damagoomi, his spirit helper. Ramsey couldn't remember the whole song, but often recalled fragments of it. However, he was not allowed to sing it, for the song already belonged to White Horse Bob.

Within this magic my people dwelled just a short time ago. More recently, our home has become the legal possession of strangers. We have been restricted from approaching our places of power and spirit. We have become mute witnesses while others despoil the air, the land, the wildlife, the rivers, and the ocean waters. It is said that Kwaw created this world for original native people, not for wanderers. But it is the wanderers who have brought a di erent rule, saying that our ancient laws are of no value.

This may be one of the reasons why we are in a spiritual quandary: not knowing how to become a functioning part of the invading American society, not remembering how to sustain a strict connection with the “knowing” that is our origin—and trembling in the presence of both.

With these thoughts in mind, then, proceed through the following “lesson-legends” realizing that it was not long ago that there was great magic in the land of my people—of all our Native people. That there was a wonder in the patterns of everyday life, and that there was much singing and dancing. For these were our instructions when the earth began turning around the sun, and the sun began moving with the universe, to a destination that may never be known to any of us but Kwaw.

― 63 ―

NORTHWESTERN CALIFORNIA

Yurok, Florence Shaughnessy, at Requa Peter Matthiessen, “Stop the GO Road”

	You come upon a place you've never seen before,
	and it has awesome beauty.
	Everything above you,
	below you,
	and around you is so pure—
	that is the beauty we call merwerksergerh,
	and the pure person is also merwerksergerh.

― 65 ―

SONG

Yurok doctor dance song R.H. Robins and Norma McCloud “Five Yurok Songs: A Musical and Textual Analysis”

	Why is the water rough,
	by Rek'^w oy at the river mouth?
	Why is the water rough,
	by Rek'^w oy at the river mouth?
	By Rek'^w oy at the river mouth,
	that is why they watch it,
	by Rek'^w oy at the river mouth.
	Near the houses the surf runs further up,
	by Rek'^w oy at the river mouth.
	Why is the water rough,
	by Rek'^w oy at the river mouth?
	Near the houses the surf runs further up,
	by Rek'^w oy at the river mouth.
	Why is the water rough,
	by Rek'^w oy at the river mouth?
	Near the houses the waves break further up,
	by Rek'^w oy at the river mouth.
	High in the air by Rek'^w oy,
	that is why they watch it,
	by Rek'^w oy at the river mouth.
	Near the houses the surf runs further up,
	by Rek'^w oy at the river mouth.
	Why is the water rough,
	by Rek'^w oy at the river mouth?
	Near the houses the waves break further up,
	by Rek'^w oy at the river mouth.

― 67 ―

2. Test-ch'as (The Tidal Wave)

Tolowa 1985 Loren Bommelyn, author and translator

INTRODUCTION BY LOREN BOMMELYN

The Tolowa are a Pacific Coast Athabascan-speaking people of Northern California and Southern Oregon. Their terrain is heavily wooded with climax redwood and Douglas fir forests and accustomed to heavy rainfall. The rivers of the past were choked with trout, steelhead, and several species of salmon. The ocean provided whale, sea lion, and innumerable species of fish. The coastal tide-pools produced a rich diversity of crustacea and bivalves. The land, too, yielded its plenty: the annual harvest of fruits, nuts, and herbs. The control-burned forests and prairies of the hills ran with great herds of elk and deer. And the skies were blackened with hundreds of thousands of fowl from the Pacific flyway.

The rich food supply a orded the Tolowa a heavy population and encouraged the development of high customs, elaborate protocol, and a complex legal system. They built their homes from hand-split and handhewed redwood planks. The Tolowa seagoing canoes were famous up and down the coast. Their exogamous marriage customs resulted in a multilingual society with a diverse system of religious practices. The Headmen

― 68 ―

controlled and protected their village districts, where dentalia currency ranked supreme in deciding all legal matters—torts, damages, marriages, and all the rest of it. These men were responsible for implementing and carrying out the high ceremonies surrounding our foremost responsibility: for men and women alike to walk in balance with creation.

But the life of the Tolowa changed forever in the 1850s with the arrival of the Europeans. Their rapacious passions and disease destroyed the Tolowa and their neighbors. Thousands of people perished. The Europeans pushed and drove the Tolowa population into two separate concentration camps, one at Siletz, Oregon, and the other at Hoopa, California. The Tututni and Chetco people are our northern divisions. The residual population—of no more than two hundred individuals who escaped the camps and returned to their homeland—established the basis for the current Tolowa population. Out of this painful past the Tolowa have survived. My great-grandparents survived the seven-year holocaust that began in 1853. Their children were born at the end of the nineteenth century, their children's children (my parents) in the 1920s and 1930s. I was born in 1956.

Aunt Laura was nineteen years older than my mother and served as my grandma. Auntie and Mom did everything together. The annual food cycles followed one after another. First was the spring routine of gardening, seaweed drying, beef fattening, and salmonberry and thimbleberry picking. Next was the summer routine of smelt drying, clamming, strawberry and blackberry picking, and peach, apricot, and pear canning. And last came the fall routine of acorn and herb gathering, the making of deer jerky, huckleberry picking, and the netting of steelhead and Chinook salmon. Every day after school, we would run down to Auntie's house. She fed us, and we played continental rummy and cribbage. Then Auntie would tell us stories. I could envision how our village looked during her youth. I could see how our village looked when Grandma Alice was young and when Great-grandma Deliliah was alive. Many times it would get dark, and we would sleep at Auntie's.

The fall nights were gillnet-setting time. The State of California had long since illegalized our livelihood, but this made no di erence to us. “Paddle quietly. Never smoke out on the water: the game warden can see

― 69 ―

the red cherry from a long way o. Wear a sweatshirt: the buttons of a shirt will hang up in the net and drown you. Club the fish with a quiet sock to the head.” No one could gut and fillet a salmon with the skill and finesse that Auntie and Mom had. Each salmon was carefully washed and scaled. The stomach was split open exactly, and the entrails and black blood removed with precision. The salmon's head and fins were removed, and then it was filleted. They stripped the fillets with care. Each jar was packed to perfection. They hung long strips of salmon in the smokehouse. A small, cool alder-wood fire sent the curing smoke wafting through the salmon strips. My favorite dish at fish-cleaning time was salmon-head and egg chowder.

The winter rains of Del Norte County were extremely marked during my youth. The rain would pelt out of the skies for ten days and nights from its high ceilings, while powerful winds and clouds cloaked the coastal plain. These winds pounded the top of Milichundun Mountain across the Smith River from our home place, Nelechundun. The air was warm and magical, astir and wild. Back in the eastern mountains at the headwaters of the river, the annual rainfall could reach twelve feet at Bear Basin Summit. These rains would send us scurrying over mountains, through redwood forests, fields, and the riparian habitats of the river and estuaries. Soaked to the bone, we panted, cheeks flushed and red, lost in time, lost to the eternity of our ancestors. Aunt Laura counted the days of rain and the swift slapping waves of the river to predict if it would flood.

“Gee, maybe we'll have the Great Flood again,” she might say. “One time the people began to go against the laws of the Creator. That was the time when Dog spoke to the people. This is why in Grandma Deliliah's time you did not talk to dogs. If they were to answer you, the world might come to an end.” You see, a dog speaking to humans is an indication of catastrophic destruction. A few years ago, someone had recorded the Christmas carol “Jingle Bells” with a dog barking out the tune of the song. The radio station owner, Bill Stamps, played it over the air. Ella Norris, one of our elders, called him up and chewed him out. “What are you trying to do, make the world come to an end?” (This belief had changed in my family during Grandpa Billie Henry's time, though. He

― 70 ―

and Grandma Alice always used to “dog talk” with the dogs. And we still “dog talk” with our own dogs today.)

The following account of Test-ch'as is an illustration of the powerful ethical values of the traditional Tolowa. The outside pressures of modern American socialization and religions are eroding these values. But the traditionalists have a strong sense of what living right means. “If you can't do it right, don't do it!” Each activity of daily life is presided over by the “One Who Watches Over Us.” At the time of our genesis, K‘wan’-leeshvm laid out the universe and the laws we are to live by. To live correctly brings us blessings. To live outside these laws is to invite strife and trouble into one's life. The Test-ch'as account is a testimony and a warning to us of what happens when we fall outside the balance of the universe.^[1]

The Test-ch'as account is a template of inspiration and replenishment. From the nearly complete annihilation of the Tolowas from the face of the earth during the 1850s, our population has now reached more than one thousand members. It has happened again as it did in Test-ch'as: that a man and his wife live together.

NOTES

1. The opening section of this story, set in italics, comes from a di erent version of the myth than that on which the rest of the translation is based. Because the main version of the story presented here begins with the disaster itself, leaving the “why” unspoken, Bommelyn added this scene onto the beginning to explain the events that precipitated the disaster.

The Tolowa place-name Enmai (‘Big Mountain’; rhymes with “Hen-my”) corresponds to the peak known as Mount Emily on maps of the region. (“Emily” is an Anglicization of the original Tolowa form.) The word Chit-dvn is pronounced “Cheat-done.”—hwl

Test-ch'as (The Tidal Wave)

At Chit-dvn Village, all the young men and young women, they were partying there, at the center of town. At dusk they had partied. One alone of all of them told his sister, “Our grandmother teaches us, ‘Don't you go outside at dusk.’”

A widow also joined with them, then. She, too, started laughing around with them there.

Truthfully, then, a dog sat up and spoke out loud: “You all will see what's going to happen!”

The young man and the young woman, they ran to their home.

“Gram! A dog has spoken here!”

“I knew it was going to happen this way,” their grandmother said. “You two go to Mount Enmai now. Grab some dentalia, and a smelt net also. To Enmai you must go—quickly, both of you! Wait for no one.”

“Gram, what are you going to do?”

― 72 ―

“I am old. I am going to die. You must go quickly now, both of you … ”

It was during the fall when the ground shook. Twice the ground had shaken.

“Well now! Something bad is going to happen. You had better go look now,” the man said.

Then the ground shook again.

“You two run to the beach,” he told the boys. “You two paddle the boat out to sea. Should the boat run aground on the sand, the ocean tidal wave will come that way. If it happens like that, you two return again quickly to this side. Then we will know what is going to happen.”

The ocean was extremely smooth. Not a bit of wind blew. When those two paddled toward the beach, it happened just that way.

“We ran ashore almost to the sand,” they said.

Then they put all the canoes in a safe place. Then the ground shook again.

“If it shakes the ground from east and west, the ocean will rise up.”

Then the ground shook from the west. Everything standing on the ground fell over. The water began to rise in the rivers. The river ran over its banks.

One teenage girl amongst them was having her time of the month. With her brother, she ran up into the mountains. They kept looking behind them as they were running. As they ran, the ocean nearly caught them. Everything that lived there turned into snakes. The snakes all slithered into the ocean.

― 73 ―

These two people ran up on top of a ridge. The water, rising up in a tide, nearly ran them over. Everyone who lived upon the earth ran toward the mountains. The water, too, rose up the mountain from the east—all the rivers were running over, is why. Everything alive was floating alongside the mountain. When the water ran over them, they all turned into snakes.

“Let's run along the ridge now,” he told his sister.

Then they ran to the top of Mount Enmai, and saw that the water had flooded over the Earth. Then all this water began to boil.

When the water had run almost over the top of Mount Enmai, the boy told his sister, “Stick your nose ornament into the ground. The water will rise up no further than there.”

Then she stuck her flicker feather in the ground. Really, the water rose up no further! The young man built a fire. Then all who did not drown stood on the mountaintop. The Eastern people, the Western people, all perished.

Everywhere the fog came in. Nowhere could land be seen. All night they could not sleep. All night they kept the fire going. When it was morning everywhere, they looked around. Only mountaintops were sticking out of the water. Mount Enmai's peak floated southward. These two stayed there ten nights.

All those dangerous ones who live in the forest, they, too, were standing on Mount Enmai's peak. All of them were afraid—they didn't want to go down to the foot of the mountain. Ten days passed by. The young man went to the foot of the mountain.

When he returned, he told his sister, “Many large creatures and small creatures are lying around everywhere.”

The ocean had left them there.

― 74 ―

“You and I will go down the mountain.”

His sister told him, “All right.”

They descended to the valley. The girl was afraid, until her brother told her, “Nothing will harm you. All of them everywhere are lying dead. Do not be afraid of it. Let's seek out our home.”

When those two found their way back there, everything was nothing there. Their house was also gone. Everywhere only sand was lying. They recognized nothing. There, where they used to live, there was nothing. Everywhere they went, the dead ones had started to stink.

“Where will we live?” one asked. The other said, “Anywhere we live is going to be good.”

Then this teenager told his sister, “You sit here. Wait for me. I am going to the bottom to see what I can see. Perhaps some people are living there.”

Before he went, he prepared food. He took it there to a safe place. They found a piece of fresh whale tail. The whale meat was cut up for drying.

“This meat will be good for you,” he said.

Then the young man walked to the south. He looked for people everywhere. As he was walking, he saw only dead ones. He walked far into the south. He saw not a soul still alive. Then he walked to the east. He walked all night and all day. He saw only small lakes. Then the lakes became a gully in there. In the east, he walked along the border of his land. There, also, he found not a soul alive. He also saw no deer tracks. He walked far to the north there. He saw coyote tracks there.

Then he thought, “I suppose another mountain poked out. Di erent people must still be alive. It will be good if I see some people.”

― 75 ―

He saw nothing. Then he walked to the beach. The beach was covered only with sand. As he walked southward, nothing stood. Not a fir tree stood. Finally he found one tree, a crabapple. It alone had not become a snake when the ocean washed over it. Then again he walked southward. He had walked almost to his home when the ocean began to look like blood.

Finally, he returned there to where his sister was living. He told her, “Nowhere did I see a man. Everywhere all of them were drowned, I suppose. I walked ten days and ten nights. I walked continually. All the water running down is not good. On the tenth night I thought, ‘I wanted to find a man alive for you to marry. Also, I wanted to find a woman alive for me to marry. That is the reason I walked over the whole earth.’ So let us marry each other. There is no one else anywhere still alive for us to marry.”

They dug a round depression in the ground for a house. There they lived, those two, together.

In time she gave birth to a son.

“We shall make a better house. Let's go down to the beach,” the man said.

Something was floating out on the ocean. All day they watched it. When it was about sunset they could still see it. Then they went together to their house.

“Let us look again,” the man said.

When it was growing daylight outside, they went together. Really, there was a redwood log there! They went together to the edge of the shore. There were whale ribs and body bones piled there.

“Let's split the log,” the man said.

They split the log into boards with the whale bones. They pounded the

― 76 ―

wedges with rocks. They made many planks. They packed the boards to the bank. There they built a house, a good one.

One day, he dipped for smelts there. Another woman came paddling along from the south in a canoe. They too married.

When again another year had passed, the head wife gave birth to another one. She gave birth to a girl child. When these two in turn became man and woman, they married. When it happened again and again this way, there came to be a great number of people. They scattered all over, everywhere. In every place, all the men lived together with their wives.

― 77 ―

3. “The Young Man from Serper” and
Other Stories

Yurok 1951, 1985–1988 Florence Shaughnessy, narrator R. H. Robins, collector and translator Jean Perry, collector

INTRODUCTION BY JEAN PERRY

These three stories come from the Yurok Indians, who still inhabit their ancestral homeland along the lower forty miles of the Klamath River and the surrounding coastline in Northwest California, near the Oregon border. Here they continue to harvest salmon, eels, and winter steelhead, to hunt deer and elk, and to follow many of the old lifeways and traditions along with other more modern pursuits.

All of these stories were told by Mrs. Florence Shaughnessy, a Yurok elder who was born in 1902 and lived in Requa, near the mouth of the Klamath. In 1951 Robert H. Robins was recruited as a young Ph.D. by the Survey of California Indian Languages at the University of California at Berkeley to come from London and do fieldwork on a California Indian language. Mary Haas assigned him to do a grammar, lexicon, and collection of texts of the Yurok language. He came to the

― 78 ―

Klamath and worked with Mrs. Shaughnessy during the winter and spring of 1951, left for a time, then returned in the late summer, during the height of the salmon run, to finish his work. In 1958 he published The Yurok Language.

When I met him in 1986 and talked to him about his fieldwork, he still remembered the place, the people, and much of the language in detail and with great fondness. He told me many things about the circumstances of his work that year—that he spent part of his time in Michigan at the Linguistic Society of America's Summer Institute working up the grammar, lexicon, and texts, and that he used his return visit to check the details and fill in the gaps in his data. During that year the Survey was able to purchase its first tape recorder, which was shared among all the researchers in the field. He said that he (along with Bill Bright, who was then working on Karuk just upriver) was able to keep the recorder for two weeks, rather than the usual one. He told me that on his return visit, Mrs. Shaughnessy was very busy working on the Ark, her floating restaurant, and that he was worried that he might be bothering her, so he tried to minimize the bother. (Ironically, she once told me that Robins was sometimes in too much of a hurry to take down detailed explanations, that he would run into the kitchen and say, “What's the word for so-and-so?” and then run back out again.) “The Young Man from Serper” is one of the stories that Robins recorded with that tape recorder in the Yurok language and translated into English.

I, too, worked with Mrs. Shaughnessy, although much later in her life, from the end of 1985 until she passed away in 1988. I, too, was working for the Survey when I first came to Yurok country. The first goal of our work together was to record stories. The two stories I have selected here are reminiscences from her childhood, in contrast to the old, formal, and mythical “Young Man from Serper.” Though she told them to me in both Yurok and English, I have decided to use the English versions here, because they directly reflect her voice and storytelling style in English, without the mediation of a translator. They are transcribed verbatim, with only minor editing.

When she told me the story about Blind Bill, we were sitting in her room, looking out the window at the hillside where it happened, and she was pointing out where the buildings once stood (most of them are gone now). So this story has always held a sense of immediate reality for

― 79 ―

FIGURE 1. Florence Shaughnessy. Copyright 1988 Jean Perry.

me, and conveys a feeling of Requa in its boomtown days when the canneries were still in operation, with the old Indian way of life mingling with that of the newcomers. The owl in the story, of course, foretells death, and one way to circumvent that message is to “kill the messenger,” the owl.

“Ragged Ass Hill” is a steep mountainside leading down to the beach south of Crescent City, California. The name is derived from the experience of a settler in the 1860s. Wagon drivers would usually tie a log to the wagon to hold it back. The present Highway 101 is slightly east of the wagon road described in this story but is still quite steep. Nowadays as I drive through that area, I think of my daughter, who is Mrs. Shaughnessy's niece and who is about the same age as Mrs. Shaughnessy was then, and I wonder how she would manage such a trip. These stories show how rapid—just a few generations—the transition from the old ways to the frontier to modern times has been in this region of California, one of the last areas of the Continental United States to be settled.

“The Young Man from Serper” was one of Mrs. Shaughnessy's favorite stories. Her mother was from Serper, and this story was handed down within her family. I believe Mrs. Shaughnessy learned it from her grand-mother,

― 80 ―

who spoke only Yurok. It is a mythical tale, a journey across a mythical geography during the time long ago when animals were like people and the idealized world that parallels this one on earth was more readily accessible than it is now. Such journeys often provide the framework for Yurok myths.

In the myth, the notion of the white deer is highly significant, because the Yurok regarded them as sacred. Likewise, the white sand on the other shore signals that it is a special place, since our local beaches have sand that is dark gray to black. Oregos is a tall, upright rock that stands at the mouth of the Klamath River. It is considered to have once been a person, a very long time ago, and there are stories about it as well. Going out the mouth on the eleventh breaker is not a case of number symbolism; the eleventh breaker is simply said to be the smallest one, the one on which it is easiest to pass through the rough place where the river current and the surf collide.

Oddly enough, Mrs. Shaughnessy was not entirely satisfied with the version of this story as it appears here, as she told it into Robins's tape recorder. Her main criticism was that parts of the story had been left out. Early in our work together, she told me a very di erent version of it in English. It seems that when the young man was leaving to return home, a few of the people there wanted to rescue Coyote, so “all the animals with teeth” went and chewed holes in their boats so that Coyote would be sure to leave. And when the young man returned home, his grandmother (and a grandfather) were still alive. The moral of the story as she told it to me was that it is good to take care of the old people—very di erent from the moral of the Robins version, which is that one should not want too much. We continued to work on this story on and o during our time together but never really completed a definitive version. It is clear to me that Mrs. Shaughnessy knew several di erent versions of this story.

These three stories are but a very small sample of the wealth and variety of Mrs. Shaughnessy's repertoire. She, in turn, was but one of a number of valued Yurok storytellers from her generation. Although the Yurok oral tradition continues on in various ways, the Yurok language is severely endangered today, because only the oldest people speak it fluently. And as the language is endangered, so this repertoire of stories—indeed, a whole way of telling stories—is endangered, too.

― 81 ―

For a cultural overview, start with Arnold Pilling's article “Yurok” in the California volume of the Smithsonian Handbook. R.H. Robins combines grammar, eight texts (including “The Young Man from Serper”), and a Yurok-English vocabulary in The Yurok Language: Grammar, Texts, Lexicon. Alfred L. Kroeber's Yurok Myths, published posthumously, is a rich and important collection of traditional narratives, mostly told in English, drawn from a wide variety of Yurok storytellers; it includes some stylistic and folkloristic analysis of the texts.

“The Young Man from Serper” and
Other Stories

BLIND BILL AND THE OWL

	In the old days,
	right up there,
	there used to be a flat.
	Brizzard's used to have a store there.
	Above there they have a salt house,
	and then above that they had a big hall house where people
	would dance.
	They put on Christmas plays and everything in there.
	And a little above that was a jail house.

	When an owl comes and starts making noise around your home,
	it's bad luck.
	Mama's cousin was Blind Bill,
	Starwen Bill.
	He lived with us.
	She came and got him.
	She says,
	“There's an owl, now,
	making noise right out here.”
― 82 ―
	And he says,
	“Pick me up some flat rocks,
	like that.
	I want three,
	three rocks.”

	So she went out with the lantern and picked up the rocks.
	He said,
	“Don't bring them in the house.
	Give them to me when I get out there,
	and then you show me the direction,”
	because he was blind.
	“Show me the direction.”

	While he was getting his directions this owl made noise again,
	so he knew right where.
	I guess he had already said something to those rocks,
	blessed them or whatever.
	He threw them down there,
	and then there was not another sound.

	Early in the morning,
	as soon as he got up,
	he told Mom,
	“Get those kids up.
	I want them to get that owl.”
	And so we got up and went around there.
	We looked in the hall there,
	and we looked around by the jail,
	all around.
	And we found it,
	we saw it.
	By golly, he killed that owl!
	That blind man killed that owl in the nighttime.

RAGGED ASS HILL

	With us,
	we lived here,
― 83 ―
	and it was only toward the last that we had hard times.
	But at first Dad used to go out and gamble.
	Sometimes he'd go to Crescent City and stay three or four nights
	playing Indian cards.
	He'd take his drum,
	and he was a good singer.
	He'd take his team.
	They'd go up there and play the Smith Rivers.
	There were two or three di erent tribes of Indians up there all in
	the same area,
	but they spoke their own di erent dialect.
	They'd go up there and play them.
	Sometimes they'd lose and come home pretty poor.
	But then Dad had a lot of friends in Crescent City.
	He always took his wagon and the team when he went.
	So then he'd stop and borrow money from the friends,
	and then stop the wagon and make all the friends walk up.

	Oh! You don't know what they would call it—
	Ragged Ass Hill!
	Boy,
	to bring freight up that hill!
	Oh my goodness!
	You almost had to get out and help the horses.

	I must have been eight or nine years old,
	because I was always a big girl for my age.
	Something went wrong with Dad's eyes.
	And there was nobody that could drive.
	We had a little buggy,
	one with those little tops like you see in pictures now,
	a little black buggy.
	Well, they said,
	“Florence is the only one that can drive,”
	because I used to drive the team getting the hay in.
	“She can drive.”
	Well,
	Dad said,
― 84 ―
	“What about Ragged Ass Hill?”
	They said,
	“Florence will drive,”
	and he had to take me because there was no one else.
	His eyes were blind then,
	they were hurt so bad.
	So somebody said,
	“Jimmy,
	why don't you cut down a good-sized pine tree up at the top
	there?
	Take your saw and your axe and yank the rope and tie that in
	the back.
	Then the horses will have to pull that.”

	So that's how,
	using the brakes,
	I got down that hill.
	We got down to Cushing Creek,
	and even then we had Indians living there.
	There used to be three little huts there,
	and there were three Indians,
	one old man and two women.
	They looked like they were blind to me.
	But Dad talked to them;
	they knew Jimmy.
	And they blessed him and wished him luck.

	We still has five miles to go.
	They say that beach is five miles long.
	You see,
	we had to make that beach while the tide was out.
	Because at high tide you had to seek the sand roads in the back,
	and sometimes they weren't even passable.
	You'd get stuck.
	So we had to hurry across there.
	But we made it.
	I got to the stable.

	All I know is that they called that hill Ragged Ass Hill.
― 85 ―
	It seems that some men came down through there,
	and it was so brushy that they just tore their pants to shreds
	by the time they got down to the bottom of the hill.
	That's why they named it Ragged Ass Hill.
	It was a bad one.
	It's still there.

THE YOUNG MAN FROM SERPER

Once upon a time an old woman lived up the river, and she had her grandson there with her. It was difficult for her to look after her grandson. The boy was very small, but as he began to grow up it turned out that all he would do was to go down to the water's edge and was never done with fishing for trout; whatever he caught he gave to his grandmother. And then the old woman began to live better because the boy was always catching something in his fishing. He began to get bigger and then he would catch all sorts of birds, and the old woman would say, “Child, this one's feather is pretty; you will make something with this; we will put it away.”

Then he quite grew up and became a young man, and it so turned out that all he did was to hunt. And once it seemed as if something said to him, “Go way up into the hills,” and he saw lying there a tiny white fawn. He took it and carried it away and felt very pleased. He said, “Look, grandmother, I have caught this and will make it a pet.” The old woman was very glad. It so turned out that his pet ran around there; whenever the young man went anywhere his pet would often run right on ahead of him. The pet grew up and it often happened that it disappeared in these runs. He would look for it and frequently found it high up in the hills.

Once the young man woke up, looked, and searched in vain for his pet. It was not there. Then he ran straight o to look where else it could have gone. He also asked his grandmother, “Haven't you seen my pet, Grandmother?” She said, “No, child, I have not seen anything here this morning.” Then he ran o ; and he had a friend, and so he went to him. He said, “Let us both go together and look; my pet has disappeared.”

― 86 ―

And for a long time they looked everywhere, and they came back and lay down. In the evening he thought, “I believe that maybe it will come back now.”

The following morning they looked for it again; but no, there was nothing moving about there. So it went on, and the young man mourned its loss and came to pine for his pet. Then one night it seems he was not sleeping soundly, and he heard something apparently talking to him. He was told, “Wake your friend up, and both of you go down to the water. Your friend is to sit in the front of the boat, and you stand behind. Don't touch your paddle; you are just to stand there.”

So he did just as he was told. His friend woke up, and they went down to the water. His friend sat in the boat in front and watched; they did not speak. Then the boat moved and slid down into the water, and then sped along. The boat passed through patches of very rough water as though it was quite smooth as it seemed to move along on top of the water. Then he saw that it was being taken down the river.

From up in the hills Coyote had seen where something was moving along and had heard tell that the two young men were being carried down from across the river. Coyote thought, “Well I will not be left behind. There is bound to be plenty more to eat wherever they are going. Shouldn't I go too?” He ran along the bank, and whenever he got to any point on the riverside the boat was passing near him. And in this way Coyote jumped along and saw the boat floating down and moving toward the mouth of the river. Then Coyote ran and came along the bank to Hop'ew [Klamath]; he jumped and saw the boat already moving far down stream. Then Coyote ran for all his might along the bank to pass it and chased after the boat.

Then he leaped on to the rock Oregos as the boat was first breasting the breakers. It was just going to pass the rock, and Coyote jumped in and came crashing down from high up into it. Then he said, “Yes, my grandchildren, I will come with you wherever you are going, for I think you will not get on well if there is no one who will speak on your behalf wherever you may go.”

― 87 ―

Then the boat sped on; eleven times it broke through the waves at the mouth of the river, and then went on its way. So it was that it sped on; it sped on toward the west. Then it was dark for a long time, and the boat still sped on.

The next morning they looked and fancied they saw some things swimming ahead of them. Even Coyote was now afraid and did not talk, because he had been chattering and at last had felt drowsy where he was sitting, and was not the first to see that it looked like land in sight. Then they saw that it really was land lying right out in the ocean. And the sand was all white, and a crowd of people were standing on the shore to watch the boat bounding in there.

Then they landed. When they landed they saw that there were seals going ashore, and that it was they that had towed the boat. And then two girls arrived there and one said, “Come to our house; we will be going. I am sure you are tired, for your voyage here has been long.”

Coyote went on ahead and ran to see how the people lived who lived there. The two young men went up to the house and entered, and there stood another young man. Then he said, “I am glad that you have come, Brother-in-law,” and then he said, “Let us go and bathe ourselves.” They went outside and were all together at the young man's dwelling.

Then Coyote thought, “How very pretty that girl is. I think I will get acquainted a little with her.” They were sitting by the fire when the cooking was finished, and Coyote sat down right in the middle. No notice whatever was taken of him where he sat.

The two who had arrived had a meal when they came in. They could not but feel strange wondering where on earth they had come to at this place, for the sand was all white, and they had never seen people living like this. Then one of the girls said, “Now I will tell you in full why you have come here. I am your former pet. For a long time I stayed outside, and then I saw how you lived. I saw that you were good and loved you for it. It was I who engaged the seals, saying to each of them ‘Go and fetch him.’ I have a sister. I thought too that you would be lonely here

― 88 ―

if you did not bring your friend; and my sister may be his wife.” He thought, “Well,” and then he thought, “So this girl is my former pet, and that is why I loved her so much.” Then they loved one another well, and were married, and lived long and happily, and had children.

Then gradually the woman noticed that it happened that her husband would go far up in the hills and sit somewhere there. For a long time he would gaze out over the water. And one day the woman followed him and said, “Alas, my husband, you seem to have something on your mind.” He said, “No, I sit here, but I have nothing on my mind.” Then his wife said, “I think, no I know, how you are; you keep sitting here and gazing. I think you are homesick here. Do you want to go back home?” Again he said, “No.” She said, “Well, I know that really you are homesick. And I will tell you that if you decide to go home, I will arrange it that you shall go home.”

Then he thought, “I will go and tell my friend, and I shall go home.” He went in where his friend lived and said, “Let us both go home. Arrangements can be made for us to go home.” Then his friend thought, “No, friend, I will not go with you. I now like living here; I have my children and I will not leave them.” The other said, “Well, I shall go home; I shall return. Alas, alas that my grandmother's life is a burden to her, as I fear she does not know where I have disappeared to.”

And so it came about that the boat was launched. And then they saw there was a crowd and that something was being dragged along there. It was Coyote being dragged along; he was all tied up, and thrown into the boat, because people were fed up with Coyote ever since he had been there. Whenever anyone was at home he leaped into the house and said, “Grandmother, isn't there anything lying here for me to eat?” And he was told, “Be o outside! Who are you and what on earth are you doing here?” Coyote ran up again; “Aha,” he said. “It seems there is some soup in the pot here. I think I will have some.” Then he gobbled it all up and heard the old woman pick up her stick. “Be o ! You are just going to steal again. Ugh! I hate you. Don't come here again! Don't come to the house again to steal something!” So he was now hated by everyone, and

― 89 ―

therefore he was thrown into the boat. After a shout the boat was thrust out into the sea.

Then the young man came back again to this part of the world. At once he went up the river, and when he arrived there he saw that it was now a long time since his grandmother had died. His house was no more; it had fallen down, and nothing remained. Then he thought, “What a terrible thing has befallen me! Now I have come to be here alone. How happily I was living across the water, and I have left it all.”

And so for this we say that it is not good if a person thinks too much “I will have everything.” But a man lives happily if somewhere he has plenty of friends, and has his money; then he does not go around thinking that he should have everything that does not belong to him, and wishing it were his own.

― 90 ―

4. Coyote and Old Woman Bullhead

Karuk circa 1930 Margaret Harrie, narrator Hans JØrgen Uldall, collector Julian Lang, translator

A Karuk elder's commentary, 1920s

	Springtime comes more quickly when we recite our creation stories.
	We lay down together for a long time
	and recite the stories to each other in turn.
	We answer each telling with a telling.
	And when we recite creation stories long into the night,
	daylight comes more quickly.

INTRODUCTION BY JULIAN LANG

The Karuk are a Hokan-speaking people living in mountainous Northwestern California. Traditionally, they lived along the Klamath River between their territorial boundary with the Yurok and the California-Oregon border. They lived by hunting, gathering, and especially fishing. Salmon and acorns were the staples of life, because these were what the land gave in abundance, as everywhere in Northern California. They were closely allied in social structure and worldview—though not in linguistic affiliation—with the Hupa and Yurok.

― 91 ―

Then came the Europeans. The American “gold fever” of 1850 ended nearly as quickly as it began. It left behind widespread disruption of Karuk culture, destruction of many village sites and other lands, and death for many. As the placer mines petered out, the miners left in droves, leaving behind the Karuk to resume their lives, in relative peace, and still living within their aboriginal homelands. Today there are about twenty-eight hundred tribal members. Important religious and healing ceremonies continue to be held annually at the same sites ordained by the spirit race known through the tribal creation stories.

In pre-Contact times (prior to 1849) a Karuk creation story possessed a unique power to transport the teller and the listener from their present into myth-time. The word ukn$iCii was a signal that a pikva, or creation story, was about to be told, and that the present was about to become one with the creation. The awesome power and energy of the Ikxaréeyav, the spirit inhabitants of myth-time, was unleashed with the telling. Cultural protocol insisted upon silence while the story was recited. Often recitations lasted well into the night. When special guests visited, the best pikva were recited: the stories of Ithyarukpíhriiv (‘Across-the-Water-Wid-ower’), Ikmahachram'íshiip Veekxaréeyav (‘Sacred-Sweathouse-Spirit’), and Kahthuxrivishkúrutihan (‘One-Upriver-Who-Carries-the-NetworkSack’). The best pikva were rarely told in mixed company, being considered the highest form of tribal knowledge. Only the wealthiest and most spiritually endowed families possessed such stories.

There are very few pikváhaan, or storytellers, today, in the pre-Contact sense. Rarely used to invoke the creation, today the pikva have become grist for elementary school education. For instance, in California the study of California Native peoples occurs during the fourth grade (when students are ten years of age), and only at that time. An arbitrary and distinctly non-Indian educational framework forces the conformity of pikva, trivializing medicine formulas and other important, orally transmitted cultural knowledge.

The very origin and design of the Karuk worldview is delineated by the pikva. They are the verbal chronicle of the prehuman era of the Ikxaréeyav, the Immortals, and their world, the Pikváhahirak (‘Place-of-the-Creation-Stories’). As Yaas'ára, or Humanity, was about to come into existence, the Immortals were instructed to transform themselves into what is now the diversity of the Karuk natural world. Individually named and motivated, each Ikxaréeyav metamorphosed into an animal, a bird,

― 92 ―

a plant, a mountain, a constellation. Sometimes an Ikxaréeyav family transformed together. Whether alone or as a group, the Ikxaréeyav left behind their “story” (that is, their insights and instructions) for the benefit of Humanity.

The initial religious Karuk ceremony of the year, the First Salmon Ceremony, prominently featured pikva storytelling. In April of each year a spring salmon was ritually caught and cremated. The rising smoke of the fire served as Humanity's signal to the Heavens requesting that all eating and hunting taboos be erased, and that good fortune and good health descend upon the Earth. The Salmon Ceremony ritual was preceded by a month-long period during which the adolescent boys stayed in the sacred Ameekyáaraam (‘Where-They-Make-the-Salmon’) Sweat House, learning the pikva of Hookbill Salmon, Spring Salmon, Steelhead, Lamprey Eel, Summer Salmon, Fall Salmon, Trout, Sucker, the Old Spinsters, Buzzard, Grizzly Bear, and many others. Of these sweat house stories it was said, “Kóovura vaa kooka píkva, áas va'avahapíkva” ‘all that kind of stories, stories of food from the river.’

The story included here concerns the now-familiar figure of Pihněefich, Coyote. In Northwestern California, Coyote was regarded as “the craziest and nastiest man.” Usually the stories told about him reveal his bu oonery and lascivious nature. This story is unique because it presents Coyote's darkest side. When recited, the story invariably causes both Native and non-Native audiences to squirm uncomfortably in their seats as their well-known, funny, crazy Coyote murders a child in cold blood, greedily eats the child's food, and physically and verbally abuses an old woman who has come to avenge the murder of her grandson. When finally she overcomes Coyote, she transforms.

This pikva was recited by Margaret Harrie, known as M$aCakich (a diminutive of the English “Maggie”). She was from the village site of Asánaamkarak (Ike's Flat) on the Klamath River, which was the site of the First Salmon Ceremony. Her son, Benonie Harrie, became a highly respected ěem—a shaman. The Danish linguist Hans JØrgen Uldall recorded the story in the early 1930s at Harrie's home in the Quartz Valley near Ft. Jones, California (see Lang 1994). Uldall, a noted phonetician of the day, was invited by Alfred Kroeber, the head of the anthropology department at U.C. Berkeley, to study California Indian languages and, incidentally, to trace the footsteps of the Spanish physician-linguist Jaime de Angulo, who had transcribed several creation stories from Margaret

― 93 ―

Harrie and texts from her son. I translated Uldall's phonetic transcriptions after finding them—handwritten, in pencil, on lined “filler” paper—in the archives of the Survey of California and Other Indian Languages in 1989.

Each pikva opens with the word ukn$iCii, its only functional usage. The word means ‘a story from the time of creation is about to be recited’. Once uttered, there should be no talking among the listeners, and no interruptions, because the pikváhaan, the pikva-teller, must render the story verbatim, just as it was previously taught to him or her. All creation stories take place during the era known as Pikváhahirak (‘Place-of-the-Creation-Stories’). The word kupánakanakana (its only functional usage) ends the creation story and alerts the listeners that they have been returned to the present time. After bringing us back, the teller usually reminds us of the most significant deed of the story's protagonist. Finally, the teller recites a kind of word-medicine which she or he must speak after every recitation in order to hasten forth the springtime (stories are reserved for the winter months, as is the case with many tribes), by beckoning forth Spring Salmon and the brodiaea plants. The recitation also attests that the teller has been punctilious in his or her telling of the story. A sloppy telling might result in the teller having a vasíhkuun (a crooked back) in old age, or some other bad luck, such as a snake bite or broken leg. Some tellers elaborate their recitation (in fun) by saying that their “asses are wrinkled and shriveled” from lack of food.

The conventional recitation:

	Cheemy$aCach ik Ishy$aCat imshiríhraavish!
	Spring Salmon, you must shine upriver quickly!

	Náyaavheesh ik!
	You must hurry to me!

	Cheemy$aCach ik Ataychúkinach i'uunúpraveesh!
	Brodiaea, you must sprout upriver quickly!

	Náyaavheesh ik!
	You must hurry to me!

	Nanivási vúra veekináyaach!
	My back is straight!

― 94 ―

The self-mocking coda:

	Afupchúrax taneemchitátkoo!
	My ass is all wrinkled and shriveled!

Coyote and Old Woman Bullhead

Ukn$iCii …

A person lived there. He thought, “I'm going upriver. I'm tired of living here! I feel lonesome.”

So, he left. He went a long ways upriver, to where a big creek flowed down. He looked up the creek, when suddenly he saw a boy walking about. The boy carried lots and lots of trout.

The man looked at the boy and said, “Geez, I like eating trout, I wish I was eating some of his.” The man went over to the boy.

― 95 ―

“Where did you find that trout?”

The boy said, “I caught them.”

“You couldn't have caught that many fish! I bet you've been traveling with someone else!”

The boy said, “No-o-o. I have a willow seine. I was just there to see it. That's where I caught the trout.”

Then the man said, “Are you telling me the truth?” The man was thinking to himself, “I'm going to murder him.” And then he killed the boy.

“Hooray! I'm gonna eat trout!” The man built a fire, a big fire. Then he hid the one he had just murdered. There was a logjam nearby, and he hid the body under a log.

Then he went back to his fire, and he roasted the trout. He picked some herbs, and added them to his cooking.

Then he ate, finally devouring all the trout. Then he thought, “Hooray! I'm just full! Now I can travel a long ways upriver!” He said to himself, “I'm going to paint myself.”

He saw smoke rising when he looked upriver. “Hey, I'm about to arrive at a village!” So he painted himself up good with red-earth paint.

Then he decorated his buckskin shoes. He painted red stripes running down his leather leggings, and he painted his buckskin blanket completely red with the earth paint. He put on an Indian-money necklace, and then he put on a new man's basketry cap.

Then he walked upriver.

After walking just a little ways, he looked upriver and saw an old woman standing in the trail. She was crying.

― 96 ―

The man arrived where she stood, and asked her, “You're crying here, in the path?”

The old woman refused to answer him.

“Why don't you answer me!” the man asked. The old woman just kept on crying. Then he said, “you can't beat me up!”

The man started to walk upriver. He barely passed her by, when she grabbed him around the waist.

“Hey, let me go! Why did you grab me?” He tried hard to pry apart her grasp-hold, but he couldn't do it. She was slippery. He gave it his all, but she still held onto him.

Suddenly there were dark clouds! Before too long it was raining. The rain just flowed down. When he looked downhill toward the river, the water was rising.

And Coyote thought, “It's all right now! She'll let me go now, as soon as the river rises up to us here. She's so short! It's all right now.”

Finally, the river rose right up to where they stood. The man said, “Hey! My nice shoes are getting wet! My little leggings are getting wet! Let me go!” She refused to answer; the water hit them. “It's all right now!” the man thought. “She'll let me go when she disappears under the water!”

Finally the water was up to her knees. He kept thinking, “I wish she'd let me go.” He tried hard to pry her hands apart again. It was no use.

Finally the water was up to his waist. “All right! She'll be under water any moment!” Then she disappeared under the water.

Coyote started crying then—still she held onto him. Finally both of them disappeared under the water. The river rose to uphill of where they were. Then, she let him go.

The old woman poked her head out of the water. “Let it be so, that I become

― 97 ―

transformed here in the water!” And then she turned into Bullhead Fish.

As for Coyote, he drifted far downriver. The old woman found him stuck in among some willows. When the high water receded, the old woman hauled him out of there.

As for the old Spirit Woman, she came back to this world.

[*] That is, she came back to this mortal world, transformed as Bullhead.

And Coyote, he came back to life again!

Kupánakanakana.

Coyote did that. He killed the old woman's grandson …

Spring Salmon, you must shine upriver quickly! You must hurry to me!

Brodiaea, you must sprout upriver quickly! You must hurry to me!

My back is straight!

― 98 ―

5. The Devil Who Died Laughing

Karuk 1950 Mamie Offield, narrator William Bright, collector and translator

INTRODUCTION BY WILLIAM BRIGHT

My principal fieldwork on the Karuk language (previously called “Karok”) was done in the spring of 1949 and the summer of 1950. During the latter period, in search of Karuk speakers who could tell traditional stories, I visited Mrs. Mamie Offield, an elderly woman living at her summer home on the slope of Mount Offield, near Somes Bar, in Siskiyou County. (During the winters, she lived in Los Angeles.) Some years before, she had served as a translator and consultant for the ethnographic fieldwork of Professor Edward W. Gi ord, of Berkeley; people told me that she knew a lot, but that she was “kinda mean”—that is, unfriendly or uncooperative. I was apprehensive, but in fact she proved to be knowledgeable, friendly, and very cooperative. During that summer she dictated eighteen stories and helped me translate them. Most were myths, about the deeds of Coyote and the other Ikxaréeyavs—the First People who inhabited the earth before humans came into existence. But others were stories with human characters—sometimes involving

― 99 ―

supernatural occurrences, but believed to have happened in “modern” times.

Among these, the anecdote that I have called “The Devil Who Died Laughing” has always been one of my favorites. It involves no superhuman characters and no moral lesson: it's simply a funny story, which I have enjoyed retelling, and my Karuk friends have enjoyed hearing, for the last forty years. Years ago, I published the text (Bright 1957:274–75; there is a photo of Mrs. Offield on page 155) in a technical transcription system for linguists and other specialists. The spelling for Karuk used in this introduction is a more practical system, which I have recently developed for the Karuk tribe's language program.

To understand the story, one needs to know what the Indians of Northwestern California mean by a “devil” (Karuk apurúvaan). The term has nothing to do with demons from Hell, but rather refers to sorcerers: human beings, male or female, who practice malicious magic. (One could use the term “witch” except for the female connotation of the English word.) Devils get their power from magical objects called ápuroon ‘ devil machines’; armed with these, they prowl around human dwellings at night, sometimes emitting machnat, or small flashes of light (will-o'-the-wisps?), spying on the inhabitants and choosing their victims.

In Mamie Offield's story, a pair of devils come to spy on a man and his wife, who are occupying a temporary house in an acorn-gathering area. But the devils get a surprise and never have a chance to practice their sorcery. Stories in which devils are thwarted seem to be a recognized genre; Mrs. Offield told me three such stories on a summer afternoon in 1950 (see Bright 1957:274–77). The humor of such stories is perhaps enhanced by being at the expense of a hated and feared class of people; we might imagine a similar modern story in which the prowlers were tax collectors.

In spite of its secular nature, the story shows an ethnopoetic structure similar to that of Karuk myths and other narratives. It consists of fourteen “verses,” most of which begin with a sentence-initial particle construction—usually kári xás ‘and then’, indicating sequentiality. As is typical in Karuk storytelling, the initial verse lacks this element. The following central passage shows a variation in the use of initial particles: verses 11–12, at the climax of the action, begin not with kári xás, but with the word hínupa indicating a surprise, translatable as ‘and there … !’ This

― 100 ―

initiates a kind of freeze-frame e ect: the sequence of actions is suspended and previously unknown features of the situation are revealed.

5	Kári xás chámuxich ú-ykar.
	And then sucker he caught it.
	And then (the husband) caught a sucker.

6	Kári xás pa-asiktávaan u-piip, “Chími kan-thimn$uCup-i.”
	And then the woman she said, “(intention) I'll roast it.”
	And then the woman said, “I'm going to roast it.”

7	Kári xás u-thímnup, pa-chámuxich.
	And then she roasted it, the sucker.
	And then she roasted it, that sucker.

8	Kári xás pá-faan u-yhúku-rishuk.
	And then the guts she ripped them out.
	And then she ripped out the guts.

9	Kári xás pa-mukun-ikrívraam u-súru-ruprin-ahi-ti, yítha-kan.
	And then their house there was a hole through, at one place.
	Now then, there was a hole through their house-wall, at a certain place.

10	Kári xás vaa kaan u-ákith-rupri, pá-faan.
	And then that there she flung them through, the guts.
	And then she flung them through that hole, those guts.

11	Hínupa vaa káan u-t-n$uCuprih-ti, yítha pa-apurúvaan.
	And there that there he was peeking through, one the devil.
	And there he was peeking through that hole, a certain devil!

12	Hínupa yúp-yaach t-u-ákith-tir.
	And there smack in the eye she had flung them.
	And there she had flung them right smack in his eye!

Apart from the initial particle constructions, features of ethnopoetic structure in this passage include the following:

― 101 ―

Word Order

There is regular alternation of preverbal and postverbal position for nouns to indicate new and old information, respectively. Thus we have, in verses 5–7, “He caught a sucker [new]—And then she roasted it, that sucker [old]”; then, in verses 8–10, “She ripped out the guts [new]—And then she flung them through that hole, those guts [old].” Along with the repeated kári xás, this pattern suggests an atmosphere of routine activity or “business as usual,” serving as a background to the surprise that comes in verses 10–11.

Repetition

There is repetition of the verbal suffix meaning ‘through a hole’, with the three variants -ruprin ~ -rupri ~ -n$uCuprih: (9) “There was a hole through their house-wall”; (10) “She flung them through that hole, those guts”; (11) “He was peeking through that hole.” Apart from the poetic echo e ect of the partial phonetic repetition, the reiterated semantic element gives extra cohesion to the narrative at this point of climax.

For a translation of this text, I would have liked to present Mrs. Offield's own English version, but unfortunately, I have not preserved that—either in a verbatim transcript, or in an audio recording—so I've done my best to reproduce features of her colloquial storytelling style, as I remember it: short sentences, informal but totally clear vocabulary and syntax, and certain Karuk stylistic devices such as the movement of old-information noun phrases to the end of the sentence (“And then she roasted it, that sucker”). Where the Karuk text uses repetition, I've tried to reproduce that faithfully in English. Finally, at several points where the Karuk uses vocabulary items that are highly distinctive, semantically or phonologically, I've attempted to find correspondingly colorful English vocabulary. Thus, in verse 8, the verb-form uyhúkurishuk means ‘she pulled (something) out’ but can refer only to the guts of an animal; I translate “she ripped out the guts.” In verses 10 and 12, the verb stem ákith means not simply ‘to throw’ but ‘to throw something soft’—such as mud, dough, or (in this case) fish guts; I propose the translation

― 102 ―

“to fling.” In verse 12, the alliterative yúp-yaach, literally ‘eye-ex-actly’, suggests not just ‘right in the eye’ but the more vivid “smack in the eye.”

6. “The Boy Who Grew Up at Ta'k'imi l ding”
and Other Stories

Hupa 1963–1964 Minnie Reeves and Louisa Jackson, narrators Victor Golla, collector and translator

INTRODUCTION BY VICTOR GOLLA

Together with their close neighbors the Yurok on the lower Klamath River, and the Karuk further upstream on the Klamath, the aboriginal Hupa of the lower Trinity River subsisted (and subsisted well) on the abundant spring and fall runs of salmon, which they supplemented by gathering acorns and berries, trapping eels, and hunting deer and small game. The modern Hupa people have been able to preserve a close attachment to this rich environment, since they are fortunate to possess a large reservation that includes the center of their traditional territory, Hoopa Valley. This spectacularly beautiful eight-mile-long stretch of bottomland, studded with oaks, is located on the Trinity a few miles above its confluence with the Klamath. In the Hupa language it is called na: tinixw ‘where the trail goes back’, and its geography is closely interwoven with traditional Hupa religion and story.

― 105 ―

In addition to the people of Hoopa Valley (na: tinixwe ‘those of na: tinixw’), there were several Hupa-speaking tribelets, all virtually identical in language. Two of these tribelets (known ethnographically as the Chilula and the Whilkut) were located on Redwood Creek, west of Hoopa Valley. There was at least one tribelet upstream on the Trinity River, centered on the village of Le: lding where the Trinity and South Fork join.

Shortly before the turn of the century, Pliny Earle Goddard came to Hoopa as an interdenominational missionary. He built a church, which still stands, and learned Hupa sufficiently well to be able to preach in it. In 1900, however, he abandoned religious work to become an anthropologist. His ethnographic sketch “Life and Culture of the Hupa” is a classic, and he also published an important volume of traditional Hupa narratives, “Hupa Texts.” These studies, together with Goddard's numerous publications on the language, made the Hupa one of the best described Indian cultures of California in the early decades of this century. In 1927 the great anthropological linguist Edward Sapir added even more to the documentation of Hupa traditional culture in a field study that focused on language and literature. He collected seventy-six narratives, some of them quite long and most of them full of cultural detail. This important collection is now being readied for publication in a forthcoming volume of The Collected Works of Edward Sapir.

I began my own work with the Hupa in the 1960s. My work was primarily linguistic, but I also collected a number of narrative texts. The four Hupa stories included here are translations of narratives collected on tape in 1963 and 1964 from Mrs. Minnie Reeves and her younger sister, Mrs. Louisa Jackson. Minnie Reeves (1880–1972) was well past eighty at the time, and Louisa Jackson (1888–1991) was in her late seventies. Although married into Hoopa Valley families, Minnie and Louisa were actually from the Chilula tribelet. Their father, Dan Hill, and grandfather Tom Hill had refused to resettle the family on the Hoopa Valley Reservation after its establishment in 1864; they continued to live in the traditional village of Nolehding (‘waterfall place’) on lower Redwood Creek, a few miles northwest of the reservation boundary. The family moved to Hoopa in 1888, and both sisters attended the boarding school there.

Minnie Reeves was a talented narrator, and her carefully told stories

― 106 ―

span several genres. Her sister Louisa Jackson had a smaller repertoire, but a vivacious style.

“The Boy Who Grew Up at Ta'k'imilding” is the sacred charter of the two principal World Renewal dances. These ceremonies, the Hupa term for which is ch'idilye, are unique to the traditional cultures of the YurokKaruk-Hupa area and continue to be performed today. They focus on maintaining the equilibrium of the physical and social world through songs and dances pleasing to the k'ixinay, the supernatural inhabitants of the world before humans arrived who still exert influence on human a airs from a Heaven beyond the sky. The ceremonies are performed in two ten-day cycles, the White Deerskin Dance (xonsi l ch'idilye ‘summer World Renewal’) and the Jump Dance (xay ch'idilye‘winter World Re-newal’). The White Deerskin Dance takes place in August or early September at a series of dancegrounds in Hoopa Valley. The Jump Dance is performed in late September at a single site about one hundred yards upstream from the village of Ta'k'imilding (‘acorn cooking place’). Formerly the two dances may have been annual events; today they are biennial, held in odd-numbered years.

The story that Minnie relates is not in the strict sense a myth. Hupa myths relate events that happened in the days when the k'ixinay were still on earth, whereas this story has the character of a religious legend set in human times. In it the World Renewal dances are said to be the inspiration of a specific young boy, a child of the family that owns the xontah nikya: w (‘big house’), the largest and most prestigious house in the principal Hoopa Valley village, Ta'k'imilding. This boy is well-behaved and “sings all the time,” an indication that he has been chosen by the k'ixinay as a vehicle of spiritual power. Then one day he disappears in a cloud to join the k'ixinay beyond the sky. After a long absence he briefly reappears to his father to convey to the Hupa people how and where the k'ixinay want the World Renewal dances to be performed. “I will always come back. …I will always be watching,” he both promises and warns.

Minnie Reeves's telling of this sacred story was appropriately solemn and serious. Although her version was abbreviated and broken here and there by a hesitation or groping for words, it was clear that she was reciting well-known lines and phrases—a sacred text in the most real sense. (See the “Hupa Language Sample” at the end of this introduction for a closer look at the language behind the translation.)

― 107 ―

The incident that Minnie Reeves relates in “Grandfather's Ordeal” probably occurred in the 1850s or early 1860s, when hostilities between white settlers and Hupas—particularly the Chilulas—were at their worst. Minnie's maternal grandfather and the Indian doctor he was escorting were by no means the only Indians gratuitously killed or wounded by whites on the trails between Hoopa Valley and the coast. The need to import a shaman from Hoopa Valley underscores the peripheral status of the Chilula tribelet.

“The Stolen Woman” is one of many legends whose theme is a raid on a peaceful Hupa village by “wild Indians” from the south. There is undoubtedly a historical kernel to these stories, and the raiders (usually called mining'wiltach' ‘their faces-tattooed’) may be either the Yuki of Round Valley or the Hayfork Wintu. A particular twist to this story is the implication that the wealth of Me'dilding, the leading village of the upriver (southern) half of Hoopa Valley, is based on stolen treasure. Not surprisingly, Minnie's connections were largely to Ta'k'imilding and the downriver (northern) half of the valley.

“It Was Scratching” was told to me by Louisa Jackson. It belongs to a popular genre of “Indian Devil” stories, based on a widespread belief in witchcraft practices (k'ido: ngxwe). Devils are said to sneak around houses and graveyards in the night, peering through windows or catching people when they venture outside alone. They insert “pains” into people, causing illness, bad luck, and even death. Note how the woman in the story accuses the devil of having killed o her entire family (ch'e'whine l ya: n ‘he ate me up’ is the Hupa idiom). In traditional times, suspicions and accusations of deviling were quite common, giving social life a distinctly paranoid tinge.

Hupa Language Sample

The following lines of Hupa, with their glosses and translations, come from the beginning of the first story presented here, “The Boy Who Grew Up at Ta'k'imilding.”

Ta'k'imilding nat'tehldichwe: n, at Ta'k'imilding he grew up He grew up at Ta'k'imilding;

― 108 ―

xontah nikya: w me' ts'isla: n—kile: xich. House Big in he was born a boy he was born in the Big House—a boy.

Haya: l ang' lahxw na'k'iwing'ah wehst'e’; then it was only/nothing but he sang continually He would do nothing but sing all the time;

na'k'e'a'aw. he would keep singing he just kept singing.

Haya: l hay diydi ‘a:ya:xolch'ide'ine’, then whatever they would tell him Then, whatever they would tell him,

'aht'ingq'a'ant'e: mida' q'eh na'a'a'. everything its word/mouth after he carried it about he minded it.

'e'ilwil na'ky'a'ah'xw, it would get dark as he sang, He would sing all day long,

xontah nikya:w me', Ta'k'imilding. House Big in at Ta'k'imilding in the Big House at Ta'k'imilding.

7. The Bear Girl

Chimariko 1921 Sally Noble, narrator J. P. Harrington, collector Katherine Turner, translator

INTRODUCTION BY KATHERINE TURNER

The Chimariko language was once spoken on the Trinity River in Northwestern California, a heavily forested and mountainous country. Chimariko is classified by linguists as a Hokan language, but it is only distantly related to some of the other languages spoken in prehistoric California. To the west and northwest their neighbors were the Athabascan Whilkut and Hupa. Their neighbors to the south and east were Penutian-speaking Wintu people.

Sally Noble was the last known fluent speaker of the Chimariko language. She told the story of “The Bear Girl” to John Peabody Harrington in 1921. Mrs. Noble told Harrington several Chimariko stories as well as recounting historical events, describing customs such as tattooing and doctoring, and giving her personal reminiscences. There is no place in Harrington's notes of his work with her where she told a single story from

― 116 ―

start to finish. Sally Noble was remembering these stories from long before she told them to Harrington, and each time she told a story she would remember another detail or episode. Although she knew Chimariko, she had seldom spoken the language as an adult. By the time she told this story, she had not spoken Chimariko for many years, so she told it in many overlapping fragments. This story was pieced together from those fragments.

J. P. Harrington amassed more data about North American languages and cultures than any other person. An ethnographer and linguist, he was employed by the Bureau of American Ethnography. He recorded his notes on the Chimariko language from Sally Noble between September 1921 and January 1922. His notes are stored in the Smithsonian Institution in Washington, D.C. They have been photographed and microfilmed, making them more accessible to libraries around the world. By January 1922 Harrington had compiled several thousand pages of notes on Chimariko, and he planned to return to his work with Sally Noble in May. Mrs. Noble died in February 1922.

The story of “The Bear Girl” told here is my translation of Mrs. Noble's Chimariko, not her English versions of the story. She spoke in English at first, then in both Chimariko and English, and, finally, in Chimariko with an occasional English word or phrase. When she spoke English, Harrington wrote it down in English, and when she spoke Chimariko, he wrote it down phonetically because there is no alphabet for Chimariko. As Sally Noble got into the story of “The Bear Girl” in her own language, she added a wealth of detail absent from her English tellings.

In Chimariko the story is lyrical through its use of repetition to unfold the plot gradually. There is a majestic beauty in the repetitions. For most of the story, Mrs. Noble speaks one phrase and then partially restates it, adding just a little more detail before moving on to the next sentence. This is such a prominent feature that it is quite noticeable when Mrs. Noble does not exploit this device but moves straight ahead with her story, adding new information with each new sentence. For instance, in the scene where the Bear Girl abandons civilization for good (lines 60–73), there is very little repetition, and its absence underscores one of the climaxes of the story. We find the same pattern again near the end of the story (lines 96–104) at another dramatic moment, the scene where her brother shoots the Bear Girl.

― 117 ―

FIGURE 2. Sally Noble. Courtesy of the Bancroft Library, University of California, Berkeley.

A few additional notes about the translation of Chimariko may be in order. First, there is no di erence between he and she in Chimariko, so I have supplied the distinction for English-speaking readers; it would look and sound odd had I translated the Chimariko pronouns as it. Second, I have changed the order of the words from Chimariko word order to that of English and moved descriptive words to where they would occur in an English sentence.

― 118 ―

This story gives us a glimpse of Chimariko culture and beliefs, as in the concept that there was a time long ago when a person could grow up or “turn out” to be an animal. In translating this story into English, I have tried to reflect the style and phrasing as Sally Noble told it in Chimariko. The line breaks are an attempt to suggest the controlled, rhythmic pace of delivery that seems implicit in the language of the original. I have not elaborated or filled in blanks, because that would alter the story told and add nothing of significance. This story speaks for itself.

THE BEAR GIRL

	Long ago there was a cross Indian girl.
	She was cross and angry all the time.
	She did not like people.
	She had no appetite for food.
5	She did not like the food her mother fed her.
	She did not eat the food she was given.

― 119 ―

	They were afraid of her.
	They could do nothing with her.
	They wondered what she would amount to.
10	Everybody wondered how she would turn out.

	Her mother hired a good Indian doctor to ask
	what was the matter with the girl.
	She was not like people.
	She was not like our flesh.
	She was not a person.
15	She was not a human woman.
	She was going to turn out to be a bear.
	That's what the matter was.

	Everybody was afraid of her because she was so cross.
	She was always slapping.
20	She did not use a stick, not ever.
	She always slapped with her hand.
	She was not like the other children.
	She always slapped.
	When good children play,
25	they do not slap with their hands but use a stick.
	Their mother told the children: “Don't hit her.
	I am going to punish you if you hit the bear girl.”
	But they would sometimes hit her with a rock because she was so
	mean.

	When she was still a little girl,
30	she already slept alone in a little house,
	because everybody was afraid of her because she was so cross.
	When the hazelnuts and berries got ripe,
	she gathered wild blackberries,
	but she did not eat them in the house.

35	She had only one brother.
	Her brother watched his sister as she got a little bigger and
	crosser every year.

	Everybody kept a watch on her.
	Every year she got worse and worse.

― 120 ―

	When the old women went to gather hazelnuts,
40	she went with them.
	Each time she went a little further.
	She watched other people cracking the hazelnuts
	and learned how to crack them too,
	though she had been told not to.
45	She gathered lots of hazelnuts and cracked them,
	but she did not eat them in the house.
	Maybe she ate them out in the woods.
	In the house she threw everything around.
	She got worse and worse every year—bigger and crosser.

50	When the women went out to gather hazelnuts,
	the girl went to get a drink further upstream.
	When it was time to go home, the women called out:
	“We are going home.”
	They called to her and hollered,
55	“Come on, let's go.”
	They hollered but she did not answer.
	She went a little further every time.
	She went further into the brush.
	Finally she set the basket down on the trail and just kept going.

60	They say her brother followed her through the thick brush,
	and found the basket.
	She kept going, up into the mountains,
	and she threw away her apron.
	But she wore a nice fancy dress, well fixed up.
	Her brother found the apron and put it in the basket.
	She kept going, climbing higher and higher.
	Her brother found her nice fancy dress.
	He put it in the basket, laying it across her apron.
	Then he found her hat.
70	Her brother kept following her upstream through the brush.
	Finally he caught up with her.
	She had already changed into a bear.

	She looked back.
	She said:
― 121 ―
75	“My brother,
	I thought I was a natural born person,
	but I am a big bear.
	Now I get where I want to go,
	now I turn out to be a bear,
80	so that's how I turn out.
	I have turned out to be a bear,
	a cross female bear.
	Remember what I say:
	You will see me in a clover patch with lots of other bears.
85	I will be the biggest black bear.
	I won't run.
	That will be me.
	Don't shoot.”

	She had become a bear, she ran away as a bear.
90	That is the reason why the little girl was so mean.

	Her brother returned to the village and told the people what she
	said.
	“I am going to be big and black,
	don't shoot me,” she told him.
	Then, after a while, that boy got to be an old man.
95	All the men went bear hunting.
	The old man saw a big patch of clover and went to look at it.
	He saw lots of bears.
	He shot one.
	He shot a black bear twice.
100	Then he heard her:
	“Don't you recollect?
	I told my brother not to shoot me!”

	The bear got away through the snow high up on the mountain.
	The man looked for her,
105	but he never knew whether the bear died or not.
	But that bear could talk Indian.

	Finally, the man went home.
	At supper time he wouldn't eat or say anything.
― 122 ―
	He looked like he'd been crying.
110	He wouldn't say anything.
	He lay in bed for two days looking sick but saying nothing.

	His wife asked him,
	“What's the matter? Are you sick?”
	But he wouldn't say anything.

115	After a while he told his wife,
	“I shot her. I shot her twice.”
	And his wife said,
	“Don't tell the old folks. Don't tell them.”
	His wife said,
120	“Well, what's the use to cry, you can't help it,
	that part of it is done already,
	that part of it is gone,” she said.
	“She is alive and that's all.”

	So, he never told any people at all.
125	He told nobody else.
	He told only his wife.

― 123 ―

NORTH-CENTRAL CALIFORNIA

	Winter mosquitos go,
	Summer mosquitos come—
	Spring, hurry up!

Traditional story-closing formula, Wintu Dorothy Demetracopoulou and Cora Du Bois, “A Study of Wintu Mythology”

― 125 ―

SPELL SAID BY A GIRL DESIROUS
OF GETTING A HUSBAND

S·uwá! May you think about me to yourself! May you turn back to look! Would that I might stand before his face! I just cry to myself. Would that I might see him every day!

I do just as you do. Sometimes I dream of him, and I rise when it is daylight, and I look about. Now, as I see him, my heart flutters. I look at him without raising my eyes. He gives me trinkets, and I take them, and I wear them for some time, until they are worn out.

Northern Yana, Betty Brown, 1907 Edward Sapir, Yana Texts

― 127 ―

8. How My Father Found the Deer

Achumawi 1970 Lela Rhoades, narrator Bruce Nevin, collector and translator

INTRODUCTION BY BRUCE NEVIN

Probably they ought to be called the Is, or the Ish, their word for “people.” Anthropologists call them the Achumawi, from their word ajúm:á:wí, meaning dwellers on the ajúm:á or ‘river’, though the people themselves applied that term only to families who lived in the valley midway up the Pit River where the Fall River flows into it from the north. We will call them the Pit River people, for that is what they call themselves today.

Their territory overlaps two ecological zones. Traveling up the Pit River, one passes from deeply wooded intermountain declivities through valleys that are progressively higher, broader, and drier. Downriver from the place called wíní'ha:'lí'wa ‘where it [the salmon] turns back’, below the junction of the Fall River, one finds typically Californian deer and salmon, pine and oak. Upriver from that point, the land opens out to the high plateau ecology of sagebrush and juniper, jackrabbit and elk that one associates with Nevada and Eastern Oregon.

The people trapped animals in pits, hence the name. European explorers surely saw too the people's semisubterranean, earth-covered homes.

― 128 ―

The ancestors of the Pit River people were evidently among the earliest settled inhabitants of California, speakers of Hokan languages whose descendants include Yana to the south, Shasta, Chimariko, and Karuk to the west, and others which are now separated from this northern group by intervening populations, such as the Pomo and Yuman groups of languages.

From ancient times they have maintained an annual cycle of land use: descending to the great rivers to fish for salmon in the spring; scattering to small family camps in the cooler foothills and mountains in the summer and autumn to hunt and to harvest crops planted for them, as they saw it, by the hand of God; retiring for the winter (asjúy) to separated villages of permanent earth-covered homes (asjúy) in sheltered mountain valleys; then returning to the riverside for the salmon run, cycle after yearly cycle of life in the Garden.

After centuries, or perhaps millennia, speakers of Penutian languages, whose descendants include the Wintu and the Maidu, brought di erent forms of land use and social affiliation. They occupied their riverside villages throughout the year, making expeditions for hunting and for the gathering of particular foods or craft supplies. When the Hokan people returning in the spring found a small Penutian settlement at some choice fishing spot, they shifted to another just as good, or almost as good. But the newcomers spread along the river into chains of villages whose inhabitants responded with quick allegiance to ties of blood and marriage if conflict arose with returning Hokan fishermen. The autonomous families and bands of Hokan speakers could not compete. Gradually, but with no evidence of settled warfare so far as we can tell today, the Hokan people retreated from the great Sacramento Valley to its periphery and outlying regions, where they continued their way of life, adapting to changed ecological conditions where they needed to.^[1] The annual reunions for the spring salmon run, in which now both peoples were represented, continued to be the occasion of celebration, with feasting, dancing, singing, and gambling at the stick games.

At such a “big time” much trading was accomplished, and much courtship, for these were exogamous communities, proscribing marriage to relations calculated to a degree of remoteness that concerns only genealogists among us today. It was not uncommon for one of these small Pit River communities to include Modoc or Maidu or Wintu in-laws, and indeed one of these in-laws has an important role in our story. The

― 129 ―

fabric of communal life is woven of a thousand expectations and commitments that are as important to survival as the implements of hunt and harvest are for a small, highly interdependent community such as the one in which our story is set. So long as these mutual expectations are met, they scarcely rise to awareness. But this fabric is easily torn, and rifts put all parties at risk of privation and even death. As we shall see, the healing of relationships, the mending of reliability and reliance, was one of the responsibilities of a doctor or shaman.

Mrs. Lela Rhoades, whom it was my privilege and delight to call “Grandma,” told me this story about her father's work as a shaman on November 28, 1970, at her home in Redding, California, when she was about eighty-seven years of age. I had met her that summer, not long after the beginning of my first experience of linguistic fieldwork. She lived alone in a large trailer home south of town. I say “alone,” though her daughter and granddaughter were much present, her two sons lived nearby and visited, and before long her great-granddaughter's cradle was often at her feet as we sat and worked at her kitchen table—I with my tape recorder and notebook, she with her seemingly endless fund of stories and songs remembered from childhood. Once, she was singing me a song, remembering it, with her eyes closed, and she stopped suddenly and would not go on. “Something's looking at me,” she said—a spirit animal, such as her father worked with. “I don't want to catch it.” She explained that she could have been a doctor too, but she didn't want it, because it was an all-consuming profession. “People always want something from you,” she told me, “or blame you for something.”

Her father, Samson Grant, was of the Atsugewi or Hat Creek tribe.^[2] These are close relatives of the Pit River people, living immediately to the south of them. Like many Atsugewi, he spoke both languages. Around 1852, when he was only a young boy, the majority of the Pit River and Hat Creek people were force-marched by soldiers to the concentration camp in Round Valley, Mendocino County. Indians from all over the state were confined there. After his parents died in the camp, he made his living by hunting and fishing for an elderly widow, who in turn cooked and provided a home of sorts. In his early teens he worked in various places around the Sacramento Valley as a ranch hand.

He knew that not all of his people had been captured. After a few years he returned to Pit River country. He found Buckskin Jack, the Hat Creek chief, who later arranged his marriage to Lela's mother. Her family

― 130 ―

had hidden themselves at Wé:'lá:mugí:'wa ‘it gets shadowy early’, a remote place near Goose Valley, north of Burney. To the north and west of this valley stands Yét, great Mount Shasta—“Lonely as God,” in the celebrated words of Joaquin Miller, “and white as a winter moon.” Southward, beyond lesser heights, stands its companion Ye:dí:jana ‘the other Yét’ (Mount Lassen). Except for the remoteness of their valley, and the fact that they were there year-round, they were much like other Pit River family groups that had dwelt under the watchful guardian spirits of the mountains for more than ten thousand winters past.

When Grandma Lela told the story to me in the Pit River language, it was somewhat as it might be told to one who knew the participants and their motivations, who was familiar with the customs and expectations of the community—the easiest and most natural way to tell it in Pit River. But when she retold the story in English, she provided background information interpreting one culture to the other—the easiest and most natural way to tell it in English. For example, in English she had to explain how Uncle Jack called Samson his son-in-law. In Pit River, she merely used a kinship term that, like many in the language, happens to apply reciprocally to both the elder and younger member of a relationship. This sort of di erence of rendition is one of the thorniest and most disputed of the translator's problems. To present a story that is meaningful for English speakers, yet still reflects faithfully the teller's intentions and narrative skill, I have begun with her English rendition and have made it conform more closely to her Pit River rendition. Where new participants or new themes are introduced, the English version interjects more detail, some of which I have kept. This is especially obvious at the very beginning of the story. Here are the first few sentences, for comparison:^[3]

	Háné'gá tól chgí'wá:lujan twijí:ní Thence for long doctor he was
	qa itú wa'y:í:wílóo. the my late father
	A long time ago my late father was a doctor.
	Wíy:úmji twijí:ní. One who dwelt he was [An old Wintun man] was living there.
― 131 ―
	'Amqhágam qa dó:si dét'wi, dí:qá:lami, When a deer kill carry home
	'lá:sa'ch duji. happy to do
	When someone killed a deer, packed it home, he was happy.

The word wíy:úmji ‘one who [characteristically] dwelt’ has perhaps a bit of the sense of a “roomer” or “boarder” in English. The old Wintun doctor was around seventy years old. The elderly were dependent on relatives for sustenance. In the opening two paragraphs of the English rendition we are told much more about him, about Uncle Jack, and about their relationship.

The example shows the characteristic verb-subject-object word order of this language, but scarcely any of the complexity of pronominal, adverbial, and other prefixes and suffixes that Pit River verbs frequently have (for instance, twijí:ní, t-‘evidential’, w-‘3rd person’, -jí-‘be, do’, -n ‘durative past’), and only hints of the sound system, with its tones, its laryngealized consonants, and its uvular (q) sounds pronounced at the back of the throat; but these are after all matters for another kind of discussion. A particular problem for translation is ambiguity as to the reference of pronouns. In this narration, Mrs. Rhoades makes frequent use of a narrative infinitive construction, with no pronouns at all. This ambiguity was also a characteristic of the English rendition, which I have tried to remedy without disturbing the vernacular tone of the original.

Three details in the story may require clarification. First, when Samson Grant accepts and smokes the tobacco, it seals a contractual agreement. In earlier days, it would probably have been in a pipe (s'qoy'), but this was a rolled cigarette. Having served its ceremonial function, the tobacco cannot be used further, so the grandfather returns it to the earth. Second, in the matter of who is at fault—the uncle or his wife—for neglecting the old man's portions, I would accept at face value the uncle's claims about responsibility for the distribution of meat; he had presumably expressed his feelings to his wife about their elderly neighbor, and she may well have shared those feelings. Third, a doctor commonly worked with an assistant who “interpreted” the words of his song, but Samson Grant did this for himself.

Mrs. Rhoades's gifts as a storyteller, long whetted on the myths and

― 132 ―

traditional stories of her people, are applied here to a piece of family history with grace and skill. Regardless of whether these events could be proven or disproven to have happened exactly as told, her narration is a true and vivid representation of the concerns and values of the community in which it arose.

NOTES

1. This account, which seems entirely plausible to me, is based on the work of Christopher Chase-Dunn of Johns Hopkins University and S. Edward Clewett and Elaine Sundahl of Shasta College in Redding.

2. “Atsugewi” is the anthropologists' term for this tribe, on analogy with the name “Achumawi.” The actual Hat Creek word is acug:e, or “Atsuge.”

3. The Achumawi forms cited in this article are given in a practical orthography, not a linguistic one.

HOW MY FATHER FOUND THE DEER

A long time ago my late father was a doctor. There was an old Wintun man who lived with us. He was married to my grandfather's sister. He

― 133 ―

didn't know how to talk Pit River, just a few broken words, but when he would sing for somebody, his words were just clear. He used to live aside of my uncle, my mother's brother, who had a lot of children.

My uncle used to be a good deerhunter. He didn't like this old fellow because he was a doctor. A doctor can do things to you, by just looking at you. He knows what you're going to do tomorrow, and who you did something to yesterday. He'd sing first, and his power would look back, trace you back. Then he'd tell you what you did and did and did, he'd pick up the tracks. He could see ahead too, maybe four or five years ahead, what you're going to do. But they don't do that until they sing.

So my uncle went out and killed a big deer. And the old man was happy, he was so happy. “We'll eat some meat tonight, they're going to give us a piece of meat.” But no one came, they never gave him any meat. “He has to feed a lot of kids,” he thought, so he didn't say anything, he didn't think anything about it, he didn't have bad thoughts.

In a week or so, my uncle brought in another deer. The old man was feeling very happy again. “This time he'll give us a piece of meat,” he thought. And he was looking forward to sundown, for the evening meal. “I'm going to eat good tonight!” he thought. But he went to sleep without eating deer meat. And then in the morning no one came. That night, and next morning, no one came, and he didn't have any to eat. It went that way three times. And he thought, “Why does he do that? What's the matter, that he doesn't give me any meat?” And it grieved his heart, and then he cried.

“You won't eat, you won't eat deer meat,” he thought. And then he sang, that night he sang. He called the 'mák'má:ga, the pileated woodpecker. He sang, “Drive away these deer and hide them! He didn't give me any,” he sang, as though talking to the woodpecker. And then the woodpecker drove all the deer away and hid them.

After that, when my uncle went out, he didn't kill a deer. He didn't kill any deer all winter long. They went out, and none of them could find a deer. My father went out to hunt, my grandfather went out to hunt, they couldn't find even a track. And my uncles went out, but they couldn't

― 134 ―

find a track. For almost two years we never got any deer meat, we didn't eat any deer meat.

My uncle Jack's father, he knew something was the matter. “Something is wrong,” he said. “Something is wrong someplace. I'll go and see my son-in-law.” He called my father “son-in-law” because it was his brother's son-in-law. Of course, he knew my father was a doctor.

Just after dark he came, and he came in where we were all sitting around. He didn't come right in and sit down, he came in and stood. He rushed right in, talking, without stopping he talked. When he pulled out his tobacco, we knew something was wrong. He rolled some tobacco. He took just three pu s.

[*] Here, Mrs. Rhoades pu s three times.

Then “Bi!” he said, “Here!” holding out his hand. My father looked at him. “What for?” he said. “You know what for!” he said. “There isn't any food, there isn't any meat, there isn't anything. There's no sign of a track,” said my grandfather. “We haven't had any meat! What's wrong?” he said. “What's wrong with our country,” he said, “that we don't have any meat? We've been hunting all winter, all this summer, and now we haven't got any meat, we can't find any meat. What's wrong? Look for it,” he said. “I want you to have it searched for. That's why I've come in the evening,” he said. And then he held out the tobacco again.

This time my father took the tobacco. He only drew three pu s, and he gave it back to him. After my father tasted it my grandfather didn't smoke it, he destroyed it. My grandfather never even sat down. And my father says, “You sit down and eat before sundown,” he said. “I'll help sing right here,” he said, “in my own house. Just before sundown I'll sit down. But don't invite anybody,” he said. “Just you and your son and his two brothers, that's all.” And that's all that came. But they didn't invite this old man, because he was a medicine man. “Before sundown, you eat. Then just before the sun touches the mountain, I'll sit down.” And then without sitting down my grandfather went out and went home.

The next day in the evening they all came, they came to our house. And then, when the sun was just striking the mountain, my father went out. When he stepped out, they all came in, the three brothers, and sat

― 135 ―

down. We already had wood piled up inside, and pitch wood already split up and ready for us to use; my father had a chimney. They didn't allow a lamp to be lit, just the pitch. Then my father went out. I don't know where he went to. He just went out in the timber. And then when the sun was just about to disappear behind the mountain, he came in and sat down. Everything had to be very quiet. We were all to sit and be quiet, we couldn't even whisper. We children all sat in bed and watched.

Then he sang. Then he said, “I'm ashamed to say it. I'm ashamed to tell about it. I don't know,” he said. And my grandfather said, “Don't be ashamed to tell us,” he said. “Tell us,” he said. “Tell us, tell us, tell us. We want to know,” he said.

“Well,” my father said, “OK, there's that old man, he was your brother-in-law, lives right there by you.” He said, “He was sitting outside there, and he saw your son. This man,” he said, “brought in a deer. And that old fellow was so happy that he was going to have some deer meat too. He thought maybe you'd give him a little of the ribs or something. But you didn't give it to him. You didn't take him over a piece of meat that evening, or the next day, or the next day. You didn't give him any. Then he thought, ‘Well, he's got a big family, he's got lots of kids to feed. And of course, me, I'm nothing. So I guess that's why he didn't have any meat left over to give me any,’ he thought. So he never thought any more about it. He forgot about it,” he said. “He didn't think any more about it,” he said.

“Then the next week, you killed another deer,” he said. “You brought it in. He was happy when he saw you come in, he laughed to himself, he was so happy inside,” he said. “And he thought he was going to get a piece of meat. But the same thing happened. You didn't give it to him. Three times you killed meat and he saw you. And you never gave any to him. And he cried,” he said, “that night he cried. And he sang a song,” he said. “He sang a song with 'mák'má:ga. He sang this song,” he said, “and this 'mák'má:ga drove all the deer away and hid them. He's hiding them,” he said, “and we can't find them.”

And my uncle Jack said, “Yes, I did that. But I guess my wife never gave

― 136 ―

him anything,” he said. “I have got nothing to do with it after I come home with that deer,” he said. “She's the boss of the meat,” he said.

Then my grandfather came again next night. They went home that night, and he came again, the same way. And then they knew something happened again, something was wrong again. My mother got kind of scared. Maybe he wanted my father to kill that old man, or maybe Uncle Jack killed him, or something. And he came again and he rolled that tobacco. And he gave it to my father. And my father says, “What for?” “Well,” he said, “I want you to look for that meat and bring it back,” he said. “Bring it back!” he said. “Where did he hide it? You look for it!” he said. “You, you're that kind too,” he said. “Track that 'mák'má:ga,” he said. So my father took the tobacco, and he tasted it. “Yeah,” he said. “The deer are still alive,” he said. “They're still alive,” he said. “They're not dead. He's just hiding it.” And he gave the tobacco back, and my grandfather destroyed it.

Then, the same way, he had to sit down the same time. The same way, and that's why we had supper early, and they came again. They didn't invite the old Wintun man. And he sang that song again. And he couldn't find it. He hired this little screech owl spirit. “Did you see it go?” he asked, and he sent it out, and this little screech owl went out and looked for what was hiding the deer. And he said that the little screech owl said, “I can't find it.” In just a short while, he came back. He says, “I can't find it. I can't even see the tracks,” he said. Then he got another animal, I can't remember what. And that one came back right away, and said he couldn't find it either.

So then he sent out this little burrowing snake. It travels under the earth, like a mole burrowing, humping up the earth. He told it to go along under the earth. “Now go look for him, you go look for him in your earth,” he said. And that little snake went along, and before long he came back. “It's there, I found it,” he said. He found the deer bones. “But it's hot,” he said. A big man was roasting all the deer bones in his asjúy, his winter house, that's how he kept the spirit of the deer there. “He's got it roasted,” he said. “He's got it so hot that I can't pull it down,” he said. “And this man was watching, and he had his bow ready and an arrow half drawn, ready to shoot anybody that looked down, looking for that

― 137 ―

deer meat. He was ready for him with his bow. He was ready to shoot,” he said. “I just peeked in there, but it's too hot,” he said. “I just peeked and I burned one of my eyes,” he said. “I'm blinded in one eye.” Blinded from the heat.

“Go again,” my father said, “and take ice along with you. And as soon as he's not looking down,” he said, “you look first, be very careful, don't make any noise,” he said. “Look those bones over good, and you pull that one,” he said, “you pull that bone down in the ground.” He named a main bone in the deer's body, a special bone, but I don't remember what it is. “Take that bone from the fire with your mouth, holding it in your mouth,” he said. So this little fellow went back again. He sang the song again, and it sounded like he went, that little snake. I heard that he went.

This little snake spirit went, he went under the ground. Then he peeked up with one eye, and he saw that man was looking right straight up there. While he was looking, he saw those bones, and with his one eye he saw that bone, the one to take. So he went out there and, holding ice in his mouth, he pulled it out from the fire and drew it down. He slipped the bone down under the ground, and that man never noticed it. He brought it back under the ground, though it was burning him, even as my father was singing. And he danced, he danced around the fireplace. They lit a stick of pitch. He had no shirt on, just his pants, barefooted, and he was dancing right by the chimney there. When that little snake was going to pull the bone down, my father had to be in that hot place there too. Then blood gushed out of my father's mouth, it just streamed down his mouth. The little snake was the one that was burned, that was what made blood come up. That's when the snake burned his mouth, that's why he did that. Then it looked like he came back. When he brought that bone back, “Here!” he said, and he gave it to my father. And he reached out and took it, it looked like he reached out and grasped something. My father took it. We couldn't see it. And he fainted, my father fainted. They had a bucket of water there, and they stuck that arm in the water, and they put water on his face, and he came to.

And then he sang and talked to the snake. And he said, “Now he brought back the deer.” Then he said, “Treat that man good. Next time you kill meat, even a small one, don't be stingy, give him a ham. Even a ham, going

― 138 ―

to him with it, say ‘Have some for breakfast,’” he said. That's what he said when he sang. And then he told it, he was the one who told about it, he didn't have an assistant to interpret for him. And he said, “Don't think anything bad, but doing in the right way, have compassion, treat him well. You should give some to him first,” he said. “Not to us,” he said. “We're young men yet, we can still hunt for ourselves, so don't think about giving meat to us. That one, you two give to that one,” he said. “Well,” said my uncle, “I'll tell my wife.” And I guess he did.

The woodpecker was the one who drove all the deer away and hid them, piled the bones up in a ring of fire, piled the bones inside the fire so nothing was able to touch them. And he was waiting for someone to look down through the doorway in the roof of the asjúy, ready to shoot him in the heart, watching, determined not to give up the deer bones. That's why the screech owl was afraid, and the other one also was afraid, so he came back. But this little snake, burrowing through the earth, he's the one that brought back the deer.

And then we ate deer meat again. “For three days, you wait, and then you go hunting,” said my father, “and you'll get your deer.” So Uncle Jack went out there and he got his deer, and Uncle Jim went out there, and they all got deer. My father killed one deer. And so they gave the old Wintun man meat, and he was happy.

So I saw this, I saw it while I was still pretty young, but old enough to understand, and that's how it was that I listened. That's how my father used to do.

― 139 ―

9. Naponoha (Cocoon Man)

Atsugewi 1931John LaMarr (Dixie Valley), NARRATORSusan Brandenstein Park, COLLECTORDarryl Babe Wilson, EDITOR

INTRODUCTION BY DARRYL BABE WILSON

In 1931, Susan Brandenstein Park had just graduated from the University of California, in Berkeley's anthropology program, and had applied to be a part of an expedition to the Fiji Islands. She placed her name on the sign-up sheet, “somewhere near the bottom, but not o of the roster by any means whatsoever.”^[1] Then she, along with all the others, anxiously awaited its posting. Daily she rushed to the anthropology department. Finally, the roster was hanging on the door.

“There was a crooked line through my name. It was as if somebody had cut me across the heart with a knife. I never quite fully recovered.” Although slashed, Susan was not defeated. Dr. Kroeber and her advisor, Robert Lowie, had strongly hinted that, if she first could accomplish some fieldwork, she would then have a good chance at the next Fijian expedition.

She dreamed of Fiji. Of the perfume from the jungle flowers in the morning sun, and the waves rushing in and smoothing back out. Of birds

― 140 ―

of every color flitting through the sunlit forest while she walked in the silver sand hunting seashells. Of listening to the drumming and singing in the night and watching the stars move softly across the powdery, warm heavens.

But Dr. Kroeber had advised her to cut her teeth on a “simpler culture” and directed her to the mountains of Northeastern California to work with the Atsugewi, my father's people, with the admonition that information that is not published “is worthless.” So she packed her little coupe and headed north from San Francisco.

The Atsugewi (‘People Who Live in the Pine Forest’) live along Hat Creek, east of Mount Lassen and south of Mount Shasta, about sixty miles east of Redding. Susan found herself in very wild country, with lava beds, rattlesnakes, bears, mountain lions, and coyotes. “To me, it was like going to the moon,” she said. This was because there was such disparity between American society and the Atsugewi culture. She was surrounded by huge mountains, rushing rivers, wild animals, some notso-tame natives, and some not-so-civilized whites.

She rented a shack so the Atsugewi would not think of her as needing too many comforts. Then, after learning that the Cassel Post Office was the place to find “Indians,” she walked there in the morning.

“There were many Indians there, sitting around. Not talking, just sitting. I do not know what they were waiting for, they never seemed to get any mail,” Susan told me. She did not know that the post office was the local “Department of Employment” and a place for people to exchange news and information. Whenever a farmer wanted a fence built, he picked up an “Indian” from the post office. Loggers, ranchers, and construction companies all did the same.

Susan “did not know where to begin,” so she simply talked with the first person who seemed to be friendly, Lee Bone. She failed to record her first conversation, but word got out quickly that she was paying a dollar a day for information—the same as the Atsugewi received for hard labor. Contrary to the opinion of her advisor, Susan had discovered that the Atsugewi were “not such a simple culture, after all.” Although some people wondered about being paid “just for talk,” Susan received many responses, recording over two thousand pages with her Number Two pencil and hardbacked notepads, from the people of Hat Creek, Dixie Valley, and Goose Valley.

― 141 ―

One evening she decided to move out of her shack. “I returned to discover that a friendly rattlesnake had taken up domicile under my cot!” She promptly moved to Rising River Lodge and continued her research from there.

In 1989, I met Susan through News from Native California, a quarterly produced by Malcolm Margolin in Berkeley, California. Susan had been reading the magazine and had seen my name and my tribal identity, A-juma-wi/Atsuge-wi. “‘Atsugewi’ just leaped out of the page at me—the very people I had studied long ago,” she stated.

Soon I was visiting her in Carson City, Nevada. We looked over the old narratives. There were my elders, peering back at me through the pages and through time. It was exciting to read the transcriptions of the old stories I had heard when I was just a child holding on to my father's legs in the midst of a gathering of grandmothers and grandfathers, in the darkness of winter evenings, long ago.

I asked her one day in 1992 if she had ever made it to Fiji. “No,” she said, “I never did, but I hope to. Some day in the future, perhaps.” Susan Park was born in 1908 and was in fragile health when we first met in 1989. She often said that she would not make it through the winter of 1993. She did not: she died just before Thanksgiving 1992. If she had lived just one more year, she might have seen her work published at last, in my master's thesis, Yo-Kenaswi Usji (Necklace of Hearts).

A ccording to the legends of my people, Naponoha (Cocoon Man) changed into Night-Flying Butterfly during the “great transformation.” This butterfly is not to be confused with the moth, but is the huge butterfly that appears to be a moth. Up close, it has all the markings of a monarch butterfly. It could be compared to the black jaguar: upon closer examination, the fur of the black panther reveals all of the patterns and markings of the “regular” jaguar, but black is very dominant.

The Night-Flying Butterfly is beautiful. When viewed in the sunlight, it shines with the most precious colors of camouflaged shadows. The powder on its body is thick, like fur, and it moves so softly! My boy Sonny, when he was five years old, once asked me, “Dad, do you know what happens to butterflies when they get old? I mean, when they get really old?” And then he answered his own question: “They turn into moths.”

― 142 ―

So, Naponoha may be the wise and creative butterfly that turned into something like a moth. But Naponoha is also much more than that, according to our legends. He also helped create much of the world and the universe.

Lela Rhoades, one of the very old wisdom-keepers of our history, gave our nation a song:

	Aboni-ka-ha, me-moo-ischi-ee
	Aboni-ka-ha, me-moo-ischi-ee
	Aboni-ka-ha, me-moo-ischi-ee

She sang the melody three times in a variety of tempos. Then she explained that it meant, “in American,”

	Great Wonder, we are your children,
	Great Power, we are your children,
	Great Spirit, we are your children.

It should not be surprising, then, that Naponoha possesses all of the abilities to dream and to have his dreams fulfilled. He can see all of the world around him. His vision goes through the mountains, deep into the universe, and far into the thoughts of his people. Naponoha is a prophet, a dreamer, a creator, a wonder. In this narrative, Naponoha takes the form of a leader of his people—a warrior.

L atowni is the ceremonial roundhouse at Pittville around which the people lived. The Mice brothers stay awake all night, get into the food, and cache or scatter it. They are mischievous. It is their “way” to stay awake at night and to sleep during the day. Weasel intends to scold the boys for their nocturnal troublemaking. What Weasel does not know is that Naponoha has a mission for the boys.

The Klamath people (Oregon, just north of the Modocs) have stolen three articles: the Pestle, used for grinding seeds and dried foods, and representing the labor of the people; the Sky Knife, a long sword made from clear obsidian, and representing the protection of the nation; and the Diamond, a lucky stone that contains a rainbow and brings goodness to those who honor its power. (Naponoha later uses the Sky Knife

― 143 ―

while riding his dog during the war, taunting the enemy.) Naponoha tells the Mice brothers that they should go north to the Klamath people and retrieve the tribal materials, which they do.

When the Mice brothers have completed their mission, they return home, make a lot of noise in camp at night, then sleep during the day. Their father is Coyote. The Mice frolic around, play war by shooting at each other, and wind up shooting their father in the ear. They think they are pretty tough.

A few days later, a Klamath man arrives at Latowni and says there is going to be a war to regain the articles. Naponoha sends for Frog to interpret his message, but Frog gets it wrong. When the messenger returns, Naponoha this time asks Lark to translate, which she does. After displaying the recovered articles, Naponoha agrees to have a war to settle the issue. So the Dixie Valley people and the Klamath people meet. The war lines are drawn in the Fall River valley. Twins do the interpreting for each side, carrying messages back and forth. Each side constructs rock fortifications in the forest and just beyond the ridge, but they actually meet face-toface in the valley, the Dixie Valley warriors facing the Klamaths in a long line within arrow range. Naponoha has a huge dog that he rides like a horse, and he has the Sky Knife, which flashes in the sunlight, and his long hair shines. The Klamaths are bewildered. And so the war begins.

The Klamath people have a “witch” with them. Every time the arrow hits the witch, it glances o. Finally, the witch tells how he can be killed, and the Dixie Valley Indians use this information to kill him. The witch turns out to be a turtle, all the Klamaths are killed, and the war is over. Turtle, who is a powerful “doctor,” revives. He takes a stick and brings all the Klamaths back to life. The Klamath people agree to abandon their war over the Diamond. Both sides smoke to seal the “word.”

Naponoha then declares that the timber line will always be a reminder that there was once a war between the Klamath people and Dixie Valley. He also decides that he and the twin interpreters should stay beside the river for a while, telling the story, so the history might be told properly. Turtle and some of the other Klamaths want to stay in the Fall River valley, which Naponoha decides to allow. So Turtle and some of the Klamath people remain in the Pit River country, which is how the turtle came to be in the Fall River valley. It must have been the first time any of the Dixie Valley people had seen a turtle.

In the end, all of the Dixie Valley people return home to have a big

― 144 ―

sweat in their sweat house. Everybody gathers together and Naponoha makes a big smoke of many colors and many shapes. It is so beautiful that the people agree that, if there is ever any more trouble, there should be a big fire and a big smoke announcing the event, and all will assemble quickly.

All this was recorded to preserve the history of the conflict between the Dixie Valley and Klamath people and to show that it is not right to steal or claim something that belongs to another. The timber has long since been cut, and the rock fortifications removed by settlers—but the history, like the spirit of the people, remains.

note

1. All quotes attributed to Susan Park in this introduction are drawn from conversations I had with her during the years 1989–1992.

Naponoha

Naponoha said this: “The Mice in Latowni, whatever grub they had, they changed it around all night. Next morning, Yas, the Weasel, got mad because they took their grub to another place.” And Naponoha said, “Leave these boys alone. Don't scold them.”

― 145 ―

That night Naponoha said to the Mice, “You two ought to go north, get the Diamond and the Pestle. If you could get that … ” And they listened and they whispered to one another, “What does he mean?” And, he said, “You might, too, get the Sky Knife at the same time. It's back north.” And [the] Mice said, “Where about does he mean, anyway?”

They did the same thing that night—made lots of noise, changed the grub again. Along toward daylight they went, and everything was quiet after they left. And they went north, the two little Mice. They were brothers.

They kept going till they got there. They stopped overnight and then would keep going. They got to a great big river and they saw a lot of people on the other side, and the two little Mice said, “Maybe that's the place Naponoha meant. Maybe that's the place. And how are we going to get across?” the two little Mice said.

And they said, “We'll wait till dark comes and maybe someone will cross with a canoe and maybe we'll get across that way. And all night we'll do that.”

And some people were waiting, and someone came across, and the Mice hid in the tules, and someone called to the man to come across and he went across. It was dark-time and he came up to shore. “There's a chance, there's a chance,” one mouse said. “Now, get ready!”

And the man got in the canoe and the Mice jumped in under the man and they went across, and when they got to the shore on the other side, as soon as they hit shore, the two little Mice jumped out, and these two men didn't know that the Mice were in the canoe.

And the Klamath chief said, “Well, we better have a Big Time tonight. We'll look at the Diamond and the Pestle and the Knife. We better show them,” he said.

“Now we got the right place,” [the] Mice said when they heard it. Little Mice said, “There's our chance now, we must be sure now.” And everybody came all to one place in the chema-ha, the sweat house, and they got ready and showed the Diamond and the Pestle and the Knife.

― 146 ―

And the two Mice were behind the legs of the people. They hid and no one knew they were there. They watched while the Diamond and Pestle and Knife were being shown.

Oh! there was a big light over the sweat house when they showed the Diamond. And then everybody got through showing it and they put the Diamond and Pestle and Knife away, and the Mice wondered where they put them away.

Nobody went to sleep that night and the Mice began taking the grub that night the same as they did at home. And they went to look for the Diamond and the Pestle and the Knife.

They found them and they took them outside and they went all over the camp, all over where the people were living. They ran across Pi-jko, the Lark, who had a Klamath Indian for a husband.

They said, “Hello,” and they pinched her and that woman said, “What's bothering me so much?” And [the] Mice said, “That's us two,” and they went up and they talked to her, and she said, “Two bad brothers. How did you get over here?”

Well, they said, “Put us across. We want to go home.” They told Pijko, and she did, she put them across, and they let her know what they took away, and they went to where the canoe was and all got in and went to the other side. And they said, “Good-bye,” to Pi-jko and they came back, the two little Mice, and she went back to the other side in the dark.

And she called, “Brothers, be sure and get back.” And the little Mice said, “All right,” and they came back. They stopped over night, and they came and stopped and came, and they got home way in the middle of the night, and when they got back they made a noise and the Big Time chief felt everyone in Latowni was sorry. Naponoha was sorry for them, and they made the same noise, and when daylight came they slept.

They had a bow and arrow apiece, and they shot one another and then they shot Coyote in the ear. Coyote was Mice's father.

― 147 ―

“Oh!” said Coyote. “You're hurting me.” And Mice said, “That's what I'm going to do when I fight.” 'Course they went to sleep, them two.

Oh, a few days after that he says, “Friends, she-me-wolol, she-me-wolol.”

That time the Klamath Indian came over to tell them they were going to have a war because the Mice stole the Diamond. And the Klamath Indian said, “She-me-wolol, she-me-wolol.” And he said this through the smoke hole of Latowni.

And Naponoha asked Ali-yem, Frog, who spoke all languages, what was meant by this. And Yas ran over there to Ali-yem to tell her that Naponoha wanted her to come over and say what the Klamath Indian meant. So, she came there inside, and the Klamath Indian said, “Sheme-wolol, she-me-wolol.”

And Naponoha said to Ali-yem, “What does he mean?” “Oh,” she said, “They are going to have a dance down here, that's what he means.” And, of course, after she said this the Klamath Indian went back, and after he went back the Klamath people asked him, “What did they say?” And he said, “They didn't say anything to me.”

They sent him back again to Naponoha's place. He came again to the same place and he said, “She-me-wolol, she-me-wolol” again. And Naponoha said, “What does he mean? You said he was saying they are going to have a dance. What did he come back for?”

So, Naponoha said, “You get Pi-jko now,” and Yas went over to let her know again. So she came over, and the Klamath Indian said, “She-mewolol.” And Pi-jko said, “He says the two Mice stole the Diamond, the Pestle, and the Knife. And he says there is going to be a war. That's what he's saying. They want the Diamond right back; otherwise there will be a war.”

And the two little Mice were sleeping all the time. They would not get up. And then the Klamath Indian went back, and Naponoha said, “You two better get up. What did you do with the Diamond and Pestle and Knife? You stole them. We used to lose those things. It's a good thing

― 148 ―

you have them back. We're going to have a war with the Klamath Indians,” he said.

The two little Mice jumped up and they shot their father, Coyote, in the ear again, the same way, and they said, “Yes, sir, right over there.” “Go get them then,” Naponoha said. “Where are they?”

They went and got them and gave the Diamond and Pestle and Knife to Naponoha, and they untied and untied and held the Diamond up and it was just like lightning. And the Klamath Indian saw it. Oh, the Klamath Indian saw that light, and they sent that same Indian over again, and he said, “She-me-wolol, she-me-wolol.”

And Pi-jko said, “You better get ready to fight. Hurry and get ready. If you ain't going to give the Diamond up, there is going to be a war!”

“All right,” Naponoha said. Pi-jko can talk any language. And Naponoha, he told Pi-jko, “All right. We are going to have a war.” And the Indian went back and he said, “Yes, they are willing to fight, and right away.” That's what the Klamath Indian told his own people, and Naponoha's people got ready and they went down on the side of Fall River.

Naponoha's people were in that edge of timber there, and the Klamath Indians were on the other side of that ridge of timber, and each side got interpreters halfway between the Klamath Indians and Naponoha's Indians. There were two twins there and those were the interpreters for the two sides, and they went forth and back with what they said.

The Klamath Indians sent over a man who said, “If you don't give up that Diamond, we are going to have a war.”

So then Naponoha's interpreter went back and told Naponoha, and he said, “They said for you to give up the Diamond, otherwise they're going to have a war.” Naponoha sent him back. “Tell him I'm not going to give it up. Tell him we'll have a war.”

― 149 ―

And the interpreter told the Klamath interpreter, “They ain't going to give up. They are going to have a war.”

So the Klamath Indians said, “All right, we'll have a war and we'll fight right away.” And they all got ready and they fought.

They fought. They shot one another and Naponoha had a great big dog that hunted around, and he used it as a horse and he rode it with his hair flying (and Naponoha had great long hair, bright hair), and he had a great long knife in his hand, and when the Klamath Indians saw him they didn't know what to do.

And he told his people, “Go ahead and fight!” And they killed all the Klamath Indians. They killed every one of them.

But they couldn't kill To-ka-jisa, the witch. They didn't know how to. They shot him and the arrows just glanced o. And To-ka-jisa said like this to Naponoha: “I like this country.” And he said to Naponoha, “If I stand straight up and you shoot down at me, that's the only way you can kill me.”

So, he stood straight up, and they shot down into his mouth, and that was the only way they could kill him. “I don't like to go back to Klamath. I like this country, that's why I told you how to kill me. If I didn't tell you, I could clean you all up.”

And To-ka-jisa took a stick and he hit the Klamath Indians, and they all came back to life. And Naponoha said, “You people better go back.” And the Klamath Indians said, “All right. We give up. You whipped us all right.”

So he said, “When you were [in] the war lines, [that was] good. That is our timber. It shows that you were Klamath Indians on that side. So it will be on my side, the same way.” That's what Naponoha told them and that interpreter.

“Those two twin interpreters will be there along on the river. So the people would know what we did. So they can tell about it in history,

― 150 ―

what trouble we had, and it will settle it right.” That's what Naponoha said. And the Klamath Indian said, “All right.” And he said, the Klamath Indian said, “I'm sorry, but I can't help it. I would not think about it anymore. You can have the Diamond and Pestle and Knife for good.”

“How about it,” Naponoha said to To-ka-jisa. “Why are you going to stay here in this country?” And the Klamath chief said, “What can I do if they want to stay here? I cannot kick over them because you whipped us and asked me, that's the reason I have to let my man stay. I can't kick,” he said.

“Well, let them stay here,” Naponoha said.

And that's the reason that Hap-ej, the Turtle, is in the Fall River valley. Hap-ej belonged to the Klamath and he spread all the way down the Sacramento Valley. And they scattered all over. That was the Klamath Indians. There Hap-ej was, and they scattered him.

They sat down and smoked, and then they said, “Well, I go.” And the Klamath Indian went back.

So, Naponoha came back where he belonged, and they got home, all on both sides. So they had a Big Time, Naponoha's people. And he let all his people see the Diamond and the Pestle and the Knife. He said, “We used to have this and we got it back.” And Naponoha told his people, “We've got it back.”

And it was all right. Everything was settled fine and dandy, and Naponoha was in the chema-ha, everybody was in the chema-ha. It was a great big sweat house. Naponoha told his people, “I'll show you what I can do.” And he filled his pipe with tobacco, Naponoha did, and he smoked and he smoked like a cloud inside the sweat house. It was so pretty, and they all looked, and all the Indians said, “Ain't that pretty?”

It was a pretty color and all kinds of shapes, rings. And all the Indians said, “We'll all have to go back where we belong, and if anything happens let us know.” So he said, “Whenever you have anything happen, build a big smoke so we will know.”

― 151 ―

That's what Naponoha told his people. And the people said, “All right.” And they all scattered and went back.

That's what it is, Naponoha's history.

It shows plainly right now in the timber. That was all.

― 152 ―

10. A Story of Lizard

Yahi 1915Ishi, narratorEdward Sapir, collectorHerbert W. Luthin and Leanne Hinton, translators

INTRODUCTION BY HERBERT W. LUTHIN

Ishi, the narrator of this story, is something of a legend in the history of post-Contact Native America and is a touchstone figure in California anthropology. His story is well-known—it's been told in books, articles, and films—so I won't do much more than summarize it here. But it's only fair to say that the “legend” of Ishi is nothing if not a conflicted one.

The subtitle to Theodora Kroeber's celebrated Ishi source book, Ishi in Two Worlds, provides us with a good starting point in this regard: A Biography of the Last Wild Indian in North America. Whatever he may have been to himself, for non-Indians Ishi, quite simply, stood as an icon of the natural man, a latter-day remnant of pre-Contact Native America. The irony, of course, is that Ishi lived anything but a natural human life, was anything but a pre-Contact “natural man.”

Ishi was the last Yahi. His tribe (the southernmost division of the Yana group), after decades of conflict with settlers and prospectors, skirmishes

― 153 ―

with the U.S. Army, and what can only be called the wanton “poaching” of white vigilantes who killed for sport, was all but wiped out along with the rest of the Yana in a concerted campaign of genocide carried out by local militia groups. Ishi was born into this shattered world—probably in 1862—about two years before these “final solution” massacres took place.

Ishi survived because his band survived, decimated but intact, only to be surprised a year later by vigilantes in their Mill Creek camp and decimated once more. Only a handful, perhaps as many as a dozen, escaped—among them the little boy Ishi, his mother, and an older sister. This small group then went into deep hiding, vanishing almost without trace for forty years. Except for a few scattered incidents, as far as anyone knew, by 1872 the Yahi were functionally extinct. But life went on for Ishi's people in hiding. With no births, though (there were no marriageable children in the group when it slipped “underground”), the old just grew older, and the group gradually dwindled. By the time Ishi reached the age of forty, after nearly four decades of hiding, the last member of his group, his own aged mother, had died.

That year was 1908. On August 29, 1911, naked and starving, hair still singed o in mourning three years after the death of his last human companion, Ishi gave himself up outside a slaughterhouse in Oroville. Until he walked out of hiding and into the history of twentieth-century California, Ishi's entire life, from infancy to middle age, was spent in hiding—a sort of backcountry version of Anne Frank's concealment. The stress of that existence, a life of constant hardship and fear of discovery, is difficult for us even to imagine. Ishi was Yahi, all right—purely, deeply, fully so. But the Yahi life he knew was not the free, self-possessing, traditional existence of his ancestors; and it is a mistake to think that Ishi can represent for us—for anyone—some animistic “free spirit” or serve as a spokesman of untrammeled Native American life and culture.

Upon his discovery, Ishi became an overnight media sensation: a “wild Indian,” a living Stone Age man—captured in the backcountry of modern California! When the news hit the stands in San Francisco, Alfred Kroeber, head of anthropology at the University of California, dispatched the linguist-anthropologist T. T. Waterman to Oroville to establish communication and bring him to the university. To protect him from exploitation (though let's not forget that Ishi was also the anthropological “find” of a lifetime), Kroeber gave him light employment as a live-in caretaker at the university's new Museum of Art and Anthropology, as a way

― 154 ―

of providing him with pocket money and safe lodging. His days were often filled with linguistic and ethnographic work, for there was an endless stream of scholars coming to work with him, and other interested visitors seeking audience. And on Sunday afternoons, he appeared as a kind of “living exhibit” in the museum itself, chipping arrowheads, drilling fire, and demonstrating other native Yahi crafts and techniques for the public. Thus did Ishi live out the last five years of his life—in truth, in relative contentment and ease, unlikely though this may seem. Those who knew him and became his friends came to love him. He died of tuberculosis in March of 1916.

Given this extraordinary life, it should come as no surprise to learn that Ishi's stories—which only now, eighty years after their narration, are finally being made available to scholars and the public alike—are strikingly unlike anything else known in California oral literature. In some respects, they are of a piece with known Yana tradition; in others, they are eccentric to an amazing degree. Yet we are extremely fortunate to have them, for they tell us a great deal about Yahi life and custom and even more about Ishi himself.

T he story presented here was taken down by the great linguist Edward Sapir, who came to California in the summer of 1915 to work with Ishi in what was to be his last year. Ishi was probably already ill by the time Sapir arrived, but in August, after many weeks of steady work, his illness grew too pronounced to ignore, and he was placed in the hospital, where he died about six months later. Ishi's untimely death was no doubt the main reason Sapir never returned to his notebooks and worked up these texts for publication. And in truth, it would have been a daunting task, for much of the work of translation and verification was incomplete at the time Ishi was hospitalized. Sapir called his work with Ishi “the most time-consuming and nerve-wracking that I have ever undertaken,” noting that “Ishi's imperturbable good humor alone made the work possible” (Golla 1984b:194).

Sapir recorded Ishi's stories the hard way: by hand, in detailed phonetic transcription. All told, he recorded at least six stories, filling five notebooks—more than two hundred pages of text. Most of the pages are only sparsely glossed at best (indeed, two entire notebooks contain only unglossed Yahi text), and this poses a challenge for linguists of the Yahi Translation

― 155 ―

FIGURE 3. Ishi. Courtesy Phoebe Apperson Hearst Museum of Anthropology and the Regents of the University of California.

Project, who are trying to reconstruct their meaning.^[1] I present here the best-worked, best-glossed text, “A Story of Lizard.” Even so, there are places (duly marked) where we are still not sure exactly what is going on.

I shi's narrative style is often demanding, at least for those coming from a Western literary tradition. Readers may well find this to be the most difficult of all the selections in this volume, thanks to Ishi's stripped-down, elliptical approach to telling a story, even a long one, and the short, bulletlike bursts of his delivery. Compositionally, “A Story of Lizard” is more of a suite than a story. Rather than a single overarching plot, it contains a series of episodes and situations, each with its own interior form, all of which combine to form the larger whole. Some of these episodes and situations recur cyclically a number of times. For instance, the Ya'wi, or “Pine-nutting,” episode occurs three times, in parts verbatim; and there are four separate “Arrow-making” episodes, some quite elaborately detailed. The remaining two episodes are unique: one, a “Grizzly Bear” adventure, is essentially a story-within-a-story; the second is a “Night Dance”

― 156 ―

episode that is not matched by other elements within the tale. Rather than recounting the story sequentially, I will briefly describe the individual episodes, then explain how they are pieced together to comprise the whole.

Arrow-making

Ishi opens his tale with a glimpse of Lizard making arrows, an activity that provides the background for the entire story. In some sense it is Lizard's unflagging industry that serves as the story's thematic center. Other adventures—the various alarms and excursions that make up the “plot”—may come and go, but the arrow-making is always there.^[2] (It is something of a joke among those of us working on these stories, that the real reason Lizard always seems to be making arrows is because he keeps losing them all in his fights with the Ya'wi.) Ishi was himself a master arrow-maker, and reportedly loved to flake arrowheads, experimenting with all sorts of materials. Indeed, the arrowheads he made during his brief tenure at the old Museum of Anthropology in San Francisco are among the finest in the Lowie Museum's collection of artifacts. One can almost learn how to make arrows from Ishi's descriptions of the process in the four Arrow-making episodes.^[3]

Pine-nutting

The “Ya'wi” is what the Yahi called the Wintun people to the west—enemies in ancient times. Lizard ventures into hostile territory to collect pine-nuts for his people, and is attacked by a band of Ya'wi warriors. He keeps his cool, pretending their war-whoops are “nothing but the wind,” and shoots his arrows “straight into their faces.” In the end, he makes it back home with a fresh supply of pine-nuts. The oral-formulaic style of patterned repetitions is very prominent within these sections, based primarily on the variation of Yahi directional elements (‘to the west’, ‘to the east’, ‘across a stream’, ‘up a mountain’, and so on) against a common stem, especially mooja- ‘to shoot’ and ni- ~ ne- ‘to go’.

Grizzly Bear and Long-Tailed Lizard

This is the most complex episode of the story—a fully developed narrative in its own right. Lizard runs out of baiwak'i sticks for making the

― 157 ―

foreshafts of his arrows. He sends Long-Tailed Lizard to collect some more. Long-Tail is surprised by Grizzly Bear, who swallows him up and “grows pregnant.” When Long-Tail fails to return, Lizard sets out after him. He finds the baiwak'i all scattered around, and Grizzly's tracks, and guesses the rest. Gathering up the sticks, he returns home. As a token of mourning, the sticks are not used, but burned. At daybreak, after cutting o his hair and smearing his face with pitch (further tokens of mourning), Lizard sets out to find the bear.

What happens next is unclear, because there are some thorny problems with the interpretation of Sapir's text and glosses throughout this section. But it appears as if Lizard travels to Grizzly Bear's favorite feeding ground and climbs up into a convenient tree toward evening to have a smoke and wait for her. In the morning she comes, as she seems destined to do, to feed on the k'asna vines (identified only vaguely as a vine growing near water). Lizard has prepared himself by draping one of the vines around his neck and letting it dangle down, the idea being (we think) that when Grizzly arrives and begins to feed, she will tug on the vine and alert him. In the morning she comes and starts to feed. Lizard puts a loop into his bowstring and lets Grizzly pull him down onto her back, whereupon he slips the loop around her neck and lets the strung bow strangle her. After gouging out her eyes (the revenge against a maneating bear is always harsh), he slits her open and recovers Long-Tailed Lizard. (As Leanne Hinton points out, this is a familiar motif in folklore: Europeans know it from “Little Red Riding Hood.”) In the morning it's back to making arrows.

The Night Dance

One day, as Lizard is “busy with his arrow-making,” he breaks a shaft. The break in the shaft foretells a break in the routine: some neighboring people are having a dance. For the next three days, the domestic rhythms of the camp are inverted, as Lizard's people dance all night and—except for one attempt at gathering food, abandoned the next time around as too much hassle—sleep all day. We simply have no idea what all the “excrement” is about: the way the text reads, at the beginning of the Dance episode, Lizard's people are given some excrement (the stem wak'i- ‘shit’ is unambiguous on this point), which they smear all over themselves. After

― 158 ―

the last night of dancing, Lizard scolds them for being slug-a-beds, whereupon they all bathe themselves clean and get back to work. Life returns to normal, and Lizard resumes his arrow-making.

W hen we put all these episodes together, paying careful attention to their cycles of repetition, an overall pattern reveals itself—the true architecture of this fascinating tale. If we take the four Arrow-making episodes to be the thematic baseline or rhythmic “pulse” of the narrative, view the Pine-nutting episodes with their Ya'wi attacks as intermittent events that punctuate that baseline, and recognize the unique Grizzly Bear and Night Dance episodes as extraordinary happenings that stand far out against that background “hum,” we might represent the narrative structure schematically as in figure 4:

FIGURE 4. Narrative structure of Ishi's “A Story of Lizard.”(I = Introduction; P = Pine-nutting; A = Arrow-making; GB = Grizzly Bear; ND = Night Dance; C = Conclusion.)

What seems at first a hopeless déjà vu of motifs and situations proves now to be quite the opposite: a carefully controlled narration of great balance and dignity.

W hen I first went to work on this story, nearly a decade ago, I felt it to be one of the bleakest accounts of survival I had ever seen—a relentless tale of repetitive drudgery and danger. Now, looking at it anew, I see it in a di erent light. Like a Beowulf or a Roland in European tradition, Lizard represents the essence of a Yahi culture-hero. Lizard provides for his people—unfailingly. Instead of despair, there is reassurance in these unvarying routines and in Lizard's unflappable reliability in a crisis.

― 159 ―

And in truth, I think Ishi, as the only able-bodied man among his lost band of survivors for all those long, lean years of hiding, must have been something of a Lizard himself.

A NOTE ON THE TRANSLATION

Because so much has been said for and about Ishi, and so little has ever come forth from Ishi himself, we have felt a special urgency, in dealing with the records he left behind, to let Ishi be heard in his own voice and words at last. Granted, proclamations like this have a hollow ring when the end-result is a translation. After all, what Ishi actually said in “A Story of Lizard” (as in these lines from the very beginning of the myth) was this:^[4]

	Híri',
	héebil' k^h híri'mawna …
	K'úllil'.
	Niwílji',
5	wísdu' gi iwílc^hi.
	Nilóopji'.
	Domjawáldi' k^h díitel^la
	(Hóok'awdubalgu' gi wéeyump^ha;
	dóowayalcidibil' wéeyump^ha).
10	Bóot'an' c^h wíshⁱ.
	Júspja',
	jóst'al'ⁱ.
	Jewóo' c^h yónbal'ⁱ.
	Jé^h duwoo' k^h báan^u.
15	Busdím' c^h Yáa'^wi!

Since there is no one left alive who can speak or understand this language, the need for translation is unimpeachable. Still, we have wanted to minimize the degree to which the voices of translation mingle with Ishi's own. So where, in most other literary translations, obscure or ambiguous sentences are silently clarified—with the addition of a phrase or transition here, a “she said” there—we have chosen another tack. Though this is still a literary—not a literal—translation, we have nonetheless tried to convey only what is present in the Yahi text, just as Ishi dictated it to

― 160 ―

Sapir in 1915. That means that we have had to explore other methods of providing readers with the interpretive and textual information they need in order to follow the story. We have settled on two devices, footnotes and sidenotes, to help us “buy” this degree of fidelity.

The sidenotes (set in the right margin, in space fortuitously made available by the broken-line format of the translation) are used mostly to supply key missing information—primarily proper names or specific nouns that are referred to only by pronoun in the original, and which the reader might have trouble intuiting. Less-critical information—of a contextual, interpretive, linguistic, or philological nature—has been consigned to footnotes. To illustrate the way the sidenotes work (the footnotes should need no explanation), let's take a look at an excerpt (lines 138–149) from the translation:

	He made himself arrows in the morning.
	He rubbed them and smoothed them. the cane shafts of the arrows
	He was busy at it all day—
	finished.
	As he turned them on the ground,
	he painted on the bands.
	He finished putting on the painted bands.
	He soaked them in water, the feathers
	wrapped them on with sinew—
	finished.
	He trimmed the feather-vanes— with a flint blade
	finished.

At line 139, while the reader can certainly deduce that the pronoun “them” refers generally to the arrows of the preceding line, the sidenote allows us to provide a bit more specificity: it's the cane shafts of the arrows that Lizard is smoothing, as Sapir's fieldnotes indicate. At line 145, the reader may be forgiven for being puzzled as to the referent for the pronoun “them.” But a quick glance to the side supplies that information right when it's needed, and saves us from having to falsify the text by interpolating the missing referent (either with distracting brackets, or, worse, without) into the line: that is, “He soaked the feathers in water.” Our unembellished translation makes it clear that Ishi himself, to whom the process of arrow-making was second nature, thought the circumstances too obvious to spell out using the concrete noun. Finally, at line 148,

― 161 ―

Sapir's own gloss for the Yahi sentence Dee-wunii-'(literally, ‘cut something-feather-narrative tense’) reads “He cut o vanes with flint,” but in fact the information about the flint blade is not there in the Yahi—it's only implied by context and cultural knowledge; the sidenote here allows us to provide this information (useful for helping readers visualize the action) without embellishing the translation itself.^[5]

NOTES

1. The Yahi Translation Project was constituted at Berkeley in 1986, specifically to prepare Sapir's unpublished Yahi materials for publication. Victor Golla was the project director, and Leanne Hinton coordinated the Berkeley seminar that kicked o the project. Bruce Nevin and Ken Whistler served as special consultants. Other researchers who have kept involved in the project over the years include Jean Perry and this author.

2. In other of Ishi's stories, di erent sets of domestic activities such as leaching acorns and going for water take the place of arrow-making yet serve the same narrative function.

3. In order to determine the complete sequence of steps in arrow-making, it is necessary to build a composite sequence based on a collation of steps from the various episodes, because no one episode contains all the steps in the process.

4. This passage is cast in an informal practical orthography devised for the Yanan languages; it balances linguistic needs with the desire to be helpful with regard to pronunciation. Doubled characters represent length, stress is indicated with an acute accent over the vowel, and superscript letters are voiceless. Certain phonetic processes involved with prosody (final aspiration, devoicing, secondary and emphatic primary stress) are preserved in the transcription.

5. The text has been parsed into lines primarily on the basis of predication units (one per line), augmented by reference to prosodic features like final-syllable retention and Sapir's own field punctuation (see Luthin 1991 for a detailed discussion of these issues).

11. A Selection of Wintu Songs

WINTU 1929–1931FANNY BROWN, JENNIE CURL, HARRY MARSH, SADIE MARSH, AND EDO THOMAS, SINGERSDOROTHY DEMETRACOPOULOU, COLLECTOR AND TRANSLATOR

INTRODUCTION BY DOROTHY DEMETRACOPOULOU

The songs presented here were collected in the summers of 1929, 1930, and 1931, during three field trips that were conducted under the auspices of the Department of Anthropology of the University of California.^[1] I recorded them intermittently, chiefly as an expression of literary art, partly for their ethnographic value, partly for linguistic purposes. I secured them in text and translated them as literally as the discrepancy between Wintu and English would permit.

The Wintu who sing them live in California, along the northern reaches of the Sacramento, the Pit, and the McCloud. These rivers are in reality only mountain streams, swift and narrow, forming steep little canyons in the mountains. The mountainous country a ords almost no valleys and only a few “flats” where the people could build their brush houses. The drainage runs north and south, and perhaps because of this,

― 179 ―

directional terms are indispensable to the Wintu when any purposeful going is to be described. One goes north along the river, south, east uphill, west along the ridge; or one just walks.

The songs that are sung most by the Wintu today are the so-called dream songs. At one time they formed the chief feature of the Dream Dance cult that was introduced circa 1872 and held sway for about forty years. Dream songs were given to men and women in their sleep by the spirit of some dead relative or friend. In the morning the dreamer sang the song and danced to it. The song then became common property, though the name of the dreamer was usually remembered. A split-stick rattle, struck against the thigh, accompanied the song and dance. The rattle, the dance, and the song each followed its own di erent rhythm.

Since dreaming a orded such an excellent opportunity for exhibitionism, the Wintu seem to have indulged in it, despite the prevalent belief that it brought bad luck and perhaps death to the dreamer. Dreaming stopped about forty years ago, but many songs are still remembered and danced to when Big Times are held. The most recent stimulus to the revival and preservation of the dream songs came when Miss Cora Du Bois and I began collecting them.

The dances of the Dream Dance cult show a wide range of variation, but the songs roughly follow certain set rules; this, despite the fact that they were genuinely acquired in a dream. The words treat of the land of the dead, as for example, the above, the west, the mythical earthlodge of the flowers, the Milky Way along which the spirits of the dead went to their final resting place. Flowers form an important theme. The references to nature are not lyrical expressions but simply an unquestioned conformation to the requirements of the song.

The arrangement of the verses as well as the tune follow a somewhat set pattern. Generally there is the introductory part, consisting of one or two verses that are repeated several times in a low key. Then the first verse with perhaps a new verse is sung in a variation of the theme in a higher key once, and a final verse, the completion or climax, is sung in the original low key.

The following song will serve as an illustration. First come two alternating verses in a low tone:

	It is above that you and I shall go;
	Along the Milky Way you and I shall go;

― 180 ―

	It is above that you and I shall go;
	Along the Milky Way you and I shall go.

Then we have a variation of the theme in a higher key:

	It is above that you and I shall go;
	Along the flower trail you and I shall go.

Then we go back to the tune of the first verse:

Picking flowers on our way, you and I shall go.

This tune pattern seems to derive from the Southland Dance cult.^[2] The only song that is remembered from the Southland Dance cult is one which is composed of the meaningless syllables heyoyohene, sung according to the tune pattern found in the dream songs.^[3] Whether this tune pattern originated with the Southland Dance cult or was already present among the Wintu when this cult entered the territory, we do not know. Just now it occurs only in the singing of dream songs.

Individual variation is to be found in the particular arrangement of the verses within the tune pattern. It is not known how much unconscious revision of the words took place. Unfortunately, only one song was secured from two di erent informants. The two versions show a di erence in the tune pattern as well as in the words. Miss Du Bois reports a case where the tune of a song was revised consciously. A singer of some note altered the tune to suit his taste, and it is his version that is known and sung now.

The words of the songs are important in themselves. My informants sometimes repeated them to me, exclaiming over their beauty; this, in spite of the poetic license that allows the dreamer to break from the ordinary Wintu phrasing and makes the meaning often hard to grasp. Miss Du Bois has even recorded a song whose words are remembered and liked although the tune has been forgotten.

NOTES

1. This selection is based on Demetracopoulou's famous 1935 article, “Wintu Songs” (Anthropos 30: 483–494). The text of her introduction and song notes

― 181 ―

has been excerpted, rearranged, and edited (for continuity) for inclusion in this volume. Of the forty-nine songs included in the original article, twenty-nine have been selected here. The songs retain their original numbering, for the sake of reference.

In her publication of these songs, Demetracopoulou printed only the “gist” of each song, with notes indicating how many times each separate line was sung, and in what order. I have reconstructed the original order from her annotations and present the songs here in their full performance order.—hwl

2. This cult was introduced into Wintu territory circa 1871 and held sway for about a year. See Cora Du Bois, “Wintu Ethnography,” for a fuller description. Most of the information about the ethnographic aspect of the songs contained in this essay has been supplied by Miss Du Bois.

3. These syllables may be simply a variation of heninoiheni, the introductory and final refrain of the girls' puberty songs, which is sung with slight variations by di erent singers.

A SELECTION OF WINTU SONGS

DREAM SONGS

1. Harry Marsh, dreamer; sung by Harry Marsh, 1929

[*] Harry Marsh uses the inclusive dual that is found in practically all the dream songs where an address form is used. The song is considered to contain an amorous or at least a romantic flavor.

	It is above that you and I shall go,
	Along the Milky Way you and I shall go,

― 182 ―

	It is above that you and I shall go,
	Along the Milky Way you and I shall go,

	It is above that you and I shall go,
	Along the flower trail you and I shall go,

Picking flowers on our way, you and I shall go.

2. Anonymous dreamer; sung by Harry Marsh, 1929

	Above the place where the minnow maiden sleeps while her fins
	move gently in the water,
	Flowers droop,
	Flowers rise back [up] again.

3. Anonymous dreamer; sung by Harry Marsh, 1929

Where will you and I sleep?

	Where will you and I sleep?
	Where will you and I sleep?
	Where will you and I sleep?
	Where will you and I sleep?
	At the down-turned jagged rim of the sky you and I will sleep.

4. Jim Thomas, dreamer; sung by Harry Marsh, 1929

[*] The word used for “swaying rhythmically” is applied to women swaying with bent elbows and forearms pointing forward, as an accompaniment to the dancing of the men. During a performance of the Dream Dance, the men danced in a circle around a fire, while the women stood in two lines on either side, swaying and waving flowers or handkerchiefs in their outstretched hands. Jim Thomas, a shaman, introduced in his song the dandelion pu s as representing spirits that float away. This conception was liked so generally that the song was dedicated to funerals. The participants sway, holding dandelion pu s, and then with one accord, blow on them and make them float away. Singing at funerals is an innovation and probably was initiated with the first use of this song, at the death of Bill Popejoy, some twelve years ago.

	Above [they] shall go,
	The spirits of the people, swaying rhythmically,
	Above [they] shall go,
	The spirits of the people, swaying rhythmically,

― 183 ―

	Above [they] shall go,
	Swaying with dandelion pu s in their hands,
	The spirits of the people, swaying rhythmically.

5. Anonymous dreamer; sung by Harry Marsh, 1929

	There above, there above,
	At the mythical earthlodge of the south,
	Spirits are wafted along the roof and fall,

	There above, there above,
	At the mythical earthlodge of the south,
	Spirits are wafted along the roof and fall.

Flowers bend heavily on their stems.

8. Dum Du Bel, dreamer; sung by Harry Marsh, 1931

	O me, your brother-in-law
	Looks west.
	All day long
	He looks west.

	O me, your brother-in-law
	Looks west.
	All day long
	He looks west.

	O me, your brother-in-law
	Looks west.
	Flowers of daybreak
	He holds northward in his outstretched hands.
	All day long
	He looks west.

9. Mary Silverthorne, dreamer; sung by Harry Marsh, 1931

	From the east he came west against the mountains and stopped.
	Flowers he picked just now,
	Flowers from my grave.
	Flowers he picked just now.

― 184 ―

11. Sadie Marsh, dreamer; sung by Sadie Marsh, 1929

[*] Sadie Marsh says that a few years ago her best friend died, and a little after came to her in a dream with a company of other female spirits, weeping, dancing, and singing this song.

	Down west, down west we dance,
	We spirits dance,
	Down west, down west we dance,
	We spirits dance,

	Down west, down west we dance,
	We spirits weeping dance,

We spirits dance.

12. Mary Kenyon, dreamer; sung by Edo Thomas, 1929

	From the old camping place
	Comes a flash of flowers.

	I love flowers.
	Give me flowers.
	Flowers flutter
	As the wind raises them above.
	I love flowers.
	Give me flowers.

13. Dick Gregory, dreamer; sung by Edo Thomas, 1929

[†] The daybreak people are sparrows. The roof is that of the mythical earthlodge.

	Daybreak people have been chirping.
	Daybreak people have been chirping.
	Daybreak people have been chirping.
	Daybreak people have been chirping.
	Daybreak people have been chirping.

	Above on the roof,
	Alighting, they chirp.

― 185 ―

GIRLS' PUBERTY Songs
[] All songs other than dream songs and shamanistic songs are anonymous. There are many girls' puberty songs, of which I secured a few. Some time after the first menstruation, perhaps as long as three years after, a Big Time was called to give public recognition to this event. This was done for the daughters of the most important people. The headman of the village sent invitations to other villages, and as each group arrived, they danced down into the celebrating village, singing. Song 21 was sung by such a group. All girls' puberty songs begin and end with a refrain of heninoy* repeated an indefinite number of times.

21. Sung by Harry Marsh, 1931

[†] When I first recorded this song, I found it impossible to understand since it was sung for me starting with the second verse. Girls' puberty songs are generally supposed to be incomprehensible, full of obsolete words and involved as to style. From this generalization must be excepted the salacious songs that people take care to understand.

	Heninoy, heninoy
	Heninoy, heninoy

	At Bare-Gap-Running-South-Uphill a girl has [come to] puberty,
	We said to ourselves.
	So from below, bringing eastward with us,
	We brought puberty songs.

	Heninoy, heninoy
	Heninoy, heninoy

22. Sung by Harry Marsh, 1931

[‡] This is an arrival song.

	Heninoy, heninoy
	Heninoy, heninoy

	Where the eastern star emerged,
	Fire comes up westward over the slope and falls in a shower.
	To the edge of the mountains, to the foot of the pointed ridge,
	Come southward along the mountain shore to [join] the dance!

	Heninoy, heninoy
	Heninoy, heninoy

― 186 ―

23. Sung by Harry Marsh, 1929

[*] Songs 23–28. After the groups arrived there was feasting and dancing for several days. During this time, pertinent songs were sung, some of them incomprehensible to the singers, others referring to the fact that the girl was now ready for a lover or a husband. In Bald Hill, some extremely obscene songs were sung, usually upon arrival. Songs 26 and 28 were sung during the feasting period.

	Heninoy, heninoy
	Heninoy, heninoy

	Up the hill to the northwest
	an obsidian knife whizzes through the air,
	on the west slope.
	It is the beautiful adolescent girl;
	to the place where the deer were scared out of the bush,
	listening, may I come back!

	Heninoy, heninoy
	Heninoy, heninoy

24. Sung by Harry Marsh, 1931

	Heninoy, heninoy
	Heninoy, heninoy

	At the edge of the mountains she [came to] puberty.
	Look along the curve of the mountain shore;
	Fleas must be emerging!

	Heninoy, heninoy
	Heninoy, heninoy

26. Sung by Harry Marsh, 1931

[†] This is a wish to join the girl where she sits.

	Heninoy, heninoy
	Heninoy, heninoy

	May I fall into the hole made by digging,
	And there, fluttering about, may I remain!

	Heninoy, heninoy
	Heninoy, heninoy

― 187 ―

27. Sung by Harry Marsh, 1931

	Heninoy, heninoy
	Heninoy, heninoy

	In the southeast the adolescent girl comes seducing to get herself
	a man.
	She comes crossing Sucker Creek which should not be crossed.

	Heninoy, heninoy
	Heninoy, heninoy

28. Sung by Harry Marsh, 1931

	Heninoy, heninoy
	Heninoy, heninoy

	To the north behind the snow mountain,
	Going up a bare ridge, feathers [*] The feathers presumably belong to the headdress of a potential lover. are visible.
	Going up a bare ridge north behind the snow mountain,
	Going up a bare ridge, feathers are visible.

	Heninoy, heninoy
	Heninoy, heninoy

LOVE SONGS
[†] The rest of the songs that I collected are love songs and songs from forgotten stories. Love songs are known as nini, from the introductory and final refrain hinini, which is repeated an indefinite number of times. They are complete in themselves or simply songs coming from love stories, which also are known as nini. These latter are often hard to understand, as they refer to incidents in the story. Nini tunes were sometimes played on a flute.

36. Sung by Harry Marsh, 1931

	Hinini, hinini
	Hinini, hinini

	Where he walks about, where he walks about,
	Pushing the deer decoy back away from his face,
	Right there in front of him

― 188 ―

May I come gliding down and fall!

	Hinini, hinini
	Hinini, hinini

37. Sung by Harry Marsh, 1931

	Hinini, hinini
	Hinini, hinini

	Please,
	Teach me a word I don't know!

	Hinini, hinini
	Hinini, hinini

38. Sung by Harry Marsh, 1931

	Hinini, hinini
	Hinini, hinini

	Long ago I wept for you,
	But now I weep
	For him who lives west, further west, I weep
	For him who dwells in the west,
	Under the sharp pinnacles of Lime Rock.

	Hinini, hinini
	Hinini, hinini

39. Sung by Harry Marsh, 1929

	Hinini, hinini
	Hinini, hinini

	The sleeping place which you and I hollowed out will remain
	always,
	Will remain always, will remain always, will remain always.

	Hinini, hinini
	Hinini, hinini

― 189 ―

41. Sung by Fanny Brown, 1929

	Hinini, hinini
	Hinini, hinini

	Before you go over the gap of the snow-mountain to the north,
	Downhill toward the north,
	O my, do look back at me!
	You who dwell below the snow-mountain,
	Do look back at me!

	Hinini, hinini
	Hinini, hinini

42. Sung by Fanny Brown, 1929

	Hinini, hinini
	Hinini, hinini

	For some reason I dislike you.
	I do not love you.

	I dislike you because,
	Like a snipe hopping on,
	You crossed creeks ahead of me.

	Truly I dislike you for good.
	I love one who dwells there in the west.

	Hinini, hinini
	Hinini, hinini

43. Sung by Sadie Marsh, 1929

[*] Songs 43–44. These two songs are referred to as nini sometimes. They are derisive songs. The McCloud woman, who has been nurtured on juicy salmon and has to live on grasshoppers and such small fry in the Stillwater subarea, sings to her husband.

	Of course,
	If I went to the McCloud
	I might choke on a salmon bone …

― 190 ―

44. Sung by Jennie Curl, 1930

[*] Another McCloud woman refuses her suitors with this ditty.

	Of course,
	If I went to Stillwater
	I might choke on a grasshopper leg.

	Yeah, but—
	If I went to the Upper Sacramento
	I might choke on the bone of a fawn …

SONGS FROM FORGOTTEN STORIES

45. Sung by Harry Marsh, 1929

[†] Songs 45–47. The last three nini are songs coming from love stories. The stories, as myths, are forgotten or perhaps never have had any existence. Nowadays, they are told informally, only as explanations of the songs. There are nini tales containing songs that are told formally, but in these, the interest lies in the narrative and the song is merely part of the story, sung in the appropriate place.

Song 45. This is, to my knowledge, the most popular Wintu song. It is said to have been composed by a lover rejected for his poverty, when he found his old love in circumstances so reduced that she had to live on a diet of clover. It is a song of derision, and the Wintu find it amusing.

	Down in the west, lying down,
	Down in the west, lying down,
	A beautiful bear I found,
	Tearing up clover in fistfuls.

46. Sung by Jennie Curl, 1930

SONG OF THE PREGNANT WOMAN

	On the north slope of Baqakilim
	I was deserted.

	Some flower made me heedless
	And I was deserted.

	A wild orange blossom made me heedless
	And I was deserted.

― 191 ―

47. Sung by Jennie Curl, 1930

	Hinini, hinini
	Hinini, hinini

SONG OF THE FORSAKEN BROTHER

	Do not weep,
	Do not weep,
	Younger brother, do not weep.

	She would have gone about,
	She would just have gone about in the flat below.

	Do not weep.
	Do not let her come in front of the north side of our dwelling;
	That is where Bead-bear will go about.

	Do not let her get tiger-lily bulbs.
	Do not weep, younger brother.
	49. Sung by Sadie Marsh, 1929 [*] The last song in this collection comes from a forgotten myth.

SONG OF THE QUAIL

	I stroke myself, I stroke myself;
	East of the camp site, where the earth is heaped,
	On my back I lie.
	I lie stroking myself,
	In the summer, when sunshine falls deep in the northern
	canyons.

― 192 ―

12. Loon Woman

WINTU 1929Jo Bender, NARRATORDOROTHY DEMETRACOPOULOU, COLLECTORDELL HYMES, TRANSLATOR

INTRODUCTION BY DELL HYMES

This dramatization of incest, death, and renewal has drawn repeated attention since its publication in 1931.^[1] It has been the focus of a special article (Demetracopoulou 1933), retold in a popular book (T. Kroeber 1959), and addressed at length in a major analysis of myth (Lévi-Strauss 1981).

The Source

We know the text because of the work of two women at the start of their careers, Dorothy Demetracopoulou (Lee) and Cora Du Bois. Both went on to become well-known for other work, Demetracopoulou-Lee for essays on languages as forms of thought (Lee 1944, 1959), Du Bois for study of culture and personality among the people of Alor (an island

― 193 ―

of Indonesia) and as the first woman professor of anthropology at Radcli e (Harvard). In the summers of 1929 and 1930 the two women joined in an inquiry remarkable for its time. Among the Wintu, living along tributaries of the Sacramento River north and northwest of present Red Blu, they sought not only good storytellers, but tellers of di erent abilities, under varied conditions, so as to shed light on change and stability. Because of this, we have converging perspectives on a community tradition, with specific information about tellers and their circumstances.^[2]

Formerly myths were told only on winter nights. A good teller would have a good memory and be a good singer; evidently one could change voice with a change in characters or situation, and animate narration with gesture (Demetracopoulou and Du Bois 1932:376, 379, 497). The “Loon Woman” myth was told in the summer of 1929 by Jo Bender (Upper Sacramento). He was about eighty-five, esteemed as a teller by other Wintu (Demetracopoulou and Du Bois 1932:496, 498, 499) and by the two young anthropologists (379, 392).

I should explain this new translation. Demetracopoulou's transcriptions of Wintu texts are unpublished, and their location was not known to Herbert Luthin, the editor of this volume, or myself. Fortunately, Alice Shepherd had the text of “Loon Woman” and sent a copy to Luthin. It had only Wintu, no English, so the original translation must have been done separately. That translation was published twice, but the two are not quite identical.^[3]

Thanks to the grammar and dictionary of Harvey Pitkin (1984, 1985), supplemented by the dictionary of Alice Shepherd (Schlicter 1981), I was able to match Wintu elements with English meanings and identify their grammatical roles. I could then look for further relations among them.

When “Loon Woman” was transcribed, such stories were thought to be prose. Division into larger units (paragraphs) was ad hoc. Recently it has been realized that stories may indicate ways of their own of going together. Intonation contours may indicate units (verses), which enter into longer sequences (stanzas, scenes). For “Loon Woman,” the manuscript shows no contours, but patterns do emerge. It is common in stories for some sentence-beginning words to mark units, and that turns out to be true of “Loon Woman.” So as to carry over the e ect of the original, each such word has been translated always the same way, and each di erently from the others: note “After,” “After that,” “And then,” “At last,” “At that,”

― 194 ―

“For that,” “Now,” “Suddenly,” and of course expressions such as “Next morning.” (Interestingly, when “And then” [uni-buha] occurs, it tends to be second of a pair of units, or third of three. Parallelism is also a factor in particular cases. Repetition of a common verb of “being, residing” [buha] initiates the two opening scenes in part 1.)

Fundamentally, interpretation of the shape of the whole depends upon the hypothesis that, like many other oral narratives, Native American and English, the story makes use of certain kinds of sequence. The common alternatives among traditions are relations of three and five, or of two and four. A narrator may shift between them, to be sure, and one set may include something of the other. Awareness of such relations contributes to an appreciation of the rhythms of a story. This translation attempts to display them on the page.

Some texts in Shepherd (1989) suggest that Wintu narrators use relations of three and five; “Loon Woman” certainly does. But sequences of three and five are sometimes sequences of pairs: the scene in which the elder sister discovers the heart of the hero (part 3, scene [1]), and the final two scenes of the story as a whole, have each five pairs of stanzas (sets of verses). When units are paired, I put a single closing brace in the right margin to mark the end of the pair.

In such patterns a turn at talk is always a unit, and a sequence may consist of alternating turns, as in five pairs of interaction between mother and daughter (lines 56–68). Speeches count as a single unit (turn at talk) in large sequences, but may have internal patterning of their own. The long speech by the helpful bird in act 6 has three parts, each ending with a verb of speaking. (I mark these internal parts with the designations “E/1,” “E/2,” “E/3.”)

Sometimes a three-step sequence has a sense of the onset, ongoing, then outcome of an action, or an object of perception, as when the daughter matures (21–23) and discovers a long hair (cf. 27–29, 30–32 and 33–35, 36–38). Repetition of words sometimes has one pair enclose another—what is called “chiasmus,” as in lines 19–20, 234–35, 258–60, 497–98. Sometimes members of a pair alternate, as when twice the mother ponders and the daughter measures (73–74, 78–79: 75, 87–88).

A run of three or five can elaborate a single action or activity. When the two boys set out, they “play, play, play” (430–32). The second time Loon Woman cries for her parents, she “cries, cries, cries” (236–38). When earlier she prepares a bed for herself and her brother, repetitious wording

― 195 ―

in a doubled set of five-line stanzas (122–31) seems to convey confusion, urgency, and excitement.

Translation as Retelling

Mr. Bender evidently controlled patterns in English as well as Wintu, and his translating was also in part retelling. When the sister first says, “Whose hair?” (34), the next line in Wintu means literally “she wants to know.” Bender's translation is more dramatic: “I want to know.”

When the sister and brother go, she calls for evening to come quickly, and then the two are said to “go” six times (given the doubling of “go” elsewhere, this presumably constitutes three pairs). The English has five verbs, not six: “They went, and went, and went, and went, and went.”^[4] Evidently Mr. Bender knew that English does not ordinarily multiply pairs but does multiply single words, and so he substituted a run. Even so, a run in English would usually be three; Mr. Bender goes to five. I suspect that in Wintu three pairs was a maximal e ect, and that a run of five seemed an equivalent maximal e ect in English.

In the five pairs of lines in which the brother wakes and leaves his sleeping sister, the third and fifth pairs (166–67, 170–71) exist in English only. The additions extend and do not disturb the pattern of the stanza.

It remains to be seen to what extent other Wintu narrators and translators have made use of possibilities such as those mentioned here.

Proportion

The whole of a story has to make sense in terms of a pattern of relations, and Jo Bender's “Loon Woman” does. Its verses, stanzas, and scenes combine into six acts, paired in three parts. (For other work of this kind, see Hymes 1992, 1994a, 1994b, 1995.) Recognition of such connections of form and content makes clear the proportions and emphases of the telling.^[5]

Two acts present a beautiful boy, hidden, then discovered (part 1). Two central acts present incest and destruction (part 2). Two final acts present restorations and retribution (part 3). Within each part something accidental prompts what happens. The sister discovers a hair fallen from her brother's head, and so prepares for incest (act 2); Coyote, although warned, looks down as the family escape upward, and so they

― 196 ―

fall into the fire (act 4); the two boys wound a bird who tells them about the Loon, and so she is killed and the lost hearts recovered and restored (act 6).

Interpretations

Some of the meaning of the story involves understandings that members of the community would take for granted. Many are shared with other Native American traditions. Here are several such.

The opening and closing—“many people came into being” and “So they say it ends”—are conventional and show that the story was told by someone still conversant with such devices. (Young narrators were becoming less conversant during the period in which the story was taken down.) The opening sets the story in the earlier time when the human age was given shape. The closing indicates that the story is vouched for by what others have said. If it had been told in winter, someone would have followed the closing with words wishing for spring.

The sister's attention to a hair fits the first requisite for physical beauty, long, thick, shiny, black hair (Du Bois 1935:59; cf. restoration of such hair in Hymes 1983, and Lévi-Strauss 1981:389).

That the daughter goes west may foreshadow her transformation into a dangerous being. The word nom-yo (‘west-?’) describes persons likely to become animals, or “werebeasts” (Du Bois 1935:5).

When the mother at last accedes to the daughter's refusal to go except with the eldest son, it is not because she cannot recognize danger. One cannot forever refuse a kinsperson or partner.

That it is Coyote who looks down, causing escape to fail, is no surprise. He is the father in some versions of the story, but not here, and is not restored to life at the end. Having an isolated Coyote at just this point, a sort of walk-on numskull, fits well with the story's view of the family as not to blame. Given a boy so beautiful as to cause (illicit) desire, they hide him. That the daughter finds a telltale hair is accidental. A proper mother cannot at last keep her daughter from choosing her brother. The son leaves the sister as soon as he can awake, and the family do at once what he runs to tell them to do. A new generation kills what the daughter has become.

As for the two women who find the oldest son's lost heart, they are shown to be good at the very start (of act 5): they do useful work every

― 197 ―

day. And their first line inserts “human” (Wintu) before “women,” contrasting them with what the woman just-mentioned, the sister, has become.

That the son's heart has song shows power. That there are deer tracks where it is found indicates a prototypical male power, hunting deer. Another version has his tears create a salt lick that attracts deer. Absence of that here may indicate that deer recognize power as such.

That the restored son has two women as wives indicates high status. Usually co-wives were sisters, and their husband slept between them.

Instruction from a wounded bird is a popular device in many traditions. The bird goes unnamed here, but perhaps its cry is an identification. The cry “Tuwétetek” is like a name for killdeer in the neighboring and related language, Nomlaki, te-wé-dé-dik.^[6] Notice that the usual step of bandaging the wound, and being given advice in return, is absent. The bird is already on the side of the boys, somehow related to them, referring like their father to “she who made us kinless.”

Title

In the manuscript and publications of the myth, the title has the name of the older brother in Wintu, but “Loon Woman” in English. In the story he is named, but she is not; not even a word for “loon” occurs. Perhaps that is because no loon survives. The story does not tell, actually, why a loon will look as it does in a world to come. One would have to speculate about that; this loon is di erent. The distinctive necklace has been taken back, the hearts are human beings again. So far as the story goes, the loon is an evil forever gone.^[7]

I translate the hero's name with one of its possibilities (cf. Pitkin 1985: 36, 37, 38, 271). Shepherd (personal communication) says that the name could suggest most or all of those possible senses. Since the story is about what a sister as well as a brother becomes, lacking a Wintu name for her, I use “become” for her in the title.

Other Discussions

Demetracopoulou (1933) analyzes versions of “Loon Woman” in terms of some eighteen incidents and their distribution among versions from the Achumawi, Atsugewi, Maidu, Karuk, Modoc, Shasta, Wintu, and Yana.

― 198 ―

She finds the story to have a sharply defined character in a limited area, integrating incidents intrinsically unrelated. Two incidents do seem original—that of the lost hair and the revivified heart—but neither would account for the story itself. The sequence of incidents, their dovetailing and remolding, is based first of all on the theme of catastrophic incest and secondarily on the punishment of the prime actors, linked with the widespread theme of a son revenging and reviving his father.

Theodora Kroeber (1959:39–65) reframes and retells the story, drawing on several of the same versions (Achumawi, Atsugewi, Karuk, Maidu, Shasta, Wintu, and Yana).

Lévi-Strauss (1981) makes the Loon Woman story an essential part of his great enterprise, to show the unity of myth throughout the New World. By way of a recently published Klamath myth, he connects the Loon Woman stories of Northern California to the bird-nester theme in South America, with which he began the four volumes of his Mythologiques. He takes the hidden child in Loon Woman to be an inversion of the bird-nester, and by a series of further inversions, oppositions, and transformations, he finds that “the whole northern part of North America is the scene of a vast permutation” (215), reaching as far as the Wabenaki of New England. His argument takes Demetracopoulou to task at several points (e.g., 60–62, 388–89)—for instance, for treating the hair incident as arbitrary and specific (389).

Lévi-Strauss's work is indispensable for its vast command of detail, its attention to natural history and geography as factors, and its recurrent sensitivity and insight. At the same time, its conception of mythical thought as often a playing out of formal possibility, its overriding concern for indications of the emergence of culture out of nature, and for certain kinds of coding—astronomical, gastronomical, and so forth—omit what may be perfectly good reasons for a story to be the way it is. In the case of Jo Bender's telling of Loon Woman, one reason may be pain felt for an intelligent, determined child cleaving to a fatal course. Another is to fit with a cultural cognitive style.

The two Wintu versions, this by Jo Bender, and another by Sadie Marsh (Du Bois and Demetracopoulou 1931:360–62) can be understood as alternative ways of portraying and thereby thinking about lust as a woman's motive. The daughter in the Marsh story is immediately impulsive, aggressive, and ultimately cannibalistic. The denouement takes

― 199 ―

little time. The denouement in the Bender story takes a generation. This daughter is complex. She holds to her goal in extended interaction with her mother, she plans and works and uses magic to make it happen, and later she grieves at length for the loss of her mother and father.

As to hair, having found the hair, she looks and looks, and later matches and measures. All this is in keeping with a Wintu concern for bases of knowledge, expressed in a recent development of a system of evidential suffixes (see the lucid analysis in Schlicter 1986). The first major action of the story is the scenes in which the daughter looks and looks to be sure of the source of a hair (act 2, scenes [1] and [2]). Visual knowledge, the kind most assured, is again in focus in lines in which her counterpart sees and hears speak the lost heart of that source (319–30). Even so, her conclusion as to who it must be (329) is marked as inference (-re:m). Sight is again in focus in the lines in which her younger sister sees what she has discovered (388–96), and when the boys who have killed Loon take their father to see. Hearing, to be sure, begins the long process by which she discovers, then nourishes, He-whois-made-beautiful. The women at the center of the first and third parts, she who destroys and she who recovers, are akin in deliberate response to evidence.

In this respect the hair incident is indeed “important aesthetically to the form of the myth” (Demetracopoulou 1935:121) and is to be explained, not by distant analogues (Lévi-Strauss 1981:389), but from within Wintu language and culture. The myth as a whole is distinctive in its steady marshaling of detail to show a family almost destroyed and in the end surviving evil.

Native Language Passage

Here are lines 24–35 in Wintu, with word-by-word glosses and translation. The lines, in which the sister, She-who-becomes-loon, discovers the fateful hair, are taken from the incident that precipitates the main events of the story.^[8]

'uni-r p'o·q-ta k'éte hima me·m-to·n hará·, they-say. sca woman-that one morning stream-that. loc goes After that one morning the woman goes to a certain stream,
― 200 ―
me·m-tó· me-s-to· pi-to·n hara·, stream-that. obj water-gen-that. obj she-that. loc goes she goes to where they get water,
kén·la· pi p'o·q-ta. Pómin-winé, wine tómoi, sits-down she woman-that ground-looks.at sees hair she sits down that woman. She looks at the ground, she sees a hair,
číne·. Wine·, wine· tómoi, k'ete·m tómoi. catches/takes.it looks.at.it looks.at hair one. obj hair she takes it up. She looks, she looks at the hair, one hair.
Tómoi niqa·'a wíne: “Héket-un tómoi?” t'ipna·-s-kuya. hair find-sta look.at who-poss hair know-stat. int-want She looks at the hair she has found: “Whose hair?” she wants to know.

NOTES

1. I am indebted to Herb Luthin for inviting me to take on this challenging and rewarding task, and to Alice Shepherd for information and encouragement. She has caught mistakes and sparked recognition of the striking relation between categories of the language (Schlicter 1986) and the shape of this telling.

2. An example of such information as it bears on the present translation: to heighten action Mr. Bender used a special arrow-release gesture (not the one normal for arrow-release), whether or not an arrow was released in the story. The oldest teller, Jim Fender, age ninety, also actively used gesture, especially for directions and arrow-release. On the strength of this, two otherwise odd uses of a word that can mean “thus, like this” are taken here as marking gestures to show how Loon Woman scratched for hearts (lines 260, 264).

3. There is evidently incidental editing in the second publication (Demetracopoulou 1935) and slippage in the course of its reaching print. Part of the speech of the wounded bird is missing. Lines 456–68 here are in the first publication (Du Bois and Demetracopoulou 1931:359, lines 19–25), but absent in the second (Demetracopoulou 1935:107, line 3).

4. Wintu does not explicitly mark tense in the verb, and the past is the normal English narrative tense. In the translation itself (lines 111–13), I have used the present tense “going” at this point, thinking that it avoids the implication that the Wintu is the same as English, and because it has a certain freshness.

5. Following conventions I have established elsewhere (see Hymes 1992, 1994a, 1994b, 1995), I employ capital roman numerals (I, II, III) to designate

― 201 ―

“acts,” lowercase roman numerals (i, ii, iii) to designate “scenes,” capital letters (A, B, C) to designate “stanzas,” and lowercase letters (a, b, c) to designate “verses.”

6. The information here comes from Alice Shepherd. Lévi-Strauss notes an analogous role for Killdeer in Klamath and Yana versions of the story (1981:49, 95) and for Meadowlark among the Shasta (133).

7. A giant bird called wukwuk was known among the Nomlaki, who live to the south of the Wintu and are their linguistic relatives (Goldschmidt 1951:353). The account of the bird that Goldschmidt obtained from Je Jones does not connect it with the loon or a myth.

8. The abbreviations used in this passage are as follows: gen = ‘generic’, int = ‘intensive’, loc = ‘locative’, obj = ‘objective’, poss = ‘possessive’, sca = ‘subordinating causal anterior’, sta = ‘subordinating temporal anterior’, stat = ‘stative’.

13. Four Songs from Grace McKibbin

WINTU CIRCA 1982Grace McKibbin, SINGER AND NARRATORAlice Shepherd, COLLECTOR AND TRANSLATORLeanne Hinton, ANALYSIS AND TRANSCRIPTION

INTRODUCTION BY Leanne Hinton

Grace McKibbin was a great singer, with knowledge of hundreds of traditional Wintu songs. While there were many Wintu songs of ceremonial significance to be sung by trained religious leaders, the four songs transcribed and translated here are secular in nature and sung by plain folks. People among the Wintu and other tribes used to make up songs to express strong emotions in situations of great joy or pain. Three of these songs Grace called “love songs,” and one was a “cry song.” Although love songs sometimes speak about romance between a man and woman, they are more often about the strong bonds of family. Two of these songs express the pain of parents when their daughters leave them to marry; and the other love song displays the pride of a young girl in her brother-in-law. The cry song is also about family love: the lament of a newly widowed man trying to figure out what to do with his three small children.

― 220 ―

FIGURE 5. Grace McKibbin. Courtesy Alice Shepherd.

When Grace sang for Alice Shepherd, she always prefaced and ended her songs with some description of their history and meaning. I consider her words about the song to be part of the performance. Indeed, it must have been the case that even for Wintu listeners, most singings of these songs were also accompanied by explanations, because they were sung by people for generations after their first composition. I have therefore included Grace's explanations here as integral parts of the performance.

Since Grace was talking to an English-speaker, her explanations were in English, and are presented here verbatim. The songs were in Wintu, and in keeping with the requirements of this volume, they are presented in translated form. I present the songs with the exact number and arrangement of lines as the original performances. The translation tries to remain as true as possible to the meanings of the Wintu lines. When the lines contain vocables (meaningless syllables), they are presented as they are pronounced in the song. The spoken song explanations

― 221 ―

are formatted in keeping with pauses and sentential intonation (and punctuation therefore reflects phrasing rather than the conventions of English grammar). After each sentence-final falling intonation (whether terminal or not), a new left-adjusted line begins. A nonfinal pause at a clause boundary is signaled by a line break with the new line indented. A pause within a clause is signaled by a line break with the new line beginning just below the end of the previous line. Loudness is represented by capitalizing the words spoken loudly; italics indicate emphasis.

In general the song consists of only one or two di erent lines of text plus a line of vocables, sung to a longer melodic form (see p. 225). The same small set of lines is repeated many times in the song in di erent orders. Much of the artistry and listening pleasure comes from the weaving of the text lines into the di erent melodic phrases. Of course, no written transcript of a song text can do that song justice. Missing are the lilting melody, the startling rhythms, the fine glides and bursts and vocal ornaments that accompany the song performance. Songs on paper can sometimes seem strangely repetitive and dull. Nevertheless, the ideas being presented in the songs are profound. The line of text is an epigram, an epitome of a feeling, woven over and over into a melodic frame.

NOTES ON THE SONGS

1. First Love Song

Three brothers from a tribe in Oregon came to a Big Time, an intertribal celebration held in Wintu country and neighboring areas. They were the sons of Elc'o:di, named in the song as the “younger Elc'o:dis.” They danced the hisi dance, and a young Wintu girl fell in love. As Grace McKibbin put it while explaining this song on another occasion:

	And this young girl
	she fell in love with these brothers,
	'Cause she didn't say which one she liked,
	but she
	she felt an awful lot for all three of them, I guess.

― 222 ―

She decided to go home with them to Oregon, and this song is her farewell song to her father.

Love songs have a typical melody and rhythm that di er from hisi songs; but in this case, the young woman who made this love song used a hisi melody to frame her words, in commemoration of the event that caused her to fall in love. Two sets of vocables are used in the song: henini ninini is one variant of the standard vocable set used in love songs; and heyano heyano is the set used in hisi songs. In fact, after an earlier performance of this same song, Grace talked about the dual nature of the song and reminisced about the dancing itself:

	It's a love song through her,
	but it's a dance song otherwise:
	hisi ča:wi.
	They just go front,
	and backwards.
	And the front [ones] go back,
	so that they—
	they hold themselves same way:
	my dad say they were,
	when they dance like that,
	they hold themselves SO straight,
	and so EVEN when they dance,
	they step even,
	step, go forward,
	and step back, you know?
	They STEP EVEN.
	They go side by side,
	whole big row of 'em.
	That's just the way they dance that song.

2. Second Love Song

This love song shows the depth of family feeling among the Wintu and the joy that accompanies work in a well-integrated culture. The child who sings the song is expressing her pride in her brother-in-law who has killed a buck and gone with the girl's sister to bring it home. The girl is asked to take care of the cooking while the sister goes with her husband, and unlike children many of us no doubt know, this girl responds to the

― 223 ―

request with joy. She feels proud of her ability to help the family with adult tasks, and she sings with a welling sense of love. I have found a similar song and accompanying story among the Havasupais in Arizona, which makes me suspect that the song-type is very old and widespread among hunting cultures.

3. Third Love Song

In the first love song, a daughter sings a song of empathy for her father, who will be left alone without her when she heads o with her newfound lover. In this song it is the mother who sings to her daughter. This woman's daughter also met a man from a northern tribe and will go away with him. The mother likens the northerners to migrating geese, envisions the daughter flying north with the geese, and implores the daughter for one last backward look before she flies away. (Notice, by the way, that in Wintu one travels “down” north, rather than “up” north. The prepositions we choose to accompany the cardinal directions are culture-specific.)

4. Cry Song

Vocables (so-called nonsense syllables) actually carry some meaning. One aspect of their meaning is that they signal what kind of song is being sung. The vocables hinini are diagnostic of love songs. Cry songs are characterized by the lamenting exclamation ani:, or ani: yo:. In this cry song, there is a line of vocables sung many times, and then two lines of real words. The words are plain: “Which trail should I take to go over the hill? I guess I'll take the south trail over the hill.” But meaning is multileveled: this grieving widower is trying to take his young children on a dangerous trip over the snowy mountain by horseback, and the wrong trail could mean the di erence between life and death. On yet another level, he is expressing a general sense of being lost, not knowing what he and his family will do now that the mother of his children is dead.

14. Four Songs from Grace McKibbin

NOMLAKI 1935CHARLES WATHAM, NARRATORCLARENCE CAMPBELL, COLLECTOR

INTRODUCTION BY BRIAN BIBBY

Late one evening, as I was conversing with Nomlaki elder Wallace Burrows in his home on the Grindstone Creek Reservation, nestled among the blue oak and bull pine that dot the rolling hills of western Tehama County, he brought up the name of Charley Watham. He had known Charley. Charley was a dance man who participated in the ceremonial life at Grindstone. He was also known for his regalia and, more specifically, as a maker of woven feather belts.

Wallace told me he remembered that Charley had owned a fine sheep dog who could manage a herd of sheep just about all by itself, leaving Charley free to relax, take a nap, eat lunch, or maybe make a feather belt. Sure enough, while the dog was watching the sheep, Charlie would sit up on a hillside where he had a good view of the animals and work away on his belts. These were woven in what is often described as a warp-face weave, using two-ply cordage. Although formerly the belts were made from native hemp, it's more likely that during this period of Charley's

― 236 ―

life he was using jute fibers he had unraveled from gunnysacks and then retwisted in the old style.

Tiny, brilliant scarlet-red feathers from the scalp of acorn woodpeckers and the iridescent green feathers from the head and neck of mallard ducks were woven securely into belts some five feet in length and often six to eight inches in width. White glass beads were woven into geometric patterns set against the sections of red feathering. This was no idle pursuit: the making of a woven feather belt required some very meticulous and demanding manipulation of thousands of feathers, usually less than a half inch long each. Feather belts were used in the Hesi ceremony and dance. In a photograph, one of several taken during the Hesi dance of July 1907 at Stonyford, a man identified by some as Charley Watham is wearing one such belt, perhaps of his own manufacture.

W hen the text of a 1935 interview with Mr. Watham recently came to light, I was greatly interested.^[1] The only previous references to Watham I had heard were from a few people who had known him. All I really remembered, aside from the great sheep-dog story, was that he was a dance man. The places Charley went to dance are the same places I have heard about from other elders. These ceremonial dance houses—at Chico, Noweedehe (at Grimes), and Wyteedesla (near Princeton)—have long since ceased to exist. Only a few songs and the roundhouse at Grindstone still exist from his time.

There were some wonderful dances in those old places. Each of these communities had developed its own particular attributes relative to its ceremonial and religious life. Each had its own distinct flag (or flags) that flew during the Hesi. Cloth banners, reminiscent of the American flag in shape, materials, colors, and the use of stars and stripes, featured designs symbolic of images seen in a dream by the flag's originator. These villages also possessed their own songs for the Hesi: songs for each ceremonial outfit, songs for the flags, finishing songs, around-the-fire songs, and so forth. These songs were all born of dreams. Collectively they form a song-map of the region, part of the indigenous soundscape of the upper Sacramento Valley.

Remarkably, much of this fragile nineteenth-century oral literature has survived, and appears to be floating on into the twenty-first. The songs Charley Watham heard, and perhaps danced to, at Chico, Noweedehe,

― 237 ―

FIGURE 6. Dancer believed to be Charles Watham. Courtesy Phoebe Apperson Hearst Museum of Anthropology and the Regents of the University of California.

and Wyteedesla continue to resonate in the four ceremonial roundhouses that still maintain the Hesi tradition. I remember very distinctly that, upon conclusion of a song, Wallace Burrows would always identify it according to its village-specific lineage. This was an important thing to know about a song, an essential aspect of a singer's professional knowledge. Moreover, Wallace often added his own personal remembrances of the songs: “You should have heard old So-and-so sing that,” or “People

― 238 ―

used to dance that a lot in the old days,” and so on. The association of a particular song with a particular place or individual is very strong in this tradition.

Charley Watham, like many before him and many since, was an initiated member of a dance society. At Chico, where he was of high standing or rank, the dance society was called the Kumeh (literally, ‘of the dancehouse’). The term for a fully initiated member is yeponi. Participating in ceremonial dances such as the Hesi requires membership in the dance society. It is really quite a di erent experience from the contemporary powwow scene, where anyone with an outfit of any sort may participate. In other words, you didn't show up and dance, or even join; you were brought in at the discretion of the dance society's members and leadership.

As the autobiographical story told here suggests, dreams were a central and guiding factor in Charley Watham's life. Dreams played an important role, too, in the lives of the Native peoples he lived amongst. At one point in his narrative, Watham's wife tells him to reveal his dreams to a friend, because it would be better to have a confidant. By doing so, she says, he will not be bothered by troubling dreams. A special class of “doctor” among the Konkow was the yom nedi, or dream doctor. Such an individual helped interpret a dream's significance and advised the dreamer on how to take steps to follow the dream's directions. The yom nedi might also help the patient with advice on how to alleviate bad or troublesome dreams.

Within the religious society and the dance societies, the role of the dreamer was particularly significant. Dreams were the origin of most songs and dances, and certain people were more disposed to this kind of dreaming than others, although anyone might receive a dream about a song or a particular dance. The highest rank within the dance society was that of the Moki. The Moki wore a cloak of raptor feathers that covered the dancer's body from head to toe. A central part of the Moki's performance, given at intervals during the Hesi, was to relay messages and prophecies from the Creator and other spiritual entities. Much of this is connected to dreaming.

The reservation Charley Watham was probably born on was one of the first ever established in Northern and Central California. Nome Lackee Reservation was indeed located in Nomlaki country, although Native people were brought there forcibly from other tribal regions beginning

― 239 ―

in 1854. It is important to remember that Nome Lackee Reservation was established scarcely more than five years after most Nomlakis' first-ever encounter with European Americans. The corruption within this reservation is legendary and well documented and obviously led to its early demise. However, with the establishment of Round Valley a second and more devastating blow was dealt to Native people in Northern California. The “drive” to Round Valley, beginning in 1863, was brutal and deadly. It further removed the majority of Native people out of the upper Sacramento Valley, leaving it open to homesteaders and farmers who sought its fertile soils and plentiful waterways. It is unclear, in Watham's narrative, whether he and his father took part in this drive. He only states that his father “moved” to Round Valley around 1862.

When I visited with Wallace and Edith Burrows at Grindstone in the summer of 1976, Wallace told me that he had heard a rumor that Charley Watham might be living in Sacramento. Someone had supposedly seen him in the downtown area. At first I thought Wallace was pulling my leg again, but he was serious. Someone had seen Charley in Sacramento, and recently. We debated this unlikely news and later talked about traveling down the valley to find him. But we never made the trip.

C harley Watham's reminiscence was collected as part of a statewide Depression-era program (State Emergency Relief Administration Project) designed to provide temporary jobs for unemployed workers. While some such works-projects programs paid artists to paint murals in post offices and other public buildings, or laborers to cut trail in national parks and forests, this particular program—miraculous in its foresight and creativity—paid interviewers and translators to do “salvage ethnography” with knowledgeable Native Californians (Valory 1971: fn. 79). Frank J. Essene was the project supervisor for the Relief Administration and must have pursued his undertaking intently, for the Essene papers in the Bancroft Library Ethnological Archives amass some eighty cartons of ethnographic and oral-historical materials collected during this period.

Watham's interview was taken down by a man named Clarence Campbell, near Pinoleville, California, on the seventh and thirteenth of June 1935. Nothing is known of Campbell—where he came from, what

― 240 ―

his background was, or how he fell on hard times and came to seek out Charley Watham. Perhaps Campbell was a local resident, hired to conduct salvage ethnography in his own area, or perhaps he was merely directed by Essene to travel to Pinoleville and conduct an in-terview; we simply don't know, though we may now be grateful to him for performing—and to the inventive Roosevelt-style social programs of the thirties for o ering—this service in a time of great hardship and need.

NOTE

1. This interview—a carbon typescript from original fieldnotes whose whereabouts are unknown (at least to me)—was found among the extensive Frank J. Essene papers in the Valory collection of the Bancroft Library at U.C. Berkeley. I've manipulated the original text of the interview in a number of di erent ways: (1) by supplying the title; (2) by reparagraphing the text, though location of the original paragraph boundaries is indicated by an extra line space between paragraphs; (3) by setting the first paragraph in italics, to reflect the fact that this paragraph is clearly in a di erent voice (the collector's alone) from the remainder of the text (a blend of two voices, narrator's and collector's, with the balance much in favor of the narrator—though that, of course, must remain a subjective assessment); and (4) by altering punctuation where needed for the flow or sense of the story. Other features of the text, including certain variant or nonstandard spellings and capitalizations, are presented as is.

The heading on the typescript in the Bancroft Library reads as follows:

book 1 pp. 1–133 Charles Wathem, informant, age 77. Half or 3/4 breed Nom'laki Clarence Campbell, reporter Pinoleville, Calif. Work assignment from June 7, 1935 to—God Indian name Yeaphony.

Note that “Yeaphony” is not really Watham's “Indian” name, as Campbell mistakenly believed, but merely his title (yeponi ‘initiated member’) in the dance organization. There is also considerable variation in the spelling of Watham's name as found here and in other documents. (“Watham,” “Wathen,” “Wathem,” and “Warthon” are all attested in the ethnographic literature.) Brian Bibby and I have regularized it in his introduction to the most common variant, “Watham.”—hwl

― 241 ―

For general information on the Nomlaki, begin with Walter Goldschmidt's article “Nomlaki” in the California volume of the Smithsonian Handbook; there, too, will be found Lowell John Bean and Sylvia Brakke Vane's “Cults and their Transformations,” with information on the Hesi and various other dance ceremonies. Cora Du Bois's fascinating research on “The 1870 Ghost Dance” includes interviews with Charley Watham (“Charlie Warthon” in her article). Robert Heizer and Alan Almquist'sThe Other Californians and James Rawls's Indians of California both contain information about Nome Lackee Reservation. Indian regalia of Northwest California was the focus of a full-color issue of News from Native California, which included Julian Lang's “The Dances and Regalia.” Brian Bibby has written a richly illustrated book on California basketmaking, The Fine Art of California Indian Basketry, and had a number of articles in News from Native California concerning the roundhouses and dance ceremonies of Northern California, including one on “The Grindstone Roundhouse.”

HOW I BECAME A DREAMER

A true story of an aged Indian, Charlie Wathen. Charlie's father arrived in California in the year 1849. He resided near the town of Weaverville until 1855 or 1856. He then moved to the Sacramento Valley near the old Nomlaki reservation. There he went to work for the government as an interpreter and stockman or cowboy. He could speak the Indian language as plainly as any Indian in the Tribe. “There he took up with my mother … ”

[June 7, 1935.]

[First Day's Work.]

I was born during the year 1857, and shortly after my birth the Indian reservation was disbanded. My father moved to Round Valley some five or six years after this. This was somewhere between 1861 and 1862.

Now five years later, which brought my age up to about eleven, there came a call for what is known as catch-weight in racehorse riding. My

― 242 ―

father, being a horseman, owned some racehorses. I was successful in winning two races for my father that day. Then two years later, there was a man by the name of Max James, who picked me up and brought me here to Ukiah. He started me riding racehorses right; according to rules. I rode for thirty years during horse race seasons. These seasons took place in the fall of the year. My jockey days were spent all over the state of California, Nevada, and eastern Oregon.

Then after my jockey days I came to Chico to live. There I made the acquaintance of my first wife, whom I married. Two years later, I lost my wife through childbirth. After this had happened my life was very much changed.

Because of some strange occurrences, I took up the Indian ways. This I will try to explain.

I then went to dreaming. It made no di erence what I did or where I went, these dreams came on every night. In these dreams, I and my wife were together all of the time. We would be going riding in our same buckboard driving the same horse. I had sold these belongings, but in my dreams they still lived. We would be going to an Indian dance or “Quomdee,” this being a place to give sermons.

[*] “Quomdee” is Campbell's untrained attempt at spelling Kumdi (pronounced “koom-dee”). Kum is the term for the ceremonial roundhouse.

And always when we entered, we would be coming down through the top instead of through a side entrance. Somehow we would always find people dancing with no songs or music of any kind.

Being haunted with these dreams, I decided to leave my home, thinking this better for myself. I went to another rancheria, by the name of Noweedehe. There I remained for one year. But I went back to my former residence every year to shear sheep. While in Noweedehe, I instructed the younger folks in playing baseball. The reason for me doing this was that I tried in every way to fight o these dreams that had been with me. They troubled me very much, almost driving me insane.

― 243 ―

At that time I knew nothing about the Indian ways, for I had always been among the white people and felt very much like a white person. But the Indian blood in me seemed to say that I must go back to the Indian ways.

Now, while I lived in Noweedehe there was a ceremonial dance every Sunday called the Ball Dance.

[*] In the manuscript, there is a margin note regarding the name of this dance (two lines, penciled in by hand): “xxx [undecipherable] / bull-head.” However, the Bullhead and the Ball are two separate dances. The Bullhead is equated with the Hesi; the Ball Dance was a more secular dance sometimes associated with Hesi ceremonies.

There was a feast or dinner connected with this, also brought in in a religious way.

So after these dreams, my conscience led me to begin to think over the Indian ways. Having lived among the Indians on a few reservations, I had a fair knowledge of how they conducted themselves and knew their habits and ways. But at that time I, myself, never took any part in their ways.

However, while my wife was living, she had told me to reveal my dreams to some friend, as it would be better to have a confidant. By doing this, she told me that I never would be bothered in any way.

She also told me to mourn her for only two months.

[†] Either Watham's wife had had early complications with her pregnancy, or she has had some premonition of her death. (Perhaps she herself was a dreamer.)

After that I could get married, do what I pleased, have any fun which ever I desired. She told me especially to dance, to go to the dances and enjoy myself. This I told her I could hardly do under two years' time.

She also told me to buy beads. So I went to Noweedehe to secure them. I bought over two hundred dollars' worth of beads. After making my purchase, I started to gamble

[††] The gambling Charley participates in is undoubtedly the traditional handgame played with two sets of bones, usually three inches in length, from the foreleg of a deer. Each set contains a marked bone and an unmarked one. Opponents try to guess which hand holds the marked bone, while the team holding the bones sings good-luck songs. Bets are placed before the game begins, each side putting into the center amounts of equal value. In Watham's day, people were still using clamshell disc beads as “property” or money.

with the people of Noweedehe. I won two

― 244 ―

hundred dollars' worth more of beads. When the gambling games broke up it was three o'clock in the morning. I retired for three or four hours, and while asleep I had a dream.

I dreamed that I went hunting and in this dream I saw two ducks come flying along. I raised my gun and fired. The two ducks came falling down to the ground. While falling they came down in a fast whirl. They fell near me. They were the most beautiful birds I had ever seen.

Having this dream interpreted by one of the dreamers of Noweedehe, I found out that the dream meant very bad luck for me. [So] I had my breakfast that morning about six o'clock. Before me, I had a trip of seventy-five miles to make before I reached home. This trip was made with a horse and small buggy called a buckboard. I had to drive my horse very fast and hard to make home by ten o'clock that evening.

On my return, I found my wife was very sick—on her deathbed. I went in and sat down by her bedside. She was asleep. There were some lady friends present who were taking care of her. They told me that some time before I had arrived, she was singing some Christian songs. After she had stopped singing, she told them that I was very near home, and that as soon as I arrived, she would bid me farewell and be on her way home. As soon as these ladies finished telling me the sad news, my only and dearest wife turned her head over to me, gave me her hand, and said, “Good-bye.”

After my hard luck and the loss of my wife, I sold my horse and buckboard. The rest of my things I gave away. About two months later I left there thinking I could overcome these dreams. I moved to Noweedehe and, being a baseball player, I instructed the people in the game there. I made my home at that place about six months later.

Later, I made up my mind to start in the Indian way, by taking up the Indian dance ceremonies. The first dance I undertook was the Ball Dance. After my first experience at dancing, my dreams suddenly stopped.

― 245 ―

After this event, I made up my mind that this is what my wife wanted me to do. So I danced with those people for several weeks doing the Ball Dance every Sunday. But I was not a success at this.

Now, the chief of this place took me and many mares out on a goose hunting trip. The meat was to be dried for winter, the oil saved, and the feathers. We were out on this hunting trip for one month.

One night I had a dream. I dreamed there were five little old people who took me into a dance house. They had a large basket, and we all sat around the basket. They sang a song and each was instructed to take it (the song) from one another and sing it all around the basket. Then one of these fellows told me to go over and take the drums and do the drumming while they sang. Then he told me to go to the floor and dance. Then one of these fellows took me by the arm with his two hands. He took me over to my place and told me to sit down and that I was all right then. This being a dream, on awakening, I gave it much thought.

Now, after this hunting trip, there came word from Wyteedesla calling for a big dance. So we went, a whole party of us. When we got to this place, Wyteedesla, the people from Chico had also come. The people from Wyteedesla had already taken me up to dance with them, but after the Chico people had seen me, they took me away from the Wyteedesla people and claimed me. So I had to dance with the Chico people.

Shortly after this dance at Wyteedesla, I went back to Chico and worked under those people for over seven years straight. They put me in a high standing or rank about the same as any white man's lodge would do. The first year I worked on the floor as leading dancer. This was to make me into a dance instructor. Then I began dancing Hessie.

[*] Campbell's spelling of Hesi.

Hessie was one of the leading Indian names for this one special ceremonial dance which took place in the spring of the year and in the fall of the year. We danced a di erent dance every two weeks during the seven years that I danced with them.

[†] Some of the narrator's comments about rank and standing might at first blush seem like simple boastfulness. But the Hesi societies were in fact very rank-conscious: “Within the Hesi society there were as many as 10 or 12 ranks to be achieved by payment and performance. Members were paid for enacting ceremonial roles, the acting not requiring the acquisition of esoteric knowledge; they paid to learn the esoteric knowledge that permitted them to direct performances and for the right to sit in a hierarchy of seating sections within the dance house” (Bean and Vane 1978:667). Bean and Vane also comment on the “bewildering variety of dances” performed in the course of the ceremonies.

― 246 ―

These people tore down the dance hall so as to fix it over, but got into a mixup and never did fix it. So I got discouraged there, and went to another place, a dance hall among my own people. They put me at the head of that hall and I remained there for five years.

[Stopped work at six o'clock.]

[Thursday, June 13.] [Started work 8 o'clock a. m.]

This dance house which I was in charge of was located at Grindstone, another rancheria, of my people.

Now, while dancing at Grindstone, I would every other year have to go to the mountains to gather acorns. On the trip we would start out with a wagon, but on nearing the mountains we would have to leave our wagon and pack our horses. We had three pack animals. Getting to where we wanted to go was over deep canyons. After arriving at camp we would put in several days gathering acorns. When we had gathered enough and packed our horses, we would have to take another route home. This was through the high mountains.

On this [particular] trip back, we reached the summit after sundown and were forced to camp overnight. We staked our pack animals, made a quick meal, and retired for the night.

As I fell asleep, a dream came over me. I dreamed that the chief from Wyteedelso took me into a dance house and there showed me some of the most beautiful dancing customs that I had ever seen.

[*] “Customs” is undoubtedly a misspelling for costumes. Bean and Vane note that “the dance costumes [of the Hesi] were extremely elaborate” (1978:667).

This man who

― 247 ―

showed me this outfit was a dead man from Wyteedelso. After this man had shown me this paraphernalia I dreamed that I fell asleep.

Another time, not long after this, I was herding sheep [on] the same mountain. While in camp one cold night, I retired early and fell right o to sleep. And another dream came over me. This time I dreamed that I was looking for my mule. I was tracking him along the ridge of a high mountain. While on this errand, I came across a very large snake track which was about twenty inches wide. Looking in the direction which he went, I saw him moving very slowly down the hill. His head was high in the air. It seemed to be about twenty feet high. As he crawled along he made a very loud noise. It sounded like a large body of water rushing through dry leaves. He was going down through a deep canyon, and just beyond him was a very big cli of rocks. This cli was just across the canyon from him. I stood there and watched him go. He seemed to run against this cli of rocks and make a noise just the same as that of loud thunder. After this I crossed his track, lay under a shady sugar-pine tree, and fell o to sleep.

There are many other dreams that I could tell of, and what they meant to me. Some of these dreams put me where I am today, an Indian doctor.

― 248 ―

15. Mad Bat

MAIDU
CIRCA 1902

Hánc'ibyjim (Tom Young), narrator

Roland Dixon, collector

William Shipley, translator

INTRODUCTION BY WILLIAM SHIPLEY

One of the great adventures of my life began, during the winter holidays of 1954, when I went up into the Sierra of Northern California to seek out the last speakers of a dying California Indian language known as Mountain Maidu. I was a graduate student at Berkeley then, in the newly inaugurated Department of Linguistics. Research funds had been made available by the California State Legislature for sending qualified students out into the field to learn, record, and analyze data on as many native languages of California as possible before they all disappeared forever. Over the next few years, I got to spend some of those funds.

I found the speakers I was searching for: Lena Benner, who was ninetysomething, and her daughter, Maym Benner Gallagher. It was actually Maym who turned out to be my great friend and teacher. She fully understood what I wanted to accomplish; she bonded enthusiastically with me in the service of our common enterprise. She put all her knowledge

― 249 ―

and talent at my disposal. I did the same for her in return. We had wonderful, vivid, and exciting times together and remained close friends until she died, many years later.

Before I started my work with Maym, I learned about the researches of Roland Dixon, a scholar who came out from the East at the turn of the century and investigated various California Indian languages, mainly Maidu. Among other things, he published, in 1912, a collection he had made of Maidu myths and stories, written in both Maidu and English on facing pages. He had collected this material in 1902–1903 from a young Maidu man whose American name was Tom Young. Dixon's achievement was truly remarkable in view of the inchoate state of ethnolinguistics at the time and the lack of any adequate mechanical recording devices.

When Maym and I were well along on our study of the language, I took Dixon's book up to the mountains with me. Maym remembered Tom Young very well, told me that he was noted among the Maidu as a storyteller, and said that his real name was Hánc'ibyjim (pronounced approximately like “HAHN-chee-buh-yim”). We looked through the book, noted the inadequacies of Dixon's Maidu transcriptions, and decided to reconstitute the section called “Coyote's Adventures,” an example of what's known as a Trickster Cycle—a picaresque chain of short anecdotes. That was Maym's choice, actually. She and her mother were unspoiled pagans. I'm sure she was attracted to the bawdy, sexy subject matter so characteristic of Coyote stories all over North America. Unfortunately, we never worked through the rest of the book. I reconstituted, translated, and published most of the other stories in later years, including an unbowdlerized version of the Trickster Cycle (Shipley 1991).

“Mad Bat,” however, was not among the stories that I translated. It appears here for the first time. Earlier on, I was daunted by some of Bat's speeches, which, as you will see, are essentially like the “word salad” talk of some schizophrenics and aphasics—an assemblage of valid bits and pieces of the language, jumbled together in an apparently meaningless potpourri. But as soon as I decided how to deal with those particular utterances, the rest of the translation came easily along.

The denouement of “Mad Bat” exemplifies a fairly common theme found in many Maidu stories: a powerful and malevolent creature—Bat, Frog Old Woman, and Muskrat are examples—finds himself deprived of his power and shrunken down to a small and innocuous animal. In this story, Bat commits murder and mayhem with grotesque abandon

― 250 ―

and without any immediate retribution or revenge, perhaps because the other people believe that his madness exempts him from responsibility for his actions.

My first impulse was to include only the first, longer and more elaborate, episode in the translation because the later—and much sketchier—adventure with Cloud and Ouzel seems, on the face of it, unrelated to what has gone before. However, it became clear to me that these later events resolve Bat's madness and restore order to the world. His death, followed by his demotion by Ouzel in the (Maidu) classical manner, involves what is, for us, a paradoxical situation. As Bat the individual he is dead, but as a stand-in for bats in general he lives on in the modern world, stripped of his power to do harm.

I should comment, parenthetically, on the brief irrelevant presence of Coyote in this story. Despite his appearance, this is not really a Coyote story; he's just here to liven the tale, a device which Hánc'ibyjim often used. Even the mention of Coyote could, in my day, move my Maidu friends to laughter. No matter that Coyote often “dies”; he always comes irrepressibly back to life again.

There are also a few contextual things that need to be explained or defined in order that the story may be more fully appreciated.

West Mountain (Táyyamanim) is the Maidu name for what is now called Mount Lassen, the southernmost peak of the Pacific Cascade range, a live volcano that dominates the skyline to the northwest of the Maidu homeland. It was thought that saying the name of the mountain out loud would cause it to erupt. Nakam Valley is the modern Big Meadows.

The ouzel, a bird that many people don't know about, is often called a water ouzel or a dipper bird (the Maidu name is mómpispistom). It lives along mountain streams and behind waterfalls and has the curious habit of walking along underwater in search of food. It is smallish and brown with a little white breast and a short tail.

There are four Maidu customs that appear in this story and require some explanation as well.

First, there is the way in which Bat and his brother seem to think of wives as (from our point of view) interchangeable objects. This is probably to be taken as part of Bat's heinousness. In fact, it seems certain that, in the old days, the woman's consent to a marriage was essential, though there was always a bride-price, and there were men who had two, three, or even four wives.

― 251 ―

Second, the staple food all over Northern and Central California was prepared from ground and leached acorns. It was eaten as soup, bread, or mush. Therefore, it was perfectly reasonable for Bat's sister-in-law not to have gotten around to providing acorn soup. It's another example of Bat's madness.

Third, when people wanted to get various people together from some distance away, they sent out knotted buckskin strings with the knots matching the number of days before the event. The messengers and the recipients would untie one knot every day. That way, everybody came together on the same day. These strings are what I have called “invitation strings” in the story.

The fourth custom has to do with gambling. By contrast with our view of gambling as vaguely immoral or, for most people, trivial and peripheral, the Maidu held in high esteem an elaborate pastime known as the grass-game. It was more than a recreational event. Charms for luck in gambling were highly prized. A single game could go on continuously for many days and nights, sometimes with enormous wagers.

And now, here is how Hánc'ibyjim opened his telling of “Mad Bat,” in Maidu, nearly a century ago:^[1]

pótc'odem májdym sámbojekytom hedéden bat person sibling. group very. close
mym ínk'i-di hybó ky-dom; that alongside. place-at house make-ing
amá-di myjím bomóm-di-'im, then-at that. [human] group-in-ish
syttim májdym, tetét wasó-sa-pem májdym, one person very angry-always-ish person
ohéj-c'oj-am. one.in.a.group-they.say-he.was

A very literal translation of these two sentences might read something like this:

A bat-person sibling-group making houses very close alongside each other; then, among this bunch of people, a very always-angry person was one of them, it is said.

― 252 ―

Finally, here is the same opening passage in “good” literary English, as I have translated it for this collection:

Bat and his brothers built their houses right next to each other. Now, among all the people around, there was one bad-tempered man.

A last suggestion. This story, of course, was always told and not written, and was, therefore, more like our theater than like our literature. I have tried to maintain this spoken quality in my translation, breaking the text into phrases, or lines, that suggest how Hánc'ibyjim may have told it. The best way to enjoy the story is to read it out loud, even if only to yourself.

NOTE

1. In Maidu, the letter j stands for a “y” sound, and the letter y stands for an umlauted vowel, “ü.” Stressed vowels are marked with an acute accent.

MAD BAT

	Bat and his brothers built their houses right next to each other.
	Now, among all the people around, there was one bad-tempered
	man.
― 253 ―
	Of all those pleasant folks, the mean and grumpy one was Bat!

	One of Bat's brothers went o to find a wife.
	But then, he never came back.
5	Bat just stayed there with his other relatives.

	One of them said: “Let's go hunting!
	We can make camp overnight somewhere and then come back.
	But let Bat come along later behind us.
10	If he's with us, he'll just make trouble.
	Let's go when everyone feels like it.”
	So they set o together, but Bat came along behind.

	Now, when they got to the camping place and were all sitting
	down,
	Bat arrived.

15	In the morning, they went o hunting here and there.
	Along toward evening, one by one, they came back.
	They skinned out the deer and divided up the meat.
	It was a sight to see. But they didn't give Bat any.
	They divided it among themselves. They didn't give Bat any.
20	When they had divided it up and tied it into bundles,
	they went back home.

	Later on, Bat came home too, following behind them.
	Then he spoke to his sister-in-law.
	“Make me some acorn soup,” he said.
25	But the woman said: “Wait—the acorns aren't leached yet.”
	So he just shot her with an arrow!
	He killed that woman! He killed his sister-in-law, just like that!

	Later, as it began to get dark, his brother was crying.
	And when his brother cried, Bat felt sorry for him.
30	And when his brother didn't stop crying, he too cried.
	“Watery draggety, watery draggety, my dingalong,” said Bat.
	“Stop mourning for that woman!
	I say that I will go and find you another woman to be with!”
	So then, in the morning, Bat started o, they say.
― 254 ―
	He traveled along, coming to many places where people were
	living. 35
	He looked all around in each and every dwelling.
	And in one house, a couple of very beautiful women were living.
	So, when Bat had sat outside the door for a while,
	he tossed a couple of arrows in to the father of those women.
40	“I'll trade you these for the women,” he said.

	And then that old man said, “All right!
	You two had better leave,” he said.
	“You two had better go with him, with this man.”

	And then the two women packed all their things into pack
	baskets,
45	and they all three set out,
	and when they had traveled and traveled, they got there.

	“You two go to that house over there,” said Bat.
	So those two women went over and crawled into his brother's
	house.
	Thus Bat killed his sister-in-law,
50	brought those two women back, and made it up to his brother.

	And after that, Bat went back to his own house and stayed there.
	But, as it was getting dark, some people came along.
	And when they had completely surrounded his house,
	they burnt it down.

55	The house kept burning.
	When it was almost completely burnt up,
	Bat came rushing back out of the night shadows.

Then he spoke. “Why are you doing this?” he asked.

	Then he shot at them.
60	And they kept shooting at each other until he had killed them
	all.
	Then he stayed there.
	The rest of the people didn't go away. They just stayed there too.

	After a while, one of the men spoke.
	“We used to always go hunting deer,” he said.
― 255 ―
65	Then the village headman said:
	“Go hunting, but don't say anything about it.
	That Bat fellow is a bad man,
	so all of you go but don't talk about it.
	Let him stay here.”
70	So they packed up a midday meal and went.

	But Bat, without their knowledge,
	got to their camping place long before they did.
	They came there,
	and afterward, in the morning,
75	they went o hunting down the mountain.
	Along toward dusk, they came back, one by one, carrying deer.
	And then again next morning, they went o hunting
	and straggled back toward evening.
	They skinned out the deer and cut up the carcasses.
80	It was a fright to see!
	The next day, they packed up their loads of meat
	and got ready to go home.

	Then Bat spoke.
	“Go along think sinew more or less,” he said.
85	“What do you mean?” they said.
	He said, “Go along think sinew more or less.”
	Then one of them untied his pack and gave him some sinew.
	He refused it. “Go along think sinew more or less,” he said.
	“What are you saying?” asked the other.
90	“Are you talking about this kind of sinew?”
	He showed him leg sinew. He showed him back sinew.
	Bat refused it. “Go along think sinew more or less,” he said.
	Then they gave him a look at a lung.
	“Is this what you're talking about?”
95	They showed him a heart.
	“Is this what you're talking about?” they asked.
	He said, “No! Go along think sinew more or less!”
	“He's bad-tempered. He's just going to say that.
	Let him alone and go!”
100	It was one of his kinsmen who spoke.
	So, when they had gotten their goods together, they went.
― 256 ―
	Meanwhile, Bat was flopped down on top of a rock.
	Some deer's antlers were hanging down, hanging from a sapling.

	The hunters went along until they got home.
105	When it was dark, they all went to sleep.
	In the morning, they said,
	“That magically powerful man never got back.
	He was angry. It seems he must have run away somewhere.
	That's the kind of thing he does!”
110	Then one said, “Well, then.
	You all better go see what's going on with him.” So they went.

	They kept going until they got to another place, but he wasn't
	there.
	When they looked all around,
	they saw the antlers lying a little further on.
115	And one of them kicked them over.
	Then, it seemed, Bat sprang up from under the antlers.
	Then they set the antlers upright and went back home.
	Antlers were the very things Bat was talking about,
	but, the way he talked, the other men just didn't understand.
120	So it seems that when they got home they stayed there.

	Then someone brought an invitation string and left again.
	When a few days had passed, all the knots were untied.
	Then, one by one, they went o to the feast.
	“You mustn't let that bad man hear about the feast,” someone
	said.
125	“If he knows about it, he'll go with us.
	Let him stay here! He's a bad one!”

	Then they sneaked away.
	They went along and, when they were almost there,
	they stopped to rest.
130	When they looked back from where they were sitting,
	they saw that wicked fellow coming along.
	“Why did you go away without telling me?” he asked.
	“We came without thinking about it,” they said.
	So then they all went along and arrived at the feasting place.
135	They crawled into a large house.
― 257 ―
	Meanwhile
	Bat went across to the house where his brothers were staying.
	When he got there, he crawled in. His brothers were there.
	When he had crawled in there, he sat down.

140	Now, his sisters-in-law were there, many of them.
	One of them put some manzanita berries on a plate
	and set it in front of him.
	“I'm not going to eat that kind of grizzly shit,” he said.
	And he gave the plate a kick.
145	And then those women, with scowling faces,
	were terrifying to see, standing around staring at him.

	He snapped them on the nose,
	those who were looking down angrily at him.
	Then they grabbed at him, but he dodged aside.
150	They all jumped to seize him but he dodged aside.
	He kept dodging. He grabbed his bow and arrow and shot them.
	Meanwhile, his brother stayed there and said nothing to him.
	He kept shooting and dodging.
	Then, after a while, he shot all his arrows. He killed them all.
155	And when he got over there, he stayed.

	Taking no notice of him, his other brothers were gambling.
	They all went on gambling. It got to be morning.
	They gambled all day.
	Along toward dark, they stopped gambling and set out for home.

160	Meanwhile, Bat, having come to the last house in the village,
	got to the place where two women were weaving baskets.
	Then he handed some arrows to the old man there.
	“I'm trading you these for the women,” he said.
	“I'm giving them to you for these two women,” he said.

165	“All right!” said the old man. “You two go now,” he said.
	Then those two packed up their basketmaking gear.

	Now all the people were scared of Bat,
	but there was nothing they could do.
	They couldn't kill him. He was very powerful.
170	Though lots of people shot at him with arrows,
― 258 ―
	they couldn't hit him. They were very frightened.
	Whatever he asked them for, they gave him.
	They couldn't refuse him.

	Those two women got all their things together,
175	and they all three went o.
	And then they got there and Bat gave the women to his brother.
	“You're going to stay here and be married to him,” Bat said.
	So his brother lived across the way from him with those two
	women.

	Later, Bat ran a race with Cloud, they say. They raced.
180	They set out and raced toward where the sun goes down.
	They raced.

	Cloud floated up to a mountain.
	Bat flapped up to a mountain further on.
	Then Bat flew up to West Mountain,
185	and then Cloud drifted up to another, further on.
	After that, Coyote saw Bat.
	“Well, now, Cousin,” he said,
	“It looks to me like you're running a race.
190	When you're racing with somebody,
	I'm not one to run along behind!”

	Then Coyote got to his feet
	and took o as fast as he possibly could.
	He ran, staring up at them.

	Meanwhile, Cloud drifted to another mountain,
195	and Bat flew to a mountain further on.

	Coyote ran as fast as he could,
	looking up at them all the time.
	Then he tumbled over into a rocky river canyon.

	Bat and Cloud hastened on,
200	but Coyote broke his neck and died.

	Cloud floated to a distant ridge
	while Bat flapped on to another mountain.
― 259 ―
	They went everywhere.
	They came to where the sun goes down.

205	But they turned back from that place.
	Bat was not left very far behind,
	and, after the race, he went back home and stayed there.

	Then, later on, he went somewhere to the south,
	and he came to the place where Ouzel was fishing with a net.
210	Ouzel was netting all kinds of animals,
	he was netting all kinds of creatures
	that came floating down the river into Nakam Valley.

	Then Bat went down to the river.
	When he had gotten to the great waterfall,
215	he tried to catch fish as they came to the top of the water,
	and he swooped and almost touched the water.
	Just then, he fell into the net.

Bat died.

	After he had killed Bat, Ouzel said:
220	“You'll never again be one of those people-killers.
	After you fly around in the dark,
	when morning comes, you'll stay in a hole in a hollow tree.
	You'll be just an animal.
	You'll not bother anyone.

225	That'll be the end of that,” said Ouzel.

― 260 ―

16. Creation

Eastern Pomo
1930

William Ralganal Benson, narrator

Jaime de Angulo, collector and translator

INTRODUCTION BY HERBERT W. LUTHIN

The work of recording this Eastern Pomo creation myth back in 1930 brought together two of the most remarkable figures in the annals of California oral literature: William Ralganal Benson, storyteller and artist extraordinaire, and Jaime de Angulo, a wild and charismatic linguist who became something of a cult figure in his own lifetime. Benson would have been sixty-eight when he told this myth, and de Angulo forty-three. In the latter's books on California Indian life and lore, Benson (or “Uncle William,” as Jaime and his wife, L. S. “Nancy” Freeland, called him) is the model for the character of Turtle Old Man. Because the two men, friends for nearly twenty years, are such important figures in the history of California folklore, I will briefly sketch their biographies before considering the myth itself.^[1]

― 261 ―

Benson was born in 1862 at Shaxai (now known as Buckingham Point) near the ancient town of Shabegok on the western shore of Clear Lake. It was, in de Angulo's words,

a pleasant region of small fertile valleys where wild roots and seeds once grew in abundance; where acorns, laurel nuts, buckeye chestnuts were once plentiful; where the streams were once well stocked with fish; where the hillsides were once covered with numerous bands of deer. The lake itself, surrounded by mountains, teemed with fish, and flocks of aquatic birds of all kinds were constantly flying by. (de Angulo 1976a:103)

Benson was fortunate enough to have lived his boyhood years during the last decade in which Eastern Pomo speakers enjoyed a more-or-less traditional lifestyle. By the 1870s, the social and environmental disruptions caused by a growing local Anglo-American population would make traditional life impossible, as the lifeways of local Indians became increasingly marginalized.

Benson himself was of mixed-blood descent. His mother, Gepigul (“Sally” to local whites), came from a line of hereditary leaders of the Kuhlanapo (Water Lily People) and Habenapo (Rock People) tribes. His father was Addison Benson, one of the first white settlers in the Kelseyville area—by all local accounts, an intelligent and open-minded man who got along well with his Indian neighbors.^[2] Indeed, Addison saw fit to learn the Eastern Pomo language of his wife's people, so despite his mixed heritage, William Benson still grew up in a household where Eastern Pomo was the language of choice. For this reason, Benson didn't really learn to speak English until later in his adult life. Something of a renaissance man, he even taught himself how to read and write.

Benson became not merely a tradition-bearer of his culture's arts and literature, but a master of them. Sally McLendon, who has worked on Eastern Pomo for many years and knew Nancy Freeland in Berkeley, tells me that everything Benson turned his hand to—basketry, regalia, storytelling—came out almost preternaturally ornate or beautiful: not just a mask, but a work of art; not just a basket, but the most beautiful basket you ever saw; not just a myth, but the most detailed and skillful version in the canon.

The Pomo were one of the very few California groups where baskets

― 262 ―

FIGURE 7. William Ralganal Benson, circa 1936. Courtesy Phoebe Apperson Hearst Museum of Anthropology and the Regents of the University of California.

were made by men as well as women. Benson was already a skilled basketmaker when he met and married Mary Knight, a Central Pomo speaker who was also expert in basketry. Together, they supported themselves by making and selling their baskets to collectors and museums—perhaps the first California Indians to make their living exclusively as artisans. They even had their own exhibit at the 1904 St. Louis World's Fair, jointly weaving a basket that won the fair's highest award. Baskets made by the Bensons may be found not only in California museums like the Lowie in

― 263 ―

Berkeley, but in the Smithsonian, the Field Museum in Chicago, and the National Museum of the American Indian in New York City.

An initiate into Eastern Pomo religion and ceremony, Benson, with his deep cultural knowledge and mixed-blood ancestry, was an ideal consultant for academic researchers—brilliant and informed, yet also familiar with the manners and expectations of the white world. Over the years, he worked and shared this knowledge (not without controversy) with a string of the most important figures in California linguistics and anthropology: Kroeber, de Angulo, Freeland, Loeb. He stands today as one of the most prolific and authoritative sources of information on the Northern California Indian world, particularly that of the Pomo.

William Benson died in 1937, at the age of seventy-five. Among the papers he left behind is a lengthy autobiography, written primarily in English, though with passages in Eastern Pomo. Sally McLendon is working on a scholarly edition and translation of this manuscript.

Jaime de Angulo

Cowboy in Colorado; failed silver miner in Honduras; medical student with a degree from Johns Hopkins; cattle rancher; army psychiatrist during World War I; novelist; gifted and largely self-taught linguistpsychologist-anthropologist-ethnomusicologist with a lifelong interest in the Indians of California—Jaime de Angulo was all these things and more. Born in Paris in 1887 of wealthy Spanish expatriate parents, de Angulo got fed up with his Jesuit schooling and came away to America at the age of eighteen, looking for adventure. He proved to have a talent for landing in the thick of things, like arriving in San Francisco in 1906 on the day of the great quake.

De Angulo had long been interested in anthropology, Jungian psychology, and linguistics, but it was through a mutual friend, Nancy Freeland, that he met Paul Radin and Alfred Kroeber at the University of California. (Freeland was then an anthropology student studying under Kroeber.) Kroeber quickly recognized his brilliance and—though the two men had an uneasy relationship throughout their careers (de Angulo's lifestyle was just too exuberantly bohemian for Kroeber's sense of propriety)—helped to get him established, inviting him to Berkeley to give lectures and, later, courses in anthropological psychology. (It was after his first such lecture, in 1919, that de Angulo met William

― 264 ―

Benson, who was working in Berkeley that semester as a consultant; they soon became collaborators and firm friends.) In the end, de Angulo was too much of a “wild man” to find or hold a position in academia. For all of that, or because of it, he left a lasting mark on California studies.

During the twenties and thirties, de Angulo, often together with Freeland (whom he married in 1923—his second marriage), did significant fieldwork on a variety of California and Mexican languages, including Achumawi, Atsugewi, Karuk, Shasta, Sierra Miwok, Eastern Pomo, Mixe, Chontal, and Zapotec. But it was Achumawi, the language of the Pit River Indians of Northeastern California, that occupied center place in his life and life's work. From his deep personal and professional involvement with the Achumawi came a grammar, numerous mythological texts, ethnomusicological studies, and what has come to be his bestknown book, Indians in Overalls.

Jaime de Angulo lived a colorful and in many ways tragic life—a life so rich and varied, so full of good times, hard work, and troubles, that I cannot even begin to portray it here. His work in linguistics and music alone (he was one of the pioneers of Native American ethnomusicology) would make him a seminal figure in California folklore and anthropology. But de Angulo was never merely an academic. He had the gift of a poet's ear, and used it to make books of translations and fictionalized retellings that far transcended other treatments of his day for the music, grace, and fidelity of the language, and for their wide-ranging accessibility and popular appeal.

As a writer, de Angulo managed to capture into English not just the contents of the texts he recorded, but something of their rhetorical style and, beyond that, of the worldview that informs them. It is a voice so distinctive as to be unmistakable among translators of Native American oral literature. Nowhere is this voice more evident than in his fictionalized settings of myths and tales jumbled together from his many field trips around California—in books like Indian Tales, How the World Was Made, and Shabegok (many of them ostensibly intended “for children”). It might be argued, perhaps, that de Angulo as much invented this voice in English as discovered it resident in the texts. There is something so easy-going, so engaging and seductive, about this voice that the dreary postmodernist inside us is all but incapacitated by its charm. In any case, he used this voice in his books and stories the way a musician uses his

― 265 ―

instrument, to convey what he perceived, from his long and intimate involvement with California Native peoples, as the key spirit—a kind of pragmatic joie de vivre—of California Indian life. He died in 1950, at the age of sixty-three.

Benson's Eastern Pomo “Creation”

This myth was first published in the Journal of American Folklore in 1935. De Angulo's commentary prefacing the text, which was presented first in Pomo and then followed by an English translation, was quite minimal. It is reproduced in near-entirety here:

The text of this Pomo tale of the creation is in the Clear Lake dialect [of Eastern Pomo] and was dictated by W. Ralganal Benson. The translation was undertaken primarily as a linguistic study. In the first part of the myth [¶1–17] therefore the original Indian text has been adhered to most closely, and practically a literal rendering is given. This will be of advantage to students of linguistics, but a detriment to the general reader and folklorist. The general reader is likely to be repelled by the awkward English, as a result of the too close following of Pomo idioms and style. On the other hand he may perhaps welcome the guarantee of accuracy. If he is curious to know how the Indian mind [read: Pomo mind] shapes its thoughts in language and style, here he will find it. As the work of translation proceeded, it was deemed unnecessary to render the original so literally. The student of linguistics would by this time be familiar enough with morphology and semantics to supply or delete a few words here and there, by comparing with the original text. In this latter part of the tale the general reader will find a rendering that gives in reality a truer equivalent of the original Indian style with its slightly Homeric flavor.

Though de Angulo much later published a fictionalized setting of this text in a still freer translation that smooths away the “literal rendering” of the opening seventeen paragraphs, I have chosen to present the more scholarly version of the myth here because of its closer adherence to the original text. For contrast, though, here's how de Angulo opens the telling of this myth in How the World Was Made (1976b:41):

After the Kuksu left they were quiet in the Ceremonial-house for a long time. Then Old Man Turtle commenced the long tale of “How the World
― 266 ―
Was Made.” He launched into it without any warning, as if he were just making an announcement of what had happened the day before.
Then Marumda pulled out four of his hairs. He held out the hairs, he held out the hairs to the east, he held out the hairs to the north, he held out the hairs to the west, he held out the hairs to the south. “Lead me to my brother,” Marumda said to the hairs.

Readers who make the comparison will understand both how the overly literal version submits to change and why the fictionalized version, though more consistent in tone, was not chosen for inclusion in this volume.

Belying its tight cyclical structure, Benson's “Creation” reveals a sweeping, almost panoramic vision. Within its five gyres there is a great wealth of detail, as well as the continuing slight novelty of complex and nonformulaic variation. The particularity lends immense texture to each patch or passage of narrative ground, while the variation imparts a through-momentum to the story that carries it forward rather than backward, so that ultimately it transcends its own circularity. The cumulative e ect of all this variation and detail is less déjà vu than daguerreotype: as in the development of a photographic plate the longer it is bathed in solution, with each pass at creation the image of the world fills in with richer and richer detail.

Though some plot elements exhibit less internal variation than others—for instance, the meetings between Marumda and the Kuksu are highly and ornately formulaic—variation is nevertheless the key to understanding the myth as a whole. Notice how each cycle of creation either involves di erent methods, focuses on di erent facets of culture and existence, or works at refining the establishments of the preceding creation.^[3] In some rounds of creation, people are made from sticks or other inanimate objects; in others, like the second, they are simply thought or willed into being. In some creations, such as the first, Marumda's instruction is limited to basic survival skills, like what foods to eat and how to prepare them; in others, such as the third and fourth, in addition to survival instruction, Marumda sets up key social and governmental institutions. In some, he explains to people the fate of the previous creation; in others he does not. In some, he partakes of food with his people; in others he does not. In some, he establishes a dance ceremonial; in some, he decrees the division of labor between the sexes; in some, there is comic relief, like the encounters with Squirrel and Skunk; and so on. Even when

― 267 ―

two creations seem to cover essentially the same ground, like the third and fourth, Benson manages to impart to them a wholly di erent feel—a subtle shift in mood or sensibility.

On another level, Benson's “Creation” may be heard as an extended and unabashed love song to Marumda, the Eastern Pomo Creator. One of the most extraordinary features of this myth is the sophisticated way in which the portrait of Marumda is developed across the successive cycles of the world's resurrections. It is not so much Marumda himself but our perception of him as a character or deity that matures so profoundly during the course of the myth. He is lovingly portrayed as a revered and (for a deity) oddly human figure—not through didactic narration, as a lesser storyteller might have done, but obliquely, by showing the increasing respect, a ection, and awe with which he is treated by the succession of peoples he creates and instructs. The belated discovery of generosity in the third creation (¶114–116), which is requited in the fourth (and codified culturally as the ideal of hospitality due a stranger), suggests something of this growth in stature and recognition. By the fourth and fifth creations, children are scolded for making fun of “the Old Man,” as well as for fearing him—the knowledge of who he is and what he has done being passed on as lore from generation to generation.

There is ever an air of mystery surrounding Marumda. He always seems to be wandering o once his work is done, never to be seen again, leaving his people, his creations, behind to express their wonder and gratitude. Marumda reaps this loving adulation despite his role as avenging angel. Nowhere is this essential duality of character more evident than in the aftermath of Marumda's destructions, where we find him going along, inspecting the newly scorched or scoured earth, simultaneously ascertaining that no survivors have escaped his destruction and expressing shock and grief at their extinction. This behavior may seem quixotic to modern readers, given that it is Marumda who calls down their destruction in the first place. It helps, then, to learn that Marumda is historically an anthropomorphic development of a still more ancient mythological figure, Coyote, known across the whole of the California culture area. Once that connection is made, the disparate points of Marumda's personality begin to cohere into a well-known constellation of traits, and we can recognize in Marumda a reflection of Coyote's complex trickster nature in California religious cosmology.^[4]

― 268 ―

This is a masterful narration, surely with its place in the canon of world literature. The comments I have made here are merely suggestive of a myriad avenues of inquiry into this myth.

ADDITIONAL NOTES

The Kuksu Religion

The Kuksu religion was, at least in historic times, restricted to a portion of North-Central California, involving in one form or another all the Pomo groups, as well as the Coast, Lake, and Plains Miwok, the Maidu, the Patwin, the Yuki, and several other groups distributed around the northern end of San Francisco Bay and up the Sacramento and San Joaquin Valleys. The Kuksu (based on the Eastern Pomo term kúksu) was a godlike spirit figure—the focus of secret societies, initiation rituals, curing ceremonies, and dance cycles where the Kuksu and other spirit figures would be impersonated by society members wearing sacred, highly elaborate costumes. For the space of time that these supernatural figures were brought to life through impersonation during the ceremonies, they “re-created sacred time and in one way or another restored their people to the unsullied state that had prevailed at the time of creation” (Bean and Vane 1978:665). The Kuksu religion (often amalgamated with elements of other, prior or parallel, belief systems) has likely been indigenous to the region for thousands of years, though other more recent religions, such as the post-Contact Bole Maru and Ghost Dance cults, have wholly or partially overwritten its territory in historic times.

Marumda and Kuksu

One characteristic of the Kuksu region is the belief in a true creation of the world, instigated by an anthropomorphic Creator. Unlike the Kuksu, whose name takes essentially the same form throughout the region, this creator figure goes by many di erent names, including K'ódoyapè (‘Earthmaker’) among the Maidu, {olelbes among the Wintu, Nagayo (‘Great Traveler’) among the Sinkyone, and Taikomal among

― 269 ―

the Yuki. In the present myth, this figure is Marumda (Ma·rúm'da). But Marumda and the Kuksu, who share in the planning of creation, have sharply di erent natures—one human-oriented and imperfect, caring but exacting; the other beyond human caring, and largely indi erent. The following passage of dialogue from How the World Was Made (de Angulo 1976b: 33–35), based on discussions between Benson and de Angulo, underscores this characterization. (The passage is long, but it happens to provide a prime example of the famous de Angulo “voice” discussed earlier. In the story, Tsimmu is a local boy, and Killeli is a young visitor from a more distant tribe. The character Coyote Old Man both is and is not supposed to be confused with the mythological Coyote.)

That evening they were all sitting around the fire. “Well, Tsimmu,” Coyote Old Man was saying, “tonight you will get to attend the Kuksu ceremony, and hear the full story of how the Kuksu made the world. …”
“Kuksu didn't make the world,” Turtle Old Man interrupted. “It was the Marumda who made the world. It happened like this. The Marumda went to see his elder brother, who was the Kuksu, and asked his advice about making the world. The Kuksu didn't care whether there was a world or not. He just sat in his cloud-house, and smoked his long pipe, and dreamed, and thought, and dreamed, and thought. Now he did give Marumda some wax … —but it was Marumda who went out and created the world.”
“All right, all right,” said Coyote. “Marumda made the world, but it was the Kuksu who first put the idea in his head.”
“Has anybody ever seen the Kuksu,” Tsimmu asked.
“Oh yes, from time to time,” Old Man Turtle replied. “At least some people say that you can sometimes find him in the woods, hiding behind a tree, or at noon-time, just sitting in a clearing on a rock. … That was probably the Kuksu we saw hanging from the tree the other night.”
“That was surely a frightening-looking figure,” Killeli said. “Is the Kuksu a killer, like the Giants and the Imps over in my country?”
“Oh, of course not,” Old Man Coyote said. “Why should he hurt anybody? The Kuksu doesn't care about people, one way or another. The Kuksu's no killer.”
“But, Grandfather, doesn't the Kuksu take care of the world?” Tsimmu asked.
“No, Child. The world pretty much takes care of itself. When it doesn't, well, that's Marumda's job. Then that Old Man is liable to come along,
― 270 ―
and kick the world to pieces, and make a new one. … That Old Man is always worrying about the People, about whether they are behaving properly or not. …”

Bob Callahan, summing up the situation in his notes to the Turtle Island edition of How the World Was Made, observes that “the central characters of Kuksu and Marumda in the myth seem to function as the left and right hands, or the sons, of the ancestral Coyote figure of California Indian mythology” (de Angulo 1976b:100).

Incest

“Behaving badly,” for Marumda and the Kuksu, means incest. Keep in mind that California's storied richness of habitat a orded high population density and a phenomenal linguistic-cultural diversity. Tribal units, correspondingly, tended to be demographically and territorially small, and the task of observing incest taboos and keeping bloodlines safely untangled was of no small moment. Exogamy was widely practiced (with bi-and even trilingualism a common consequence). It's an interesting subtheme that Marumda, dismayed that his creations keep “going wrong,” comes up with one back-to-the-drawing-board remedy after another. In the fifth creation (¶153–154), he decides to make discrete languages, perversely hoping that the ensuing unintelligibility might isolate people into incest-proof groups. (Though clearly reminiscent of the myth of Babel, notice how this motif has an entirely di erent motivation from the biblical version.) And earlier, in the fourth creation, he thinks to establish two communities (¶141), the incest bans presumably being too diffcult to uphold when there is but a single community. By the fifth and final creation, Marumda has strewn villages all over the place, thus maximizing the possibilities for exogamy, and the feeling is that this time people are finally going to be able to get it right.

Songs

Unfortunately, de Angulo did not record the numerous songs that embellished Benson's original narration. The reference to “archaic language” may indicate that the songs were in fact untranslatable, which might explain

― 271 ―

de Angulo's decision to remove them from the text. In any case, only their positions are noted in the myth.

Armpit Wax

I do not, nor does anyone else I've talked to, know what damá-xahwé ‘armpit wax’ really refers to. Clearly a potent mythological substance, its true nature remains a mystery. As in other creation myths, though, where the earth is formed from a dab of mud or sand or mist, the very insubstantiality of the original material serves to emphasize the awesome power of the beings who are able to make a world from such an unlikely substance.

Structure

Because the myth is so long, and because de Angulo was somewhat haphazard with his internal section-headings, here is a more detailed schematic of the text's major thematic movements:

PARAGRAPH	THEME
1–20	Meeting and Planning
21–33	Creation: The Making of the World
34–48	First Peopling of the World
49–57	First Destruction of the World (by Flood)
58–70	Second Peopling of the World
71–86	Second Destruction of the World (by Fire)
87–117	Third Peopling of the World
118–127	Third Destruction of the World (by Snow and Ice)
128–148	Fourth Peopling of the World
149–171	Fourth Destruction of the World (by Whirlwind)
172–239	Fifth and Final Peopling of the World
240–241	Narrator's Close

NOTE

1. Sources for the information contained in the following sketches include Gui de Angulo's “Afterword” to the City Lights edition of Jaime de Angulo's Indians in Overalls; Bob Callahan's “Notes” to the Turtle Island edition of Jaime

― 272 ―

de Angulo's How the World Was Made; Sally McLendon's “Pomo Baskets: The Legacy of William and Mary Benson”; Victor Golla's The Sapir-Kroeber Correspondence; and review articles by Paul Apodaca (“Completing the Circle,” a review of My Dear Miss Nicholson …: Letters and Myths by William Benson) and Victor Golla (“Review of The Old Coyote of Big Sur”).

2. According to Sally McLendon, “Benson grew up in a world that was not ‘wild’ but seems to have been an interesting bi-cultural world of a few, mostly male, white settlers and their ways of doing things and the native world which had its own very rich and patterned way of doing things. The balance of power only shifted during Benson's adolescence, I think, but his first 13 years seem to have been fairly idyllic: sheltered, loved, protected by both parents, and protected from white racism by the standing of his father” (personal communication).

3. Strictly speaking, there is but one “true” creation here—where the physical substance or framework of the world is created out of wax, and beings are created to dwell on it—and this takes place near the beginning of the myth (¶21–33). Subsequent creations are really more like “re-peoplings,” where Marumda adjusts local topography (a spring here, a mountain there) to create a suitable habitat, and then creates the community of people who will dwell in it.

4. In cognate and related myths among other California cultures, including the Pomo, the role of Marumda is sometimes played by Coyote. Indeed, Marumda (Eastern Pomo ma·rúm'da) is an esoteric name suggesting Coyote, most ancestral and important of all California mythological figures. As de Angulo notes, “Marumda alone, however, does not mean Coyote. Coyote in Lake Pomo, is gunula. Marumda is the name of the character in this myth. It may possibly be related to the adjective maru which has a series of very loose meanings, i.e., sacred, mysterious, traditional, dream omen, etc.” (1976b:100–101).

CREATION

This Is the Tradition of How
Marumda and Kuksu Made the World

1. He lived in the north, the Old Man, his name was Marumda. He lived in a cloud-house, a house that looked like snow, like ice. And he thought of making the world. “I will ask my older brother who lives in the south,” thus he said, the Old Man Marumda. “Wah! What shall I do?” thus he said. “Eh!” thus he said.

2. Then he pulled out four of his hairs. He held out the hairs. “Lead me to my brother!” thus he said, Marumda the Old Man. Then he held the hairs to the east; after that he held the hairs to the north; after that he held them to the west; after that he held them to the south, and he watched.

3. Then the hairs started to float around, they floated around, and floated toward the south, and left a streak of fire behind, they left a

― 274 ―

streak of fire, and following it floated the cloud-house, and Marumda rode in it.

4. He sat smoking. He quit smoking. And then he went to sleep. He was lying asleep, sleeping …, sleeping …, sleeping …, sleeping. … Then he awoke. He got up and put tobacco into his pipe. He smoked, and smoked, and smoked, and then he put the pipe back into the sack.

5. That was his first camp, they say, and then he lay down to sleep. Four times he lay down to sleep, and then he floated to his elder brother's house. His name was Kuksu. This Kuksu was the elder brother of Marumda.

6. The Kuksu, his was like a cloud, like snow, like ice his house. Around it they floated, four times they floated around it, the hairs, and then through a hole they floated into the house, and following them the Marumda entered the house.

7. “Around the east side!” said the Kuksu. Then around the east side he entered the house, and he sat down, he sat, and he took o the little sack hung around his neck. He took out his pipe and filled it with tobacco, he laid a coal on it, and he blew, he blew, and then he blew it afire. Then he removed the coal and put it back into his little sack. After that he smoked, four times he put the pipe to his mouth. After that he o ered it to his older brother the Kuksu.

8. Then Kuksu received it. “Hyoh!” he said, the Kuksu, “hyoh! Good will be our knowledge, good will end our speech! Hyoh! May it happen! Our knowledge will not be interfered with! May it happen! Our knowledge will go smoothly. May it happen! Our speech will not hesitate. May it happen! Our speech will stretch out well. The knowledge we have planned, the knowledge we have laid, it will succeed, it will go smoothly, our knowledge! Yoh ooo, hee ooo, hee ooo, hee ooo, hee ooo! May it happen!” thus he said, the Kuksu, and now he quit smoking

9. Then Marumda sat up, he sat up, and then they both stood up. They stood facing east, and then they stood facing north, and then they stood facing west, and then they stood facing south, and then they stood facing the zenith, and then they stood facing the nadir. And now they went around each other both ways, they went around each other four times back and forth. Then Marumda went to where he had been sitting

― 275 ―

before, and he sat down; and then Kuksu went to where he had been sitting before, and he sat down.

10. Then Marumda put tobacco into the pipe that he took out of his little dried-up sack. He felt in his little dried-up sack, he brought out some tobacco, and filled the pipe with it. Then he felt in his little driedup sack and brought out a coal, he put the coal on top of the tobacco, he put it on top and he blew, he blew, and blew it afire. Four times he drew, and then he o ered it to his brother Kuksu.

11. Four times he made as if to take it, and then he received it. Four times he drew, and then he o ered it back to Marumda. He received it, and put it back into his little dried-up sack. He blew out the smoke four times. First he blew it toward the south, then he blew it toward the east, then he blew it toward the north, then he blew it toward the west. Then he blew it to the zenith, then he blew it to the nadir.

12. Then turning to the left, Kuksu gave an oration: “Ooo!” thus he said, “it will be true, our knowledge!” Then Kuksu poked him with the pipe, and Marumda received the pipe, he received it and put it back in his little dried-up sack.

13. And then the Marumda scraped himself in the armpits, he scraped himself and got out some of the armpit wax. He gave the armpit wax to the Kuksu. Then Kuksu received it, he received it, and stuck it between his big toe and the next. And then he also scraped himself in the armpits, he scraped himself, and rolled the armpit wax into a ball. His own armpit wax he then stuck between Marumda's toes.

14. Then Marumda removed it and blew on it, four times he blew on it. Then Kuksu also removed the armpit wax and blew on it four times, and after that he sat down. Then Marumda went around the Kuksu four times, and then he sat down. And then the Kuksu he got up, he got up, and four times around the Marumda he went. Then they both stood still.

15. Now they mixed together their balls of armpit wax. And Kuksu mixed some of his hair with it. And then Marumda also mixed some of his hair with the armpit wax.

16. After that they stood up; facing south, and then facing east, and then facing north, and then facing west, and then facing the zenith, and

― 276 ―

then facing the nadir: “These words are to be right and thus everything will be. People are going to be according to this plan. There is going to be food according to this plan. There will be food from the water! There will be food from the land. There will be food from under the ground. There will be food from the air. There will be all kinds of food whereby the people will be healthy. These people will have good intentions. Their villages will be good. They will plan many things. They will be full of knowledge. There will be many of them on this earth, and their intentions will be good.

17. “We are going to make in the sky the traveling-fire. With it they will ripen their food. We are going to make that with which they will cook their food overnight. The traveling-fires in the sky, their name will be Sun. The one who is Fire, his name will be Daytime-Sun. The one who gives light in the night, her name will be Night-Sun. These words are right. This plan is sound. Everything according to this plan is going to be right!” thus he spoke, the Kuksu.

18. And now the Marumda made a speech. Holding the armpit wax, holding it to the south, he made a wish: “These words are right!” thus he said, the Marumda. And then he held it to the east, and then he held it to the north, and then he held it to the west, and then he held it to the zenith, and then he held it to the nadir: “According to this plan, people are going to be. There are going to be people on this earth. On this earth there will be plenty of food for the people! According to this plan there will be many di erent kinds of food for the people! Clover in plenty will grow, grain, acorns, nuts!” thus he spoke, the Marumda.

19. And then he blew tobacco smoke in the four directions. Then he turned around to the left, four times. Then he put the armpit wax into his little dried-up sack. After that he informed the Kuksu: “I guess I'll go back, now!” thus he said, and then he asked the Kuksu: “Sing your song, brother!” he said. And then the Kuksu sang: “Hoyá, hohá, yugínwe, hoyá [here comes a long SONG in archaic language] … ”

20. After that Marumda floated away to the north, singing the while a wishing song: “Hinaa ma hani ma [another SONG in archaic language] … ” Thus he sang, the Marumda.

21. With this song he traveled north, the Marumda, riding in his house,

― 277 ―

in his cloud-house. He was singing along, holding the armpit wax in his hand and singing the song. Then he tied a string to the ball of armpit wax, passed the string through his own ear-hole and made it fast. Then he went to sleep.

22. He was lying asleep, when suddenly the string jerked his ear. He sat up and looked around but he did not see anything, and he lay down again to sleep. It went on like that for eight days, it went on for eight days, and then it became the earth. The armpit wax grew large while Marumda was sound asleep, and the string jerked his ear. At last Marumda sat up, he sits up, and he untied the string from his ear-hole. Then he threw the earth out into space.

23. It was dark. “What shall I do about it?” said Marumda. “Oh! … I know,” and he took the pipe out of his little sack. He also brought out a coal, and applied it to the pipe. Then he blew on it, he blows, and set it afire. He sets it afire, and then he held the pipe to the south. Then he blew away the fire that was in the pipe. The fire traveled to the south, it grew large, and over the earth the sunshine spread.

24. Now Marumda walked around all over the earth. He walks around: “Here will be a mountain, here will be rocks, there will be clover, here will be a valley, there will be a lake, there will be crops, here will be a playground, there will be crops, here will be a clover flat, there will be a grain valley, on this mountain there will be acorns, on that one manzanita, juniper, cherries; on this mountain there will be potatoes, deer, hare, rabbits; on that mountain there will be bear, puma, cougar, fisher, coon, wolf, coyote, fox, skunk; on this mountain there will be rattlesnake, king-snake, gopher-snake, red-striped snake, mountain garter-snake, blue snake, big gopher-snake.”

25. Marumda then walked over the hill; on the other side it was dark; he sat down; there was no light. He went on. Up in the sky there was light. Then he rolled the earth over, it turned over, he pushed it over: “This is the way you will perform,” said the Marumda, “now it is dark, and now it is light, and now it is sunlight.” Thus now it performed.

26. Thereupon he went on: “Here will be a valley, and in it there will be many villages. Here will be a river with water in it wherein the fish will run.” Thereupon he went on and made a big pond, and then he

― 278 ―

said: “Here the fish will come; this will be a fish-bend, a food larder, this pond.” Thereupon he made a river: “This will be a roadway for the fishes,” thus he said, the Marumda.

27. And then he went on and made a mountain: “On this there will be sugar-pine.” And then he went on and made a pond: “Here there will be all kinds of fowl.” And then he went on and made a mountain of flint: “This will be for arrowheads and spearheads.” And then he went on and made a mountain of drill flint. After that he went on and made a spring and on either side he put sedges, rushes, redbud bushes: “This will be for the women to weave their baskets; dogwood, white willow, black willow, wherewith to weave.” And then he went on and made wild nutmeg: “This will be bow-wood.” After that he made another kind of dogwood: “This will be arrow-wood, mountain bitterweed.”

28. After this Marumda went on the other way, he went on and on, and then he thought of making Big Mountain. He makes it, and on each side he made a large river: “This will be for the fish to come out to the lake.” Thereupon he went on and made a wide valley: “Here will be all kinds of crops,” thus he said, the Marumda.

29. And now he arrived at the lake, and going along the shore he made rocks, he makes them, and: “This will be a playground for the waterbears.” Thereupon he went on and made a sand-flat, and then: “This will be a playground for people.” Thereafter he went on and made a mountain: “Here people will not come! Men! Never approach this place!” thus he said, the Marumda.

30. Thus he was going along by the shore, and he found a river barring his way: “Wah!” he said, “what am I going to do?” he said standing on the shore. “Eh!” he said, and laying his walking-cane across he passed over to the other side. “Eh!” he said, “that was the way to do it, there was nothing else to do!”

31. Thus he walked along the shore making rocks, making sand-flats; thus he went around the lake, performing like that. Now he went back inland, and facing the lake he sat on a log. The water was calm: “Water! You will not be like that!” thus he called to the water. Then he went to the water and he splashed it toward the land: “This is the way you will behave!” he told her. Then the wind blew and the water became rough,

― 279 ―

it becomes rough, and ran in waves over the shore, it ran in waves over the rocks: “Hyoh! Good! That's the way you will do!” thus he said. “Hyoh! Now I will go across,” he said.

32. “Wah! What am I going to do? How am I going to go across? Wah!” he said. “Eh! that oak over there … ” and going to a tree standing there he picked up from the ground an acorn shell, he took it to the shore and laid it by the side of the water. The water made waves and thereby the shell was pushed into the water. It floated, it grew large, it grew larger, it floated toward the shore and became a boat. “Hyoh! That's a good boat for us!” thus he said.

33. He felt around in his little dried-up sack and took out his pipe; he filled it with tobacco; he laid the coal on top; he blew on it; he blew it afire; then he blew smoke in the four directions and a thick fog arose. He put the pipe back in his little sack and hung the sack around his neck, then he sat down in the boat and shoved o. It started to float away, it floated way o toward the center of the lake; then he whirled his cane in the air and that boat started to race, it went like a bird, and in no time at all it went across.

34. He sat down by the side of the water and he looked about, and then he thought to experiment at making people. “Wah! What shall I make people with?” he said. “Eh!” he said, and he picked up rocks: “These will be people!” These rocks became people. They spoke a language. They were short-legged, these rock-people. These rock-people lived in the mountains only. They did not walk about in the valleys.

35. Then he experimented making other kinds of people. The rockpeople were mean, that's why he experimented making other people. He made people out of hair. These people were long-haired; the hair came down to their feet. They found the Old Man Marumda and came up to him: “What are you doing, Old Man?” they said. “I am eating food,” he answered. He was eating clover. He also dug potatoes out of the ground, and ate them. Then the long-haired people took an object lesson and they also ate. “This is your food,” said the Marumda, and then he went away.

36. Sitting down on a hill he looked back. After a while he went over to where there was a valley. And now the idea came to him to make another kind of people. He felt inside his little dried-up sack and brought

― 280 ―

out some feathers. He split them, he splits them, and he broke them into small pieces. These he scattered over the plain.

37. “These will grow into people!” he said, and he sat down with his back to the valley. Then people also came to life and they too came to the Old Man and asked him: “Where do you come from?” These people were covered all over with feathers, like birds. “What are you doing?” “I am eating,” he answered. Then they also took an object lesson and started to eat. “Thus you will eat! This is your food!” he said, and then he went away.

38. Then he experimented making more people. This time he went over to another mountain and he experimented making people out of wood. He gathered small sticks, he split them, and scooping out little hollows here and there, he planted them in [the ground]. “These will be people!” he said. Then he went o and turning his back to them he sat down. Soon he could hear them talking among themselves: “There is an old man sitting over there,” they said.

39. They came over to him: “What are you doing, Old Man?” “I am eating,” he answered. Then they also took a lesson and started to eat. “This is the food that you will eat! I made it for you!” said the Marumda. Then he departed and went around another mountain.

40. “Wah! This also looks like a good place for people.” He pulled four hairs from his arm and scattered them over the plain, here and there, all over. Then he sat down on a knoll and listened. In no time they also turned into people. “Where do you come from?” they asked one another. The nearest one to the Old Man said: “There is a man sitting over there too,” and they came up to him.

41. “And you, where do you come from?” they said. “Oh! I came from a distance,” he answered. “Are there any other people?” they asked. “Yes, there are other people far away from here. You'll find them after a while.” These people were hairy and cloven-hoofed, and they had horns. They were the deer-people. He didn't like their looks. “Eh! Over there I will make another kind of people,” he said, and went o.

42. Then he went on, northward, and in the hills, in a little hollow he sat down: “And now I will make other people again,” he said, the Marumda. And feeling in his little dried-up sack he brought out some sinew. This sinew he broke into little pieces, he breaks them, and then

― 281 ―

he scattered them about over the hollow. “These will be people!” he said.

43. Then he sat down with his back to it. In no time they became people. Then the Old Man stood up: “Come over here,” he said. Then the people came over to him. “This is your land where you will live,” thus he said. These people were like ourselves; they had no hair, no feathers on their bodies, they were all slick. “Here you will eat your food! There is plenty of food on the ground over there; eat it!” thus he said, and he went away.

44. After this he went over to a hillock. There he took some hair out of his little dried-up sack, and this he scattered over the hill. Then he sat with his back to it and in no time they were people talking among themselves. Then he looked. They were big, hairy people, walking about. These were the bear-people; they had long claws.

45. And now he went over to them: “Here you will eat this kind of food,” he said, and plucking some clover he ate it. Then these people they also imitated him and ate. Then he dug up some potatoes. “These also you will eat,” he said. “Oo! That's good! And are there any other people around?” they asked. “Yes! There are going to be lots of people!” Marumda answered.

46. After this he experimented making still another kind of people: “Wah! What shall I make them of now?” he said. He went to a big valley toward where the sun rises. Here he made people out of flint. These people were the Gilak people. He made this people on the mountain where there are nothing but rocks.

47. These people were like birds flying in the sky. They used to swoop down on people. They had not been taught to do that way. They were mean people.

48. All these were the first people that the Marumda made.

DESTRUCTION OF THE FIRST WORLD

49. Then he went north to his abode. Time passed, time passed, time passed, time passed, and then Marumda saw in a dream that the people were behaving badly. So he decided to go to his elder brother. Then the

― 282 ―

cloud-house started to float. Eight days it floated, the cloud-house, and then it reached the Kuksu's house.

50. Four times he floated around it, and then he knocked at the door. Then the Kuksu opened the door and Marumda went in. Then the Kuksu said: “What is it, younger brother?” thus he said, the Kuksu.

51. Then Marumda said: “Oo! It's all wrong! That's why I have come to consult you. The people that we made are behaving wrongly. They are intermarrying, they are turning into idiots, and their children grow puny. Therefore I will wash them away!” thus he said, the Marumda.

52. Then Kuksu spoke: “Wah! It's all wrong! We never taught them to do this!” Then Marumda spoke: “Our people have become like birds, they have become like deer! They sleep with their own children. This is too bad! Therefore I am going to wash them away!”

53. Then Kuksu: “Oo! That is right! They did not believe our wisdom! Well, you know what you must do!” thus he spoke, the Kuksu. Then Marumda filled his pipe, lit it, and o ered it to Kuksu. Kuksu then smoked, he smokes, and he blew the smoke in the four directions. Then he returned the pipe to Marumda. Then Marumda he too smoked to the four directions.

54. Then in no time the skies clouded up, the thunder spoke, and rain began to fall. For four days it rained; it became a flood. Marumda himself was running around among the rocks. Finally he ran for refuge to the top of a mountain peak.

55. But the people followed him there. Then Marumda called for help to his grandmother: “Grandma! Grandma! Quick!” thus he cried running back and forth among the rocks. Then a spiderweb basket floated down to him from the sky, Marumda got in it, and with it he floated away, he floated up to the sky.

56. “Ride and don't look around!” said Old Lady Spider, “or you will fall … !” but as she said the words he looked down and out he fell. He falls, but already the Old Lady Spider she had thrown out her net, she caught him, she pulled him up, she pulls him up, and to the Kuksu's house she carried him.

57. She carried him, she carried him up to the door, and Marumda

― 283 ―

went in. “Oo!” cried Kuksu, “how did it go? Did you wash them away?” “Yes!” said Marumda. “Oo! That was right!” said the Kuksu. “Now we will make a di erent kind of people.”

58. Now Marumda called his grandmother again, and she sent the basket floating down to him. He got in and floated away. It floated for four days and landed on top of a mountain peak. “Here! Get o !” said Old Lady Spider.

59. Then Marumda got o and looked around the world, he wandered about. Then he gathered some sticks of wood and built a fire. Then he went o to look for people. But he couldn't find a single one. Then he called. Not a single person came out.

60. “Wah!” said the Marumda, “what am I going to do? Eh! On this mountain there will be people!” and he called: “Wulu! Wulu!” … But there did not remain a single person to come out.

61. Four times he called, then he went o toward the lake. He walked along the shore, he sat down, and looked around. “Here there will be a large village!” he said. Then he went on, he goes on, and again he returned, and once more he looked around.

62. Where a while ago there had been nobody now a big village existed. There were many people along the shore of the lake. Here goes the Chief-Woman. Boys, children, are playing along the shore. They are chasing one another playing tag. They play tag in the water.

63. Marumda stood watching the village he had made. “Hyoh! They will be good people. They will be healthy. Their village will be healthy. They will be kindly in their manners.” Thus he spoke, and he went on.

64. He walked, he walked, he walked. “Eh!” he said, “here there will be a big mountain jutting out into the lake.” Then the mountain arose. Then he went on. “Here there will be a valley. In this valley there will be a village and a dance house. In the dance house they will perform their dances, they will enjoy their dances, the boys, the girls, the women, the children, the old people!” Thus he spoke, and then he went away.

65. He goes on, he went on, and then he stood. “Here there will be a hillock!” Thus he spoke, and a hillock arose. Then he stood on the top, he stands, and he looked to where he had wished a village to be. And

― 284 ―

now they came out, the boys, the girls, the men, the children, the women, they ran to bathe in the lake. They ran hither and yon along the shore, chasing one another. Out of the dance house they swarmed, the many people, the people whom he had wished into existence.

66. The Marumda sat on the ground. He unslung his little dried-up sack from around his neck, out of it he pulled his pipe, he put in a coal, on top of it he placed the tobacco, on top of that he placed another coal, he blew on it, he blew it afire, he smokes, he smoked and blew the smoke toward the village.

67. Then a fog arose and a drizzling rain began to fall. Then the people started to run toward the house. The older boys are telling the younger boys to run into the dance house. Thereupon the grown-up men started building individual houses out of dogwood. They set them all around the dance house. The houses of that village were so closely set together that a man could hardly walk between them.

68. Then the Marumda quit smoking, and he made a speech to call the people: “Gather for the dance! Gather for the dance!” he called. Then the people went into the dance house, they all went into the dance house. And then the Marumda went to the mountain he had just made. He stood on the top and listened. Soon after they began the ceremony.

69. Then he told the people of the village on the other side of the hill: “Over here they are dancing. Watch it. Come and watch it!” Then the boys, the girls, they came running, they came running over the hill. They ran to the door of the dance house and they peeped in.

70. Then Marumda made a speech. “‘Come this way!’ thus you must say when a visitor approaches. Claim him as a friend. ‘Sit down here!’ say to your friend. ‘You are my relative! These are your people! Therefore you and I must dance together.’” Thus he spoke, the Marumda, and then he went away.

SECOND DESTRUCTION OF THE WORLD—BY FIRE

71. Time passed, time passed, time passed, time passed, and then the people began again their incestuous ways. And Marumda knew by a

― 285 ―

dream that his people were doing wrong. “Wah! That's not the way I taught them to do! I will go and consult my elder brother about this!” Thus he said, and then the cloud-house floated south.

72. Eight days it floated, and then it arrived at the Kuksu's place. Four times it floated around the Kuksu's house. And then it floated to the door on the south side. Then Marumda knocked with his cane.

73. “Ooo!” called the Kuksu, and Marumda also called: “Ooo! Here I have come.” “All right! Come in on the east side,” said the Kuksu. Then Marumda sat down on the east side. Without saying anything he took his pipe out of his little dried-up sack; he placed a coal in it; on top of that he put tobacco; and on top of that he placed a coal. Then he blew on it, he blew it afire. He smoked four times and then he o ered it to the Kuksu.

74. Four times he feigned to take it, then he accepted it, he accepts it, and with the pipe in his hand he went back to his seat. “Hyoh! Sumee!” he cried, “what's the matter? What's happened now? The people are doing wrong! Oo! You must tell me the truth!” Thus he spoke to the pipe before smoking.

75. Now he smoked, he smokes four times, and he gave the pipe back to Marumda. “They are doing wrong!” said the Marumda. “The people that we made, they are not obeying our teachings. They have started again their incestuous ways. That's all wrong! Therefore I will destroy them! This is what I have come to consult you about.” Then the Kuksu answered: “Ooo! All right! Later on you will make more people!”

76. “Oh! I'll go back and I'll cook them!” “All right! That's fine!” said the Kuksu. “Right now you are going to do it!” “I am going back over there and I'll burn them with fire!” “Oh! that's good! Oh! that's fine! Go! Go!”

77. Then Marumda replaced his pipe in the little dried-up sack, he hung the sack around his neck, and he went away, he went away riding in his cloud-house. He went away, and the cloud roared like thunder as he went back north to his place.

78. After this he went west. Then he went south. Then he went east, he went east to where the sun rises. That was where the Fire-Man lived.

― 286 ―

“You must burn the world!” Marumda told him. “Why should I burn the world?” he replied. “Eh! The people we made on the earth are behaving badly! They are incestuous with their own children! They are wrong! They are acting like animals! Therefore I will burn them!” Thus spoke the Marumda.

79. The Fire-Man was still refusing, saying: “And then, where will I live?” “Never mind! You are going to burn the world! You will start the fire from here. You need have no fear about starting the fire. I will not let it burn your house here!” said Marumda. “When shall I start this fire, then?” said the Fire-Man. “Right now you start the fire!” said the Marumda.

80. Then he took down his fire-bow, he took down his fire-arrows, and he went out. He goes out, and he shot to the north. Then he shot to the west, then he shot to the south, then he shot to the zenith. In the north where he had shot the fire commenced blazing, then in the west where he had shot the fire commenced blazing, then in the south where he had shot the fire commenced blazing, then from the sky where he had shot the fire came blazing down toward his house.

81. He was running around pouring water everywhere around his house. Marumda was crying: “That will not burn!” Then the fire spread in the west. Marumda was running around in his excitement. He ran up the mountain crying: “Grandmother! Grandmother! The fire is raging!” Then, just as the fire was reaching him, his grandmother floated her basket down to him.

82. Marumda dropped in it, and it started to float toward the sky. Then the people arrived down below at that spot after his grandmother had started to pull him up, and they cried to him: “Save us also!” “What can I do? We are all finished now!” he cried back.

83. Then he said to his grandmother: “Take me over there to my older brother's place.” Then the Old Lady Spider took him to the Kuksu's house. Four times she floated him around, and then she floated him down.

84. Then he went up to the door. “The people are finished!” he said. “Oh!” said the Kuksu. “The fire spread all over the earth and cooked them!” said Marumda. “Oh! Now you will make a di erent kind of people!” answered the Kuksu.

― 287 ―

85. Then he went back and made his grandmother take him to the Fire-Man. She carried him east to the Fire-Man's house, and when she got him there, “Get out now!” she said, and Marumda got out.

86. Then he found the Fire-Man. “Why! I thought all the people were finished,” said the Fire-Man, “how is it that there is somebody left yet?” Marumda came up to him: “Yes indeed! All the people are finished everywhere in the north, everywhere in the west, everywhere in the south, the people have all been cooked!” “Well then, how do you happen to be saved?” “I had my grandmother carry me o, that's how I got saved.” “Oh! Are there going to be any more people? Will more people come out somewhere now?” “Yes! You will see many people tomorrow in that valley close by.” Thus he said, and he went o north to where there was a big valley.

THIRD CREATION

87. He went along the valley and built a fire. By the side of a river he dug a hole. Then he went o, and breaking o some willow wands he brought them back and planted them around the hole. It was evening.

88. To one of the sticks he tied a string. He passed the other end through his ear-hole and made it fast. Then he lay down with his back to the fire. He went to sleep, and while he slept the string jerked his ear. He sat up quickly.

89. He looked toward where he had planted the sticks, but there was nothing. Then he lay down again, he lies down, and he went to sleep. As he lay, the string jerked his ear. He sat up quickly. He looked toward where he had planted the sticks, but there was nothing. “Wah! Why is it that what I had in mind does not become true?”

90. He lay down again: “Wah! Something has got to happen!” thus he said and went back to sleep. While he was sleeping the string jerked his ear. He sat up quickly. He peered toward where he had planted the sticks: nothing whatever! Then he untied the string from his ear-hole, and going over to where he had planted the sticks he examined them. Some of them had fallen down. “I thought so!” said Marumda, and he planted them again.

― 288 ―

91. Then he went back to his sleeping place, and passing again the string through his ear-hole he made it fast. Then he went to sleep. He was sound asleep when it jerked. This time he did not sit up. Then the string jerked and pulled him up.

92. Then he sat up and peered. It was dawn. He thought he could see people moving about. He rubbed his eyes and looked again. It looked like people moving about. Then he said: “Hm! I had better go.” He went there.

93. It was little boys playing outside. The little boys saw him: “Somebody over there, coming this way!” they cried and ran into the house to tell the people inside. “Over there some man was coming this way!” they said.

94. Then the people went out also. “It's an old man!” they cried. “Who can that old man be, limping along, leaning on his cane?” He came, he came to the house, he sat near the entrance.

95. “Where do you come from?” one of the people asked him. “I have come a long ways. I camped over there last night. I have come to teach you something. That's what I have come here for, to teach you. The people who lived here before, they did wrong, and they are no more. That's why I have come: to teach you not to be that way.”

96. Thus he said, and then he picked out four men: “These men will take care of you. What I am teaching you, you must not forget!” Then he led out the four men and stood them apart. He stood in front of them and spoke: “These four men will guard the law for you, they are your chief's lieutenants.” He turned around and pointing to the foremost one: “This one is your Head-Chief. If you behave like the people before you, you also will be destroyed! Therefore, be good people! Keep the law! Do not commit incest! The people before you did it, and they were destroyed; therefore don't do likewise!”

97. Thus he spoke, and then he went o and brought back some straight sticks. One large stick he split, and in a trice he had made a bow out of it. Then he peeled the smaller sticks and made arrows. Then he went and brought back some flint. He warmed it in his mouth and chipped it and made arrowheads.

98. Then he felt inside his little dried-up sack and brought out some

― 289 ―

sinew, and he rolled it into a string, a bowstring. Then he felt again, and bringing out some feathers he split them in two. Then in a trice he lashed the arrowheads to the arrows and tied the feathers.

99. Then he strung the bow. “That deer over there standing … shoot it!” The men looked at one another. Then the Old Man called a fellow who was standing behind the others: “Come over here! You have good strong arms … Try this bow!” The man came out and he gave him the bow. Taking the bow he stood looking at it: “What shall I do with it?” he said. “That deer standing over there … try it on him!” and he gave the man an arrow. Then: “Where is he standing?” “There … he is standing behind the bush … Go out toward that tree and then shoot!”

100. Then he went out and the Old Man accompanied him singing the deer-song while the rest of the people watched them. The deer was standing in a waiting attitude. Then the man went out toward the tree, then he shot and knocked him over dead.

101. Then the man who had shot the deer motioned toward the people, and two men came out, they loaded the deer on their backs and deposited him at the door of the house, but they did not know what to do further.

102. Then the Old Man came up, and taking out a piece of flint he skinned him right there and then: “This is the way!” he said. Then calling the man who had shot the deer: “Watch and learn!” he said, and he handed him the flint: “That's the way to skin. You will hunt deer for this village!” Thus he said.

103. After this he led the women to a spring to dig roots [for basketweaving]. He took out the roots, peeled them, split them, and spread them out on the ground. Then he brought out some willow shoots, split them, and commenced a basket. When he was starting to weave the upright part he called one of the women.

104. “This is what you women will do!” he said, and he gave the basket he had commenced to the woman he had called. That woman started weaving right away. Then the others they too started digging for roots, peeling them and drying them in the sun by the side of the willow shoots they had gathered.

105. Then Marumda built another basket and gave it to the same

― 290 ―

woman. This was a pounding-basket. Then he went o and picking up a rock, in a trice he made a pestle out of it. Then he picked up a flat slab and brought it to the woman. “These are your tools for preparing food,” he said, and then he went o toward the hills.

106. He looked for a spot where acorns had drifted in a pocket in the creek. “These you will gather, and with them you will make mush!” Then they commenced picking up acorns. They spread them on a rock and cracked them the way he taught them, and in no time they dried them. Then they took them home and commenced grinding them and took the meal out to the water.

107. Then Marumda went with the women. He dug a hole in the shape of a hopper and filled it with sand which he patted down, and over this he poured the meal. Then he brought some water and poured it over the meal. “This is how you must do to make it sweet!” thus he taught the women. Then the women they also dug pits in the ground and poured in the meal. They did as he had taught them.

108. Now the Old Man went back to the house with some willow wands and sat down at the entrance. Then he started a basket, a long fish-trap it was, and in no time he finished it. Then he made a little hoop, he wove it into a trap-inset, and when it was finished he set it in the mouth of the basket and braided it in.

109. The people were watching him. “Have you learned?” said the Old Man. “Yes!” they answered. Now he led them to the riverbank. He cut some fence palings, took them into the water, and stuck them into the bottom. The men were watching him. “This is the way to do it!” he said. The trapdoor that he had made, he blocked it on the sides. Then he took the basket-trap into the water and set it facing downstream, and he made it fast with long poles driven into the bottom.

110. He went ashore and after a while he looked back. “It's already filled with fish!” he cried, and: “Bring the trap ashore!” he cried. Then the young men waded into the water and they brought the fish-trap ashore. It was full of fish. They could hardly bring it ashore. Then more young men helped, and they rolled it ashore, and they poured out the fish.

111. Other men commenced weaving pack-baskets. They did it the

― 291 ―

way the Old Man showed them. Now they put down their pack-baskets all around the pile of fish. Then the chief divided the fish. Meantime other men had placed the fish-trap back into the water and returned.

112. They carried the fish home. They built big fires. The women now leached the acorn-meal. They brought rocks, cooking-rocks, to the fire. They mixed the meal with water in a cooking-basket, and when the rocks were hot they threw them in. And in no time the mush was cooked.

113. Other women brought their mush-baskets to the fire and filled them with mush. And now they ate the fish they had cooked with the mush they had put on the fire. Meantime in another place they were eating the cooked venison.

114. They had forgotten that the Old Man also might be fond of food. Then the chief said: “O er food also to the Old Man! Invite him to eat! Give him some fish, give him some venison!” One of the men who had brought the fish-trap ashore then said: “Maybe he is still over there in the creek … I'll go and see!” He went o toward the water but did not find him. Then he searched around, but he could not find him. Then he went back to the beach: “I can't find him!” he cried.

115. Then the boys quit eating: “We will all look for the Old Man!” they said. Along the river, in the brush, they searched for him. But they could not find him. “He may have gone o somewhere!” they said, and they returned home.

116. They returned home feeling badly. The chief harangued them: “That Old Man who went around teaching us, he is the one who made us. He was teaching us things that we did not know. In the same way he must have gone somewhere else to teach. He must have left us to teach other people somewhere else.” Thus spoke the chief.

117. After a while the Marumda went back to his place in the north.

THE DESTRUCTION OF THE WORLD—
BY SNOW AND ICE

118. The time passed, the time passed, the time passed, the time passed, and then Marumda saw in a dream that the people he had made were

― 292 ―

acting badly. “Wah! What's the matter with the world?” he said, and he lay down.

119. He took his pipe out of his little dried-up sack, he put tobacco in, he placed a coal on top, he blew on it, he blew it afire. He took the coal and put it back in the sack, and then he pu ed smoke. “Yoh! Sumee!” he cried, “may this smoke spread like a cloud over the earth!” and then he quit smoking. “I will ask my elder brother why these people that I made are behaving badly.” Thus he said, and he went to see the Kuksu.

120. He traveled for eight days, and then he got there. Four times each way he went around the Kuksu's house, and then he knocked at the door. “Ooo … !” he cried from inside, “Ooo … ! Come in on the east side! Come in on the east side!” thus spoke the Kuksu.

121. Marumda went in on the east side, and sat down in silence. He felt in his little dried-up sack and brought out his pipe. He filled it with tobacco and placed a coal on top. He blew on it, blew it afire, took the coal and put it back in the sack.

122. Then he smoked. Four times he drew, then: “Here, brother, take it!” The Kuksu made a motion four times as if to take it, then he accepted it, and said, “Yoo! Sumee! What's the matter with the world? They ought to be good, but they are acting wrongly! You made them and they ought to behave according to your plan! They are your people, therefore do as you like with them!”

123. Then he smoked. Four times he drew, and then he gave the pipe back to Marumda. Marumda said: “Oh! You have spoken well! You knew! You knew that the people I had made were behaving badly! Now I am going to destroy them with snow and with ice!” “All right,” said Kuksu, “you may well destroy them. After a while you will try another kind.” “Oh! That is why I came here: to get your approval. And now I will go back, and then I will make it snow!” And right away he left.

124. Then the cloud-house floated back to the north. It floated over above the earth, and the thunder roared in the north. After that snow and hail fell, and in no time the snow mantled the earth. The people were snowed in. Time passed. The people were exhausted from cold and starvation. Time passed. Marumda never looked back. He went on north.

― 293 ―

125. After a while he dreamed that all the people were dead on the earth. “Wah!” he said, “I'll go and see if they are all exterminated … ” and he went south. He went to the place where he had first made people and he looked around. There was no one; only birds walking around.

126. “Where are the people?” he asked the birds. The Thrasher answered: “All the people have been destroyed.” The Meadowlark also put in a word: “Yówal quhlíbi'its, down they skipped!” he said, the Meadowlark.

127. Then Marumda walked around. “Ooo!” he said, “there will be people here again!”

FOURTH RE-CREATION OF THE WORLD

128. He walked around the valley. By the side of a mountain he made a spring. Then a little ways from there he dug a hole. Then he planted sticks around it. Then he went away from the spring. Then he built a fire, and with his back to it he lay down to sleep. Then he wished: “Over there where I wished it to be, people will be!” and then he lay down to sleep.

129. Just before dawn he woke up. He lifted his head quickly. It sounded to him like people talking. He held his head up and listened, but he could not hear anything. Then he lay down again and went sound asleep. While he was sound asleep some little boys came upon him. “Here is an old man lying asleep,” said the little boys.

130. Then the Old Man woke up: “Is that you, little boys?” Then the little boys asked him: “Where do you come from?” “I camped a long way from here. Are there any people around here?” “Yes indeed! Over there there are lots of people!” “Lead me over there!” he said, and then the little boys they lifted him up, they pushed him up, and they pulled him up.

131. Then they led him to the people. The people gathered in front of the entrance to the dance house. “Over there the little boys are leading an old man … Where did they find him?” they were wondering. They led the old man to where the men were gathered. “Where did you find

― 294 ―

that old man?” “Over there on the hillside he was lying down,” the boys answered.

132. Marumda sat down by the entrance. “Men! Gather here!” he called. Then he sat up and walking among the people he took one of them by the hand and led him aside. “Stand here!” he said to him. “Let me teach you! You will be the Head-Chief of these people. You will teach them. You will make plans for them. You will harangue them. You will take care of them. This is your village. And they in turn will take care of you!” Thus he spoke.

133. And now, going again amid the crowd, he took one of the men by the arm. “Come!” he said, “and you also stand here!” And then he went back and took another man by the hand, and he led him to the side of the first one. “Stand here!” he said. And then he went back, and taking another one by the hand he led him to the side of the second one. “Stand here!” he said.

134. “You will be the Lieutenant-Chiefs of all these people! You will take care of them. You will teach them as children. You will take care of this village. Over there on yonder mountain there is deer. In that water over there, there is fish. Over there on that hill there are acorns; there are bay-nuts also; you will eat those. Over there on the lake there are birds; you will eat those. All this is your food.” Thus spoke the Marumda.

135. After a while he went and got some milkweed. He laid it down by the fire, and when it was dry he cracked it with his teeth and scraped it. In no time he had rolled the milkweed into a string: “This is the way you must do.” He whittled a stick and made it into a mesh-stick, then he made a shuttle out of another stick, and he wound the string on it. After that he tied the string to one end of another piece of wood and strung it in the shape of a bow. On this he commenced a net, and in no time he had it finished.

136. Then he went into the brush, broke o two straight sticks, and came back with them. One was for the cross-bow of the net. The other one was for the long handle. And now he led the people to the river. He took the net into the water. And the young men also helped to hold the net in the water. “Now, now! Splash the water!” he said. Then the young men splashed the water. Then the fish went into the net and filled it.

― 295 ―

137. Then he called the young men. They ran to him. They took hold of the net and pulled it shoreward. All kinds of fish. The people who had remained on the bank were watching. Then: “Build a fire! Build a fire!” cried the Marumda.

138. Then they built a big fire. First they laid the fish on the fire. The very first batch they had pulled ashore, once it was cooked, was enough to supply the whole village. They did not know what to do with it. It stood in a pile by the side of the fire like a mountain.

139. Then the Old Man took some of the fish, he laid them on the ground, split them open while the people gathered around him, watching. The Old Man ate the fish, he ate it all up. Then: “That's the way to eat!” he said to them.

140. Then he acted as if he were going out for just a little way. But it was to be forever. After that they never saw him again.

141. After that he went over the hill to where there was a big valley, and he walked around. “Here also there will be a village,” he said. He brought some willow wands to the center of the valley, and dug a small hole. He planted the wands around the hole and then he went away.

142. He stood a little way o and he made a wish: “Over there, there will be a dance house! In this dance house there will be people!” Thus he spoke and then he went away. He went away and built a fire on a hillside. He lay down to sleep by the side of the fire. He slept all night.

143. At sunrise the people came pouring out of the house, boys, young men, young women, grown-up men, women, they swarmed out. One of them saw the fire. “Over there … a fire!” he cried. Some of the boys ran over there. “Hey! Here is an old man lying down!” they cried. Thus they said and they ran back.

144. They told the grown-up people. Then the grown-up people, they went there. They went. “Why are you lying here?” they asked. Then the Old Man turned over on his side. “Is it you my people?” he asked. “Yes!” they answered. “Come over there and teach us!” they said, and they pulled him up.

145. Then they led him up, they continued to lead him, they led him toward the dance house, they led him into the house. They made him

― 296 ―

sit down in front of the center-post. “May you live happily! May the food grow in this valley for you! On that mountain over there, there will be acorns for you, bay-nuts, manzanita, for you to eat, for you to store away. When your friends come, you will eat together. There are going to be many people like this. They may come to visit you from afar. When they come you must greet them thus: “In that river down there there is fish. Eat it! It is food for you. Over on that mountain there are deer. Hunt them! It is food for you. In that pond yonder there are birds. Eat them! They are food for you.

146. “You will build houses in which to dwell. This house will be a dance house in which to perform your ceremonies. Over there on that mountain there is flint. You will make arrowheads out of it so as to hunt deer.” Thus he taught them, and then he went out.

147. He watched the boys playing. Then he called the men together. He took one of them by the arm and stood him aside. “This man will be your Head-Chief. He will make plans for you. He will place the knowledge for you.” Thus spoke the Marumda.

148. And then he took another man by the hand, led him out of the crowd, and stood him by the side of the other one. Then he took another man by the hand, led him out, and stood him by the side of the last one. Then he took still another man by the hand, led him out, and stood him by the side of the others. “These people will advise you and harangue you. The first one I took by the hand, he will be your HeadChief. You must not disobey his orders. These four men will take care of you.” Thus spoke the Marumda.

FOURTH AND LAST DESTRUCTION
OF THE WORLD—BY A WHIRLWIND

149. Then Marumda went back to his abode. Time passed, time passed, time passed, time passed, and then he dreamed. “What is the matter with the world? Why don't they do as I teach them? They have thrown away the knowledge! Why have they turned again to incest? I forbade them to do that! I will have to see about it.” Thus he said, and he started his cloud-house floating.

― 297 ―

150. He made it float over the earth, and then he looked down to see what was going on. Then he floated toward the Kuksu. He floated out to the Kuksu's house. Four times he floated around it, and then he floated down to it. Then he got out of his cloud-house and knocked at the door. “Ooo!” cried the Kuksu from inside, and he opened the door. “Ooo! On the east side! On the east side!” he said.

151. Then Marumda went in on the east side and sat down against the wall on the east side. He felt in his little dried-up sack, he took out his pipe, he filled it with tobacco, he took out a coal and placed it on top of the tobacco, he blew on it, he blew it afire, he removed the coal and put it back in the little sack, and then he smoked.

152. Four times he drew, and then he gave the pipe to the Kuksu. “Brother, you test it now!” he said. He went out to him, and four times he made as if to take it, and then he took it, and then he went back to the place where he had been sitting before. “Ooo! Yo Sumee! May our conference be good, may we be well inspired!” Thus he said, and then he smoked.

153. Four times he inhaled, and then he returned the pipe to Marumda, and he went back to where he had been sitting. “Ooo … ! Now again they have been doing wrong, the people that we made! Therefore I want your consent to destroy them for the last time. Now, this is what we will do, we will teach them to speak di erent languages so that they cannot understand each other.

154. “Maybe it is because they speak only one language that they are incestuous with their own children, with their older sisters, and with their younger sisters. That is why they are begetting puny and deformed children. Therefore I want to destroy them!” Thus spoke the Marumda.

155. “Ooo … ! That is well. You know your own business. You made these people; therefore it is your right to destroy them. This time you had better blow them away with a whirlwind. You go and get the Whirlwind-Man where he lives in the east under the sun. He will blow them away for you. The people that you destroyed before, maybe they inherit their bad tendencies from the bones in the ground, and that is why they are not quitting their evil ways.

156. “Now therefore you will scatter them with the wind. After that

― 298 ―

you will make new people, big ones. You will teach them di erent languages so that they may not understand one another.” Thus spoke the Kuksu.

157. “Oh! That's good! That is what I came to hear. I will wipe o the whole world and then I will come back to you!” thus said the Marumda. “And then we will make a di erent kind of people. You will make people over there as you like them, and I will make people here as I like. Oh! I will find you somewhere! Oh! Now I will go!” “Oh! Go your way! Go your way!” said the Kuksu.

158. “You watch here! Whatever happens I will come back. If not, then I will call you, and you come to me in the north by the side of the water,” thus said the Marumda. “Ooo!” answered the Kuksu, “I will come. Wherever you are I will come!” thus said the Kuksu. “Ooo, go your way, go your way!”

159. Then they separated. Then he got up in his cloud-house, and the house started to race like the wind, going eastward. In no time it arrived at the Whirlwind-Man's house. It stood whirling like a big mountain of smoke.

160. Four times he went around, and then downward he floated to it, and then he knocked at the door. “Kling!” it said, and the door opened. “Hey! hey!” said the Whirlwind-Man, “it looks like the Old Man! Must be something wrong that you came. Come in! Come in! On the east side! On the east side!”

161. “Oh! The people have gone wrong, they are acting badly. That's why I have come for you. Over there on the earth you must destroy the people. They are behaving badly. They practice incest with their children, with their sisters. That's why they are becoming puny and deformed, incapable of hunting their food. Therefore I want you to destroy these people. After that I will make di erent and better people.” Thus spoke the Marumda.

162. “Ooo! All right! It's too bad for them to act that way, to disregard the rules, to forget what they were taught, to throw away their knowledge! All right then, I will blow them away!” Thus spoke the WhirlwindMan. “All right,” said Marumda. “Come! You will go with me.” “All

― 299 ―

right!” Then Marumda went out and got into his cloud-house, with the Whirlwind-Man following him.

163. Then the Whirlwind-Man whirled his cane, he made the cloudhouse whirl, he whirled it to the north, and he himself followed. And as he went over the land the water stood up and the trees were uprooted.

164. Now the Whirlwind-Man was in the lead with Marumda following. “Now we are going to destroy! Now we are going to destroy!” he cried as he went ahead. Whenever the Whirlwind reached a village you could not see where the people went. Some ran into the dance house. The Whirlwind blew away the house and scattered the people everywhere. Thus he did and destroyed all the people.

165. Ground-Squirrel came out of his hole. “Why! all the people are destroyed and titsik!” he said. The Whirlwind heard him and he came back and pulled him out of his hole. “Titsik!” he said and threw him in the water. Then he whirled the water into a spout. Ground-Squirrel scooted back under the ground. “That's the way to treat people when they get fresh!” said the Whirlwind.

166. And now the Whirlwind was returning. The people were destroyed. Whirlwind-Man was going home still on the lookout for people. Then it was that he came across the Skunk. He ran up to him and said: “How do you happen to be walking about?” Then he grabbed him and started to whirl him around. Then Skunk farted, and Whirlwind threw him away. “If you were people I would throw you in the water!” he cried to him. Then he chased him into a hole in the rocks, and then he upturned the rocks. That's the way Skunk beat the Whirlwind with his fart.

167. After this the Whirlwind left him and wended his way north, looking for people that might have escaped, but he found no one. “That's what happens to bad people!” he said, and then he started searching for the Old Man. “Maybe something went wrong with him … He was ahead of me … and then I didn't see him any more … I had better search for him … ” and he went north. He ran north like lightning, and in no time he arrived at Marumda's house. “Oh! You are here!” he said.

168. “Yes!” said the Marumda. “And you are alive?” “Yes, I am lying down but I am alive.” “Well, everything is finished, just exactly the way

― 300 ―

you told me to do it.” “All right … Have a smoke before you go,” said the Marumda, taking his pipe out of the little dried-up sack. Then he filled it with tobacco, put a coal on top, blew on it, blew it afire, removed the coal, put it back into the sack, and then he smoked.

169. Then he passed the pipe to the Whirlwind. “Yooo! Sumee!” said the Whirlwind. “May it be well! May his knowledge be right! May whatever he does be fit! When he makes people they will be right, they will be fine, they will be thrifty, they will not practice incest with their own blood! If the people that he makes will listen to these words they will be all right! Yooo! Sumee!” thus he said.

170. Then he inhaled four times, and he gave the pipe back to Marumda. “Oh! That's good, my son, that's good! And now you may go back and you will hear whenever I make those people! Oh! You may go!” Then the Whirlwind got into his house. It made “Klink!” and then it raced, the Whirlwind's house, it raced like the lightning, and in no time he got home in the east, and it sounded plain as he went.

171. And now Marumda started to look for people. “Have all the people been destroyed?” he said to himself as he went along. And then: “Eh! What shall I do?” he said, walking along. “Oh! There must be people! This earth cannot stay naked! There are going to be many peoples on this earth. They will speak di erent languages. They will be di erent in color, the people on this earth!”

FIFTH AND LAST CREATION OF THE WORLD

172. And then he went eastward, the Marumda. He arrived at a large valley and walked around it. “Wah!” he said, “why are there no people here? Here there will be a village!” Then he brought some willow sticks to the middle of the valley. There he dug a small hole, and all around he planted the sticks.

173. “Yoh!” he said, and then he went o a little way, there he built a fire, and then he went back. And now to one of the sticks that he had planted he tied the end of a string that he took out of his little dried-up sack. Then he went back to the fire and lay down with his back to it after passing the other end of the string through his ear-hole and making it fast.

― 301 ―

174. He was just dozing when it jerked, and he sat up. He looked back to where he had planted the sticks. He did not see anything. “Wah!” he said, and he lay back to sleep. He slept. In the middle of the night it jerked him, and he sat up. He looked to where he had planted the sticks, but nothing. He went back to sleep. Toward dawn it jerked him. He paid no attention. At daybreak it jerked and pulled him up. Then he sat up.

175. This time he peered. Where he had planted the sticks it sounded like people talking among themselves. “Eh! What I planned will stand true!” he said, and he went over. As he was nearing the roundhouse a man came out of the door. “Where are you going?” he asked.

176. “I have come to see how the villages are doing. In this valley you will hunt your food!” Then the man called to the people inside and then came out. “How are we to hunt food?” asked the leader.

177. “That's what I have come to teach you. Break o some of that wood over there and bring it here.” Then the man who was in front of the others broke o some of the wood and brought it back. “Now break o some little ones and bring them here!” Then that man broke o some little sticks and brought them back.

178. Then Marumda split the large piece of wood and scraped it, and in no time he made a bow out of it. Then he peeled the little ones and made arrows out of them. Then: “Bring some flint from over there!” he said. He chipped the flint with his teeth, and in no time he made arrowheads out of it. Then he felt in his little dried-up sack and brought out some sinew.

179. He twirled a string, tied it to the bow, and pulled. “This is called a bow,” he said. Then he felt in his little dried-up sack and brought out some feathers, he split them, and tied them to the end of the arrows. Then he fixed the flint arrowheads. “With this you will hunt deer,” he said.

180. Then he said to the women: “Over there there is kuhum [basketweaving material].” “What is kuhum?” they asked. Then Marumda went to dig some and brought it back. “This is weaving material for you.” He also brought some willow roots. “With these you will make baskets. Over on that mountain there are trees with acorns. These are food for you. In that river over there there is fish for you to catch with nets. Thus you will live.”

― 302 ―

181. He felt in the little sack hung around his neck and brought out a string. Then he started a net and in no time he wove a long one. “This is a gunam net [a seine],” he said. Then he wove a buxal [fish-trap]. “You will make a dam in yonder river, you will place this trap in it, and then you will drive the fish into it.”

182. Then he picked up a rock and pecked it, and in no time he made a pestle. Then he brought out a flat rock. “This is called a gushi-xabe [metate], for pounding seeds and acorns.” Then after a while he said: “Now I am going. Live righteously and your people will be healthy!” Thus he said, and he went on.

183. In this fashion he went around the world. Wherever there was a good place, there he made a village. He went where he had first made people. “Are you living well?” he asked. “Yes, we are living well. But where have you been?” “Just a little way.” “Are there other people like us?”

184. “Yes, lots of them! There are people far from here whose language you don't understand. They speak di erent languages. They live on the other side of that mountain. They speak nearly like you. You must make friends with them.”

185. Thus he said. Then the chief sent two young men over. The two young men went over the mountain and found a large village there, and they came back.

186. After this the Old Man went away somehow, and after this nobody ever saw him again in that village.

187. Then he went o. He went over the hill to where there was a big valley, and he walked around it. “Here also there must be a village!” he said. He brought some willow wands to the middle of the valley, and there he dug a little hole. Then he split the wands with his teeth, he took some charcoal and crushed it. Then he painted the sticks with it.

188. “This one will be the song leader. These will be the chorus. These will be the dancers. These will be the women dancers.” He felt in his little dried-up sack and brought out a string. He tied one end to one of the sticks, and the other end he tied to his own ear-hole.

189. Then he lay down with his back to the fire. He was sound asleep when the string pulled him up. Then he got up. It was the dancers. The

― 303 ―

people that he had wished, they got up to dance, and then it was that the string jerked him.

190. Then he also started to dance. And the boys, and the girls, and the chorus, they all watched him. They laughed at him: “Hurrah for the Old Man!” But the chief stopped them saying: “Don't do that! This is our Old Man Marumda! He is the one who made us!”

191. Four nights he made them dance. When the sun was high the people got out of the dance house and the chief harangued them: “Now you go and hunt deer so that we may have a feast!”

192. And then the women pounded acorns, and when they were done they carried the meal to the water. They scooped out the ground like a bowl and poured the meal in it. Then they poured water over it to leach it. And the boys brought out a large deer and put it down at the entrance.

193. They had already built a fire in preparation. Now the men quartered the deer. Now the women brought in the dough. The men had already heated the cooking-rocks in the fire. The women soon dissolved the dough. They dropped the cooking-rocks in a basket and cooked the mush.

194. After this the men cut the deer-meat into strings and put it on the fire. As soon as some of the meat was roasted they took it out of the fire and put it on the table while other people cut more venison into strings. Thus all the meat got cooked.

195. And now the chief called: “Gather hither!” Then all the people gathered. The women brought out the cooked mush and the meat. They brought it out, and then the women gathered in one place.

196. Then the chief chose four young men. He took the leader by the arm. Then he [the leader] took the next one by the hand. This one in turn took the next one by the hand. Thus he led them around the food four times back and forth. Then he placed the leader on the south side. The next one he placed on the east side. The next one he placed on the north side. The last one he placed on the west side.

197. Then the chief spoke: “These people I have chosen to be your guardians. They will make plans for you. They will address you in speeches.”

― 304 ―

198. Then the Marumda spoke: “This is what you people are going to do. You are going to gather your provisions, your venison-meat, your acorns, your valley-seeds. Then you will store it away, and on this you will live in abundance. You will hold festivals. When visitors come from a distance, take them into the house and partake of food with them. When your friends come from somewhere to visit you, that's the way you must provide them with food.

199. “There are going to be many of you people. Therefore you must take care of each other. Therefore you must claim one another as friends, you must claim one another as relatives. Thus you will live in happiness!” Thus spoke the Marumda. And then he departed.

200. Thus it was that people got acquainted with one another. They acknowledged one another as friends and relations. The young men hunted deer and caught fish. They gathered acorns. They married and brought food in dowry, and deer, and fish. Thus they did.

201. Thus he went, the Marumda, making villages on the shores of the lake, and he came around again to where he had made the first village. The little boys found him. “Here lies an old man!” they said. The older boys came near. “Where have you come from?” they asked him. “Oh! I have come from far away … Say, little boys, bring me an acorn shell.” Then the biggest of the boys said, “I'll bring it!”

202. The boy ran home and came back with an acorn shell. “Are you going to eat it?” he asked the Marumda. “No, give it to me!” The boy gave him the shell. Then Marumda took it and threw it in the water. “Hey!” cried the boy, “what did you throw it away for? Now I won't give you any more. You threw it away! Now I won't give you any more.”

203. “Look over there!” said Marumda. The boys went to the shore and looked at the shell. It was floating. Then they also threw in acorn shells. Marumda's shell floated on [the water] and became a boat. The boys' shells did not become boats. “Why is it that your shell became a boat but ours did not?” asked the boys.

204. “Are you going to ride in it?” they asked then. “Yes, I am going across the lake in it.” “And you are not afraid?” “What should I be afraid of?” said Marumda. “Won't the water-bears eat you?” “The water-bears are my playmates,” said the Marumda. “Look, boys, I am going now.”

― 305 ―

He pushed the boat into the water, he got in, with his cane he shoved o, then he whirled the cane, and that boat went o like a bird flying. In no time it was out of sight. “Oh, he is gone!” cried the boys.

205. Not far from there, there were some grown-up people watching. “Who was that old man?” asked the boys. “What did you ask him?” said the people. “That was no old man. He just made himself into an old man. And then he grew wings. His name is Marumda. He is the one who made the world. He made the lake. He made everything that you see. You saw how he made a boat out of that shell that he threw in the water. He made this big lake and he can dry it up. He also made us people. He made everything here on the earth. Understand that, boys!” Thus spoke the chief.

206. Marumda's boat was already across. It skidded ashore. There were some boys playing there who saw him land. “Hey! An old man just landed out of the water!” they cried. Then a crowd of people came out, men and women. “Why! Here is our Old Man! Give him food!” cried the chief.

207. Then the women went to the house to fetch food and they came back with meal and mush for the Old Man. “Thank you! Thank you!” he said, “I will freshen [i.e., initiate] the boys for you when I am through eating. Look toward the south!” The boys saw a monster running. “He is running this way!” they cried.

208. The monster approached nearer and nearer, and the boys ran away, but he headed them o. They ran toward the house. He rounded them up in one place and drove them into the house. Then he went around the house, four times to the right, and four times to the left, he went around. Then he went over to where Marumda was sitting.

209. “Oh!” said the Marumda, “that's my older brother the Kuksu!” “Younger brother, how are the people that you made? Are they behaving? Did everything come right as you wished? You haven't missed anything?” Thus spoke the Kuksu.

210. They were sitting facing the lake. “Yes, I made everything as I wanted, and then I crossed over.” “Then I am happy! Now you must make the people hold a dance, a four-day dance.” “I told them the same thing over there across [the water]. We will watch this dance and when

― 306 ―

it is all completed and well performed, we will go over there.” Thus said the Marumda.

211. “All right!” said the Kuksu. “You are right, your words are true. Good words, sound knowledge and straight. Therefore make a speech for them so that they may learn from you. Already they have their dancing costumes on.” Thus spoke the Kuksu.

212. Then Marumda got up and went toward the dance house. He stood on top of the dance house and harangued the people: “Gather for the dance! Gather for the dance! My people, my boys, my girls! Gather for the dance! Go into the dance house!” Then the people, the boys, the girls, the children, everybody went into the dance house.

213. The men gathered in front of the center-post. The chorus sat down in front of them. And then Marumda came out in front of them. Then the people tried to sing the song, but they didn't know how.

214. Then Marumda himself sang it. [SONG.] “This is the sittingdown-song,” said Marumda.

215. Meanwhile the men and the women were fixing their dancing costumes. Now they sang the dance-song. Men and boys together were fixing themselves. Women and girls together were fixing themselves. The dance house was crowded with dancers.

216. In the lead went the Marumda. He performed in front of them. Eight times he danced and stopped, and then they rested. They danced all night for four nights. They carried out the dance till just before dawn. Then they took o their dancing costumes and carried them around the dance house four times.

217. After this the men went to the lake to bathe. The young men went to the lake to bathe. The women went to the lake to bathe. The girls went to the lake to bathe. And then they came back to the shore.

218. Thereupon the singers went to the lake to bathe. They came out and started toward the dance house. The singers walked in the lead. Then came the men, then came the young men, then came the women, then came the girls.

219. Four times each way they went around the dance house, and then they went in. And now they went around the center-post four times each

― 307 ―

way. After that they sat down inside the house. Marumda stood in front of the center-post and delivered a prayer. Four times he spoke.

220. Then he commanded: “Make donations of food!” Then everyone in the village brought out donations of food. Now Marumda selected assistant chiefs. He selected four of them to distribute the food. He selected four men, and he selected four women chiefs to distribute the food.

221. They first gave some to Marumda, a ball of mush. In no time he cleaned it up. And then he went o. That was forever that he departed. After that no one ever saw him. No one knows where he went. Thus it happened.

222. In this wise he visited every village, teaching them how to perform the dances. Eight days and eight nights he would perform, and then it was completed.

223. After this he walked about on a mountain, and he called together the coyotes: “You will watch over the villages that are strung out on the land. If enemies should approach, you must cry: Guhmá a'a … guhmá a'a … Enemies … enemies … ” Thus the Marumda instructed the coyotes.

224. After this he called together the wolves of the woods: “You will travel in the woods, hunting your food!” Thus he instructed them. And then he called together the pumas: “You will travel on the mountains, hunting your food!” Thus he instructed them.

225. Then he called together the wiq'a [unidentified animal]: “You will travel amid the rocks, hunting your food!” Thus he instructed them. Then he called together the lynxes: “You will travel in the chamise brush, hunting your food!” Thus he instructed them. Then he called together the foxes: “You will live inside hollow trees amid the rocks!” Thus he instructed them.

226. Then he called together the skunks. He came out with his tail over his head. There was some noise, and he squirted in that direction. He made the whole land stink as he came. “You mustn't do that!” said Marumda. “Only if they threaten to kill you, then you may do it! You will live in holes in the rocks and in the trees.” Thus he instructed them.

― 308 ―

227. Then he called together the raccoons: “You will live in holes in the trees and there you will hunt your food!” Then he called together the squirrels: “You will build your nests high up in the trees and from there you will go and hunt your food!” Thus he instructed them.

228. Then he called together the martens: “Amid the rocks you will dwell. From there you will hunt your food.” Then he called together the bears: “On the mountains you will travel. There you will dwell in caves. From there you will hunt your food!”

229. After that he called together the elk: “You will dwell in the hills and you will hunt your food in the valleys.” Thus he instructed them. And then he called together the chamise-animals [the deer], and he addressed them: “You, in the hills you will dwell, amid the sagebrush. You are dwellers of the hills.” Thus he instructed them.

230. Then he called together the rabbits: “You will live in the valleys and in the mountains.” Thus he instructed them. After this he called together the ground-squirrels, the moles, the gophers, the field mice, the wood-rats, the badgers: “You will dwell under the ground, you will live in holes!” Thus he instructed them.

231. Then he called together the rattlesnakes, the large gopher-snakes, the small gopher-snakes, the milk-snakes, the red-striped snakes, the mountain garter-snakes, the snakes with green back and red belly, the big lizards, the common lizards, the salamanders, the giant salamanders, the snails: “You will live in the hills, amid the rocks, in the trees, in holes underground!” Thus he instructed them.

232. Then he called together the birds, the eagles, the condors, the hawks, the falcons, the goshawks, the kites, the big horned owls, the screech owls, the nighthawks, the little horned owls, the ground owls: “You will live in the hills, in hollow trees, in holes in rocks!” Thus he instructed them.

233. Then he called together the bluejays, the blackbirds, the quail, the crows, the flickers, the red-headed woodpeckers, the mountain jays, the grouse, the robins, the mountain robins, the towhees, the blackand-yellow finches, the mountain quail, the roadrunners, the ravens, the sapsuckers, the woodpeckers, the thrushes, the bluebirds, the meadowlarks,

― 309 ―

the orioles, the grosbeaks, the swallows, the black swallows, the shrikes, all of them he called together and instructed them: “You will live in the hills and the valleys, and in hollow trees!” Thus he instructed them.

234. Then he called together the water birds, blue heron, sand-hill crane, white crane, bittern, little green heron, swan, goose, mallard, cormorant, grebe, merganser, seagull, pied-billed grebe, little merganser, mud-hen, he called them together and addressed them: “In the water you will live, in the water you will seek your food!”

235. Then he called together the fishes: “Fishes who live in the water, all of you, come ashore!” Thus he spoke. Then Turtle came ashore first, and behind him came all the fishes. “You are not a fish!” said Marumda to the Turtle. “You will travel on the land. You fish, you are not to travel on land! You fish, you must live in the water. You will eat food from the water. And you too, Turtle!” Thus he spoke. Then the fish went back into the water, and Turtle floated back into the water.

236. Thus sitting on top of a mountain spoke the Marumda. Thus he instructed everything on the earth. How they were to behave, what they were to eat, where they were to live, he told them that way, everything. That's what he called them together for.

237. He sat on a large flat rock on top of the mountain, giving instructions to everything that lives. Then he got o and stood the rock on edge. “People must never come here!” Thus spoke the Marumda.

238. Then he departed. “If people come here this rock will fall and the people will live no longer! If anyone comes here he will die forever!” Thus spoke the Marumda.

239. After that he went to see the Kuksu. He arrived at the Kuksu's place and told him what he had done. “You have done the right thing!” said the Kuksu. “Sing a praying song, older brother!” said Marumda to Kuksu. Then: “All right!” he said. [SONG.] Thus spoke the Kuksu. Then Marumda spoke: “Oh! That's good! Ooo … Ooo … Ooo … Ooo!” And then the Marumda pulled out a song. [SONG.] Then he went back to his own abode. And the Kuksu also went back to his own place.

― 310 ―

240. Four times he made us people. First he drowned them in the water. Then he destroyed them by fire. Then he destroyed them by snow. Then he destroyed them by a whirlwind. Thus he destroyed them four times. This tale I was taught by the old men, this tale of world-making, of making people, this is the tale as I was told.

241. This is the tale that I heard when I was little, when I was a boy.

― 311 ―

17. The Trials of Young Hawk

Southern Pomo
1940

Annie Burke, narrator

Abraham M. Halpern, collector

Robert L. Oswalt, translator

INTRODUCTION BY ROBERT L. OSWALT

Historical Background

The terms Pomo and Pomoan refer to a family of seven related languages and to their speakers. The divergence among the seven languages is similar to that among the various Romance languages; at the extremes, the divergence is greater than that between English and German. At a more distant level, Pomoan is related to some languages classified as Hokan. The Pomo lived in an area stretching roughly from about fifty miles north of San Francisco northward for ninety miles, and from the Pacific Coast inland for fifty miles to include much of the shore of Clear Lake, with an o shoot to the northeast across the Inner Coast Range.

Estimates of the total population of the pre-Contact Pomo vary from eight thousand to twenty-one thousand. The Southern Pomo, who occupied the drainage system of the lower half of the Russian River, were

― 312 ―

one of the more numerous of the language groups, constituting about 30 percent of the Pomo total. They were not a political unit but lived in several independent village communities.

Aboriginally all the Pomo lived by hunting, fishing, and gathering plant foods. Acorns were the staple of their diet and required a great deal of preparation: gathering, drying, cracking, grinding, leaching (to remove the bitter tannic acid), and cooking. They clipped and ground clamshells into beads, which were strung and used as a store of wealth. Larger and much more valuable beads were made of magnesite (known as “Indian gold”). To keep account of the wealth represented by these beads, they developed a system for counting up into the thousands. However, the Pomo have been most famed for their basketry, which was woven with great skill in a wide variety of techniques. The women took pride in doing artistic work, often taking months to complete a fine, coiled six-inch basket. There has recently been a cultural renaissance, and a few younger women have learned to produce the fancy baskets.

Beginning in the early nineteenth century the Southern Pomo were disastrously affected by missionization, raids, disease, and settlement of their land by immigrants. By the early twentieth century, in the southernmost region, containing the present cities of Santa Rosa and Sebastopol, the surviving biological descendants of the Southern Pomo had lost their ancestral speech. Further to the north, two dialects survived, with, at mid-century, perhaps two dozen speakers each: Mihilakawna ‘West Stream’, spoken in the Dry Creek Valley (now filled with vineyards), and Makahmo ‘Salmonhole’, spoken in the area of the town of Cloverdale. By the early 1960s the number of speakers had dwindled to about a dozen for each of the two dialects. And by 1999, there was one speaker of each dialect. There are hundreds of descendants with some Southern Pomo blood, but they are much assimilated and racially mixed through intermarriage with other Indian groups, with Mexicans, and with white people. In the recent cultural revival many of the younger generations have learned their traditional songs and dances and perform them in public.

Salvage Workers

Into the situation in 1939 came Abraham M. Halpern (1914–1985), to collect, over a one-year period, lexical material and texts with free translations

― 313 ―

and some word-by-word translations in each of the seven Pomo languages. Halpern had spent considerable time studying Yuma (also called Quechan), spoken in far Southeastern California, and he eventually produced a grammar of that language as a doctoral dissertation. He brought northward with him a phonetic skill that enabled him to record in the Pomo languages the unusual sounds that had escaped the occasional earlier collector. For Southern Pomo, Halpern obtained seven Coyote stories, dictated by the one speaker, Annie Burke.

By 1963, I had completed a grammar and a volume of texts of the neighboring Kashaya Pomo language and turned my attention to salvaging as much as possible of the Southern Pomo language. My first principal consultant was Elizabeth Dollar (1895–1971), speaker of the Mihilakawna dialect, who was able to furnish some Coyote stories, as well as much lexical material. From the mid 1960s and for twenty years, Elsie Allen (1899–1990) and I worked together for a couple of weeks each year gathering lexical and grammatical material on her mother tongue. She did not know any Coyote stories, nor did any other surviving speaker of the Makahmo dialect, and thus those dictated by her mother, Annie Burke, remain the only real corpus for the genre in that dialect.

Annie Burke (1876–1960), born Annie Ramone, was raised in a relatively traditional way, speaking only the Makahmo dialect; she learned English later in life. She married George Comanche and with him had two daughters. She gave birth to her first while working in the hop fields and this child, Elsie, was to become a chief consultant on the Makahmo. Annie's second husband was Richard Burke, and with him she had one son, Salvador. The family lived on the Hopland Reservation, where the language was Central Pomo, a language about as di erent from Southern Pomo as French from Spanish, and that became the third language that Annie and Elsie learned to speak.

Annie Burke was a master basketweaver. Like many artists, she was also a collector of the creations of other masters in her medium. Earlier tradition had been that personal property should be buried with the deceased; however, Annie Burke requested that this not happen to her baskets and that they be preserved for later generations to see. Her daughter Elsie, who also became a master weaver (and wrote a booklet on Pomo basketweaving), made the same request for preservation, with the result that the family baskets are now on display in the museum in the town of Willits.

― 314 ―

Narrative Structure

“The Trials of Young Hawk” is of a class of narratives that the Pomo call “Coyote stories,” told of a time when animals had speech and other human attributes. Coyote often is the principal character, but, as here, it is not necessary for him to be a participant for the tale to be a Coyote story.

Ritual Numbers. The magical number among the Pomo and neighboring Indians is four: a ritual (submersion in water, in this story) may have to be performed four times, good or bad luck may come in fours, and the hero of a story may have to overcome four obstacles (compare three and seven in European tales). On occasion, half or twice four has special significance: duality, the occurrence of characters in pairs—two siblings, parent and child, two opponents—is fairly common in Pomo stories. This tale carries out the principle of duality to an exceptional degree. The tale begins with two hawk brothers but quickly turns to following the trials of the younger brother alone. He has encounters with various pairs, even pairs of pairs: two beaver brothers, then two gopher brothers; two red ant sisters, then two field mice sisters. There is a shift toward the end of the tale to two separate attacks from single opponents, an ogress and thunder. The story closes with revenge taken on the older brother.

Personal Names and Kinship Terms. Animal characters are identified in the Native text by species name. In other translations these have often been converted into proper names by capitalizing them. As a convention, that might well have been done here, but it is not, because the designations in Southern Pomo are not proper names. As a term of reference, k'a{bek'ac' ‘sharp-shinned hawk’ is used of either the older or younger hawk brother, not as the name of one of them. Real proper names of individuals cannot be used in ordinary secular situations; instead, a kinship term is almost invariably employed as a term of address.

Whether the characters are related or not, a kin term suitable to the age di erence can be selected: someone two generations older might be called by one of the grandparent terms; a slightly older male might be addressed as “Older Brother.” The Pomo languages all have distinct terms

― 315 ―

for the four grandparents, each of which is more inclusive than is suggested by the English translation; for example, the Southern Pomo term for “mother's father” includes all the brothers of the father of the mother. At two points in the tale the younger brother addresses the older, not by the relationship of the addressee to the speaker—that is, “Older Brother”—but by a tecnonym, a term based on the relationship of the addressee to a child, in this case the adopted hawk: “O Father of his Mother” (one word in Southern Pomo). It might be noted that the two pairs in the story addressed as “Mother's Father” are helpful, as older relatives should be. The two pairs of females are not addressed by a kin term because they are potential mates and it would be incestuous for them to be adopted into the equivalent of a close blood relationship. The single ogress is not a potential mate and can address the young hawk by the deceptively friendly “Grandson.”

Sentence Connectors. Southern Pomo has an elaborate system of suffxes for subordinating one clause to another. When attached to the verb ha:mini- ‘do thus’ or ‘do so’ they form a word that links two sentences together, giving such information as the relative timing of the successive sentences and whether there has been a switch in subject between the prior sentence and the one with the connector. The narrative may proceed through several clauses and sentences with no subject expressed overtly; even so, the appropriate English pronouns can be deduced from the tracking system and supplied in the translation. In the native-language extract that follows, taken from the end of the fourth paragraph of the story, these characteristic features of Southern Pomo discourse are clearly on display.

šin:ak^h le he?:e p^h a?s'i-ba, crown.of.head hair grabbed-having Having grabbed the hair on the crown of the head,
ma:-p'iki-n, “ka:li-n-hk^h ay hu?:uci-n!” nih:iw. own-younger. brother-to up-to-ward turn. face-imperative said he said to his younger brother, “Turn your face upward!”
ha:mini-ba, ma:-p'iki-n hu?:u-k^h be? ak^h:o ba-:cip'. done.so-having own-younger. brother-to eye-rock two poke-out Having done so, he poked out his younger brother's two eyeballs.
― 316 ―
ha:mini-ba k^h ma:yow, hid?a hwa:-ba, done.so-having after, outside gone. out-having After having done so, having gone outside,
?ahca-n-hk^h ay ho:liw. house-to-ward set.o he set o homeward.

The closest English translations of these sentence connectors are phrases like “Having done so,” “He having done so, the other,” “While doing so,” and “While he was doing so, the other.” In the story, some of the connectors are fully translated, to convey the style of Southern Pomo narratives, but others are rendered more simply to avoid being excessively intrusive. “Then” and “and” are common translations but deliver less information than the Southern Pomo connector.

Definite and indefinite articles also are supplied to fit the context. Other major elements that have been inserted to clarify the translation, but are not in the original text, are put in square brackets.

Quotatives. Annie Burke's rendition is curiously at variance with what is typical among all other Pomoan traditional stories: She rarely employs the evidential suffx -do ‘it is said, they say’, used to mark that the narrator has been told of the events by someone else, and that they are not personal experiences. The suffx appears only in the fifth paragraph from the end.

THE TRIALS OF YOUNG HAWK

A group of small birds and animals, who were all also people, used to live together in a big community. A sharp-shinned hawk lived there along with his younger brother. The hawk's younger brother always perched up high in the earth lodge on the side with the fire. The older sharpshinned hawk was married to a wildcat; his wife was a wildcat woman.

One time many of the people set o eastward to load up on fish. After they all had left, the wildcat woman went to her husband's brother down in the earth lodge and pulled her husband's brother down from where he was perched. Having pulled him down, she dragged him away. Then she scratched him, scratched him everywhere on his face, scratched his body too. When she had scratched him, he fled to where the earthlodge was and ran down in. There he perched up high where his bed was.

Those people who had gone o toward the east now started for home, bringing a load of fish. While they were on their way, the scrub jay told the older hawk, “Your wife scratched your younger brother.”

In the morning, the older hawk went down there to the earth lodge. He then said to his younger brother, “Climb down! I'm going to brush your hair.” He spread a hide for him to climb down onto. The younger brother, having climbed down, sat down on the hide. The older brother, the sharpshinned hawk, having sat down near his younger brother, brushed his head hair with a louse brush. All of the head hair he brushed well. Having grabbed the hair on the crown of the head, he said to his younger

― 318 ―

brother, “Turn your face upward!” Then he poked out his younger brother's two eyeballs. After having done so, he went outside and set o homeward.

The younger brother cried and screamed and screamed, writhing around. But nobody at all saw this; he just su ered it alone.

Now night came on and, when the people all lay down to sleep, he, by crawling around, felt the door, the earth lodge doorway, and through there crept outside.

Now he just crawled away somewhere on all fours. He didn't know where he was crawling to. Weeping he crept along; groaning he crawled this way and that. Falling down into brush, he rolled down a steep incline. Having crawled around in this way, he clambered up onto an earth lodge.

When this happened, a beaver and his younger brother living there together both heard the movement on their earth lodge. The older beaver brother said to his younger brother, “Look outside there! Somebody is groaning a lot out there.” When he said this, the younger brother said “All right” and went outside. When he did so, he found the eastern hawk and said, “My poor child! It must be our child who has been crawling around, O Father of his Mother!”

The older beaver brother also ran outside. The two of them carried that hawk down into the earth lodge. When they had done this, the mother's fathers wept. After they had wept, they built a fire and placed rocks in it. They filled a baby-bath basket with water, and, when the rocks had become hot, they dropped those hot rocks into that water-filled baby bath. They dropped the rocks, the hot rocks, into the baby-bath basket, in order to heat the water. When the water had become hot, they washed the hawk's body. They fixed up his hair as well, the head hair that had become so tangled, so full of dry grass, so full of foxtails and burrs. Twigs and leaves were all snarled with that once fine hair.

The two of them, sitting beside that place, fixed him up. They made everything good. After doing this, they next gnawed out round balls from

― 319 ―

wood and set these artificial eyes into the eyesockets. It didn't look good, because it was white, just white all over.

At night, when his mother's fathers had gone to sleep, he crawled back and forth on all fours and then crawled outside. He crawled away, not knowing where he was crawling. He just crawled here and there on all fours, crawling while crying. Having crawled around in this way, he crawled up onto a gopher's earth lodge.

A gopher lived there with his younger brother. The older gopher said to his younger brother, “Somewhere on top of the earthlodge I hear someone groaning. Go and look up there!” “All right, I'll go look. You are such a coward,” said the younger, and he went outside.

When he did so, he found the hawk. He then said to his older brother, “The child must be ours, O Father of his Mother.” When the younger said this, the older followed him out. The two of them picked [the young hawk] up and carried him down into the earth lodge. They set him down there where they had spread something out. When they had done this, the two of them wept over their grandchild.

When they had finished crying, they set rocks on their fire and put water in a baby-bath basket. Then, when the rocks had become hot, they dropped those hot rocks down into the water. The water heated up. Then they washed the hawk. They washed that body all covered with blood and scratched with brush. They also brushed his head hair well. They fixed him up good.

Then the older gopher said to his younger brother, “Pick some asters and let us try to make eyes out of them.” The younger brother said, “All right” and went outside, snapped o the best aster blossoms, gathered them up, and carried them down into the earth lodge. Some of these flowers they prepared well and set into the eyesockets. They looked at their work and it seemed good. It was good. When they were finished, the hawk said, “I see things well. Thank you, Mother's Fathers, for giving me eyes.”

His mother's fathers: “You should live here with us. Don't go away!” The

― 320 ―

hawk: “No, I will leave. I will just wander about. I will wander wherever I wander.” When he said this, his mother's fathers said, “All right, it is good. We will give you presents.” They gave him arrows, a bow, a duckbow. The arrows had been placed down into a quiver.

Having picked these up, the hawk set out.

In this manner—wandering, wandering, wandering—he wandered all day long. Then he spied a small house standing. Two red ant women lived there, an older with her younger sister. Those women caught sight of that man. “Ey, a fine man is coming.” The older sister: “He will be my man.” The younger: “No, he is mine. You are old; I am the one who will marry him.” “Come! Come here!” she said to the hawk. Then she had him come into the house.

The older sister: “I am the one who will marry him. I am the one he will lie down with.” When she said this, the younger sister said, “No, I will have him lie with me. You are an old woman; I am the one who will marry him.” The older sister: “No, we will have him lie in the middle. We will both marry him.”

Having said that, night came, and the three lay down together. When they did this, these women didn't let the man sleep. All night long they were biting him. That's why the man, early next morning, when dawn was just brightening in the east, left. Having left, he wandered around.

All day long he walked. Then he spied a small house, a small house standing.

Two field mouse women lived there, an older with her younger sister. At twilight, this younger sister: “Older Sister, a man is coming. A fine man is coming.” Then, having said, “Ey,” they went out—both of the women went out.

Then, to the hawk, “Come! Come here! Now, where do you come from? Come on into the house!” They had him sit down in the house. Having

― 321 ―

done that, the older sister said, “I will marry him.” Thereupon the younger sister: “But I saw him first. I am the one who should marry him. You are just an old woman.” “No, I am the one who should marry him. You are way too immature.”

It became night. [The older sister said], “No, we will lie down together in one place and we will have him lie in the middle.” Having said this, they lay down and had that man lie in the middle. Because of this, the man was dying for sleep. Next, those women ate his head hair, chewed up his eyebrows, bit out his eyelashes, chewed up all his face hair, and nibbled o all the hair on his body.

In the morning the man awoke. That erstwhile head of hair was gone when he awoke; he arose entirely smooth. Even his duckbow had been eaten up. The quiver had been chewed up as well. Those women were gone; he arose alone. He tried feeling on himself with his hand for his missing hair, but there was nothing there; it was perfectly smooth. Then he went outside and set out.

Having done so, he discovered a pond lying still. Then he said, “You will cause my head hair to grow.” And, “World lying around here, have pity on me and cause my head hair to grow! Four times I will submerge in the water.”

Now, after having said that, he went down to the pond and into the water. Then he dove under. When he reached the limit of his breath, he lifted his head up out. There was nothing there when he lifted his head; he lifted a smooth head. Again he dove under; again he lifted his head up out. With nothing there, smooth, he lifted his head up. Again he dove under. When he reached the limit of his breath, he lifted his head up out.

Now that body hair had sprouted, and the head hair had sprouted as well. Again he dove under. For a long time he kept his head in the water. When he reached the limit of his breath, he lifted his head up out. Facial hair had grown. Eyebrows had grown. That head hair had become

― 322 ―

longer. All over the fine body hair was growing out. That wooden bow had become new. That quiver had become new. Everything was good.

Now he set out. He was just walking along. Looking here and there he wandered around. Then he spied a house, a small house standing.

One old woman was living there. Whoever visited there, she would kill. Of the people who visited that old woman, not even one ever left alive.Of the people who visited her, that blind old woman killed every single one. The old woman was blind.

The hawk arrived there.

“Sit down here! Sit down beside me, Grandson! Who have you been listening to that you come here to visit me, your mother's mother?” The hawk sat down near there. She picked up her rock walking stick and struck at the hawk with it. The hawk dodged, causing her to strike bare ground. The old woman missed.

When she did this, the hawk shot that old woman with one of his arrows. He killed her o, put her to death. After he had done this—put an end to that old woman, now dead in the house—he went outside. He put a torch to the house, burned it up. The old woman was burned up as well.

When he had done this, the hawk set out again. He just set out wandering around, set out looking at things here and there.

Now clouds formed and thunder sounded. It thundered very loud. The thunder man kept on failing to strike the hawk. While the thunder man was missing him, the hawk spied, high on a tree, an open woodpecker hole. When he did so, the hawk crawled away and into the hole. Then, the thunder man hovered around where the hole was. While he was doing so, the hawk shot the thunder in the soft spot above the front of the collarbone. When he shot, the thunder thudded onto the ground with the sound “Chol.”

― 323 ―

When this happened, the hawk crawled up and out from the hole. He looked at the thunder that he himself had shot. They say that the thunder wore all kinds of blankets: rain blanket, fog-rain blanket, hail blanket, snow blanket, wind blanket, fog blanket. In these, they say, the hawk dressed himself up, having removed them [from the thunder].

Then, next, he set out flying far away to where his own older brother had mutilated him. Having become the thunder, he set out flying.

Then he caused rain to fall where his older brother's people lived. He caused thunder to sound. He caused it to rain a lot. When it had rained a lot, the earth lodge filled with water. When this happened, his older brother knew [the cause].

The older brother: “Younger Brother, Younger Brother, make the rain end, make the rain end! I know it is you, Younger Brother, who make the rain fall.” When he said this, he went away; the thunder went away.

That is the end.

― 324 ―

18. The Woman Who Loved a Snake

Cache Creek Pomo
1988

Mabel MCKay, storyteller

Greg Sarris, collector and narrator

INTRODUCTION BY GREG SARRIS

Mabel McKay was born on January 12, 1907, in Nice, Lake County, California. Her father, Yanta Boone, was a Potter Valley Pomo Indian. Her mother, Daisy Hansen, was a Losel Cache Creek Pomo. Mabel was raised by her maternal grandmother, Sarah Taylor, and always considered herself a Losel Cache Creek Pomo. It was from her grandmother that Mabel learned the Losel Cache Creek language and the rich and extensive history, not just of her tribe, but of many surrounding Pomo and southwestern Wintun tribes.

But this knowledge was not what Mabel would become known for. She became an expert basketweaver, perhaps the finest of her time, weaving brilliantly colored feather baskets and miniatures, some no larger than eraserheads. And she became a medicine woman, what we call locally an Indian doctor. She was a “sucking doctor,” the most highly valued of the local Indian doctors, and she would be the last sucking doctor, not just among the Pomo, but in all of California. Every aspect of her life was guided by the dictates of her Dream, her general term for her experience

― 325 ―

FIGURE 8. Mabel McKay, October 1, 1971. Courtesy Herb Pu er.

with and knowledge from the Spirit. These things—her basketweaving and doctoring—made her famous. Other Indians, anthropologists, and basket collectors all flocked to her, seeking information about this or that. But she was uncanny, maddening in her replies.

“What do you do for poison oak?” a student once asked in a large auditorium where Mabel was being interviewed as a Native healer. “Calamine lotion,” she answered.

At the time this story was recorded, in 1988, I had known her for more than thirty years, since I was a child.^[1] I was attempting to write her life story, both because she wanted me to and because I had made her life story my dissertation project at Stanford. I figured because I am Indian (Kashaya Pomo/Coast Miwok) and because I knew her so well I would be able to understand her wishes for her “book,” as she called it, in terms of its content and narrative structure. No such luck. “You just do [the book] the best way you know how,” she said. “What you know from me.”

― 326 ―

What I knew from her were narratives that circled around and around, connecting with one another in space and time in ways I couldn't make sense of, at least not for a book I might write. And when I countered with questions that might help me order these narratives in a way meaningful for me, I heard the same uncanny responses the student heard about poison oak.

“Mabel, people want to know about things in your life in a way they can understand. You know, how you got to be who you are. There has to be a theme.”

“I don't know about no theme,” she said.

“A theme is a point that connects all the dots, ties up all the stories,” I explained.

“That's funny,” she said. “Tying up all the stories. Why somebody want to do that?”

Eventually, I came to see and feel what she meant. The stories cannot be tied up, disconnected from one another, not her story, my story, any story. Stories live and change in contexts, with changing hearers and tellers. Mabel reminded me of this every step of the way. I became a part of the story the moment I heard it. In hearing stories, we begin to interpret, or “make sense,” of them, and Mabel always seemed to remind me of that fact. Just as Mabel broadened the student's notion of a Native healer, letting the student understand that as an Indian doctor Mabel was also a contemporary woman, so Mabel continued to open my eyes, reminding me of who I was and what I was thinking as a participant in her storytelling. It was important that I remembered my life, my presence and history, as I attempted to understand Mabel.

As I learned more about Mabel, I learned more about myself. The stories, and the dialogue about the stories, served as a way to expose boundaries that shape and constitute cultural and personal worlds. Thus, I understood how I might write her story and her book. I had to chart not just her “story,” but the story of my hearing her story. I had to expose the ever-widening world the story comes from and becomes.

Scholars familiar with my work with Mabel often question the fact that my conversations with her were always in English. Would the situation and outcome of the storytelling event be the same or di erent if she spoke Pomo? Of course, I don't know for certain, because I only know a few words and phrases of her language and could never converse with her at length in that language. But I suspect not. What Mabel invoked and inspired was

― 327 ―

an awe and respect for everything around her, a way of reminding oneself that the story, like everything in the world, was always more than what you thought, and perhaps more than you could ever imagine. More than the interesting facts of her life as a basketweaver and medicine woman, Mabel wanted to teach me that. English seemed to work just fine.

Others have asked if Mabel's talk—her narratives, conversations, and responses to questions—are typical of older, say traditional, Pomo-speakers. It seems in many ways Mabel was unique as a speaker, but I am not certain. I have known other Pomo storytellers who remind listeners of the context in which they are hearing stories. I have also known Pomo storytellers to implicate their listeners in what they are saying. None of the speakers I have known, however, was as consistent in these matters as Mabel. But I have not done a study or comprehensive survey. I have only looked at Mabel's talk in terms of its e ect as I have known it, not in terms of the ways it may or may not represent traditional or typical Pomo discourse, whatever that may be. What I wrote, finally, was what I knew from Mabel, the best way I knew how.

NOTE

1. The present selection is taken from chapter 2 of Greg Sarris's book, Keeping Slug Woman Alive: A Holistic Approach to American Indian Texts. In that edition of the story, the transcribed text of “The Woman Who Loved a Snake” is broken up, its parts presented out of narrative sequence and embedded in a larger (and fascinating) exegesis of the context and story's meaning. For this collection, what Sarris and I have done is to extract the text of Mabel's narration from its critical matrix and restore it to the chronological order of its original telling. Greg has added a few sentences of transition here and there to compensate for the reordering of the text.

Sarris's experimentation with the framework of contemporary fiction to present this story strikes me as an ingenious way of contextualizing the narrative, of incorporating both expressive and interpretive information—“atmosphere” and explanation—directly into the presentation itself, rather than handling it through the medium of footnotes and introductory essays. As a method for presenting traditional narrative (one that Jaime de Angulo experimented with as well, though from a very di erent perspective), it holds great promise, at least for those editors and translators who have a “first-person” recollection of the original performance.

― 328 ―

Though it is not reflected in the title of the piece, the reader will discover that Mabel McKay actually tells two stories here, not just one. The second story, about the first-Contact arrival of Europeans in Kashaya territory, is technically unrelated to the main story about the woman and the snake. What I find fascinating is how the two stories, separate until Mabel called them up on this occasion, seem to adapt toward each other in their new surroundings. It's as if all her stories were really one, part of an endless, multivocal braid. Once Mabel has brought the two stories into one light, they remain forever intertwined.—hwl

THE WOMAN WHO LOVED A SNAKE

One day I took a colleague of mine from Stanford University to the Rumsey Wintun Reservation to meet Mabel McKay. “I want to meet this famous Pomo medicine woman,” my friend said. “I've heard her talk and I've seen her baskets in the Smithsonian.” My friend, Jenny, had heard me talk about Mabel also. I had been recording Mabel's stories for a book about her life. As always, Mabel proved a gracious host. She served us hot buttered toast and co ee and, for lunch, tuna fish sandwiches with pickles and lettuce. As Jenny and I ate, Mabel told about the woman who loved a snake.

“See, her husband, he would work at night. ‘Lock the door,’ he'd tell her. ‘Don't let nobody in.’ Every night he'd go o saying that: ‘Lock the door, keep everything locked up.’ She would fix his dinner, then his lunch.” Mabel chuckled to herself. “By lunch I mean what he takes to work. That's what I call lunch when I was working nighttime in the cannery.

― 329 ―

“Anyway, this woman, she says ‘OK.’ And sometimes, after he would leave, she'd stay up for a while. She'd clean up around, maybe do the dishes, get things ready for the morning, for the breakfast. I don't know.

“Then one TIME she hears a knock on the back door. ‘What is that?’ she's thinking. First she thought maybe it was her husband; maybe he was coming home early; maybe he got sick or something. ‘But then why doesn't he just come in?’ she was saying. Well, then she thought maybe she was hearing things. She just kept working then.

“But it kept on, this knocking. Then she got scared. See in those days no phones up there. And this was far out, up on some white man's place there, where her husband worked. She could not yell, nothing. Nobody to hear her. Maybe she's thinking this to herself. I don't know.

“‘Who is this?’ she is saying. Then I don't know what he said. I forgot. Something, anyway. And she opens the door. Just a little bit. He comes in and she stands there looking at him. But she doesn't recognize him.

“Anyway, she fixes some co ee. I don't know. Gives him something to eat. They're talking around there. I don't know what.

“Next day, her husband comes home. ‘What's this?’ he is saying. He's standing there—by the bedroom—and he's looking down in some vase. Something there. It was on the table. ‘What are you talking about?’ she says. Then she goes and looks where he's looking. And she sees it, too: a snake, a little black snake all coiled up. ‘What is this?’ he says to her. Then he takes it out and puts it in the brush. He lets it out there.

“Next day, same thing happens. Then the husband, he gets suspicious of that snake. ‘What is this?’ he is saying. Then she gets worried; now she knows what the snake is. But she don't say nothing. ‘I'm going to kill it,’ he says, ‘chop it to bits out in the brush.’ He's testing her, but she don't say nothing. Then she got real worried, seeing him go out with that snake.

“But next day same thing it happens. Maybe she tried talking to that man. I don't know. ‘Don't stay around here,’ she might said to him. But it's there again, that snake. Now her husband, he shakes her; he knows something is going on. ‘What is this?’ he's saying. But he had an idea about it anyway. ‘You come with me,’ he says, ‘and watch me kill it.’ He starts pulling on her arm, shaking her, but she refuses him. She won't go. She's crying by this time.

“He takes the snake out, same way, coiled around his hand. She just

― 330 ―

sees him go. Then he comes back. She doesn't know what happened. Maybe this time he did kill it. She's crying yet. Her husband, he comes in and says nothing. Just goes to bed.

“But he never did chop that snake up. Maybe he did. I don't know. Anyway, it went on like that … ”

Jenny, a Ph.D. candidate in English, asked what the snake symbolized. Mabel didn't seem to understand the question. She looked at me, then turned to Jenny. “Well, it was a problem, I don't know.”

“Why didn't he, I mean the husband, just kill the snake?” Jenny asked. With an incredulous look on her face, Mabel focused on Jenny. “Well, how could he?” she asked. “This is white man days. There's laws against killing people. That man, he would go to jail, or maybe get the electric chair, if he done that.”

Mabel mentioned that she knew the woman, that she often visited her when she lived in the same area north of Clear Lake. “Then one night I seen that man. He was handsome, too,” she chuckled. “It was late. Lakeport grocery was closing and I seen him come out with groceries. He didn't take the road. He went the creek way, north. Then, I say to myself, ‘I bet I know where he's going.’”

“Maybe he just carried the snake with him and left it in the vase each morning before he left,” Jenny o ered. “Like a sign.”

Mabel laughed out loud. “Like a sign. That's cute. Why he want to do that?” She lit a cigarette. “See, I knew he was odd. He's moving in cold, late at night. Snakes don't do that.”

“Well, was it man or snake? I mean when you were looking at it?” Jenny was desperate now.

“You got funny ideas,” Mabel answered. “Aren't I sitting here?” She tapped her cigarette in the aluminum ashtray on the table. “You do crazy things like Greg. And he's Indian! He gets ideas where he wants to know this or that so he can write it all up for the people. Well, it ain't like that what I am saying.”

About a month later, after my trip with Jenny, Mabel and I took a ride and parked along a road on the south side of Clear Lake, where we had a view of the lake and of Elem Rancheria, the old village site and presentday reservation of the Elem tribe of Pomo Indians. Mabel had been talking about her maternal grandmother, Sarah Taylor, and about how the Elem people initiated her into their dances and cult activities after Sarah's

― 331 ―

people, the Cache Creek Pomo, had been removed from their land and ceremonial grounds by the non-Indian invaders.

“‘You will find a way, a way to go on even after this white people run over the earth like rabbits. They are going to be everywhere,’ he was saying. That's Old Man, I forgot his name. He had only Indian name, Taylor's father, Grandma's grandfather. He's the one saying these things.”

Mabel opened her purse, pulled out a cigarette. She lit her cigarette and exhaled a cloud of smoke. Below us, on the narrow peninsula of Elem, smoke rose from the rusted chimney tins of the small, dilapidated houses. A lone dog barked in the distance.

“Well, it was over here, below them hills,” Mabel said, gesturing south over her shoulder with her chin. “This things, they come over the hill in a trail, long trail. So much that dust is flying up, like smoke wherever they go. And first to see them this people down there, where you are looking. ‘What is this?’ the people saying. Things with two heads and four legs, bushy tail, standing here on this hill somewhere, looking down at Elem people.

“Lots of people scared, run o, some far as our place, Cache Creek. They tell what they seen then. All Indians, Indians all over, talking about it then. ‘What is it?’ they is asking. Nobody knows. People is talking about it all over the place. Lot's scared. I don't know. People say di erent things.

“Some people somewhere seen them things come apart, like part man, then go back together. Then I guess maybe they knew it was people—white people. I don't know,” Mabel said and chuckled. “They Indians dance and pray. I don't know. Then they was saying these things [was] mean, killing Indians and taking Indians.”

Mabel drew on her cigarette and leisurely exhaled. “But he seen it in his Dream, Old Man. He said what was coming one day, how this would be.”

“So they knew what it was coming down this hill,” I ventured. “Hmm,” Mabel said, gazing across the lake. “They knew what he meant by ‘white man.’”

“So why did they run? Why all the fuss?” Mabel rubbed out her cigarette and looked at me as if she had not understood what I said. “If they knew from Old Man's prophecy that white people were coming, why didn't they know what was coming down the hill? Why all the fuss?”

Mabel started chuckling, then exploded with loud, uncontrollable

― 332 ―

laughter. She caught her breath finally and asked, “How can that be? You ever know white people with four legs and two heads? Maybe you do. You're raised around them—your mother's people, I don't know,” she said, chuckling again.

She lit another cigarette, then straightened in her seat. “Sometimes takes time for Dream to show itself. Got to be tested. Now we know what he told about, Old Man. He was told … He said lots of things: trails, big trails covering the earth, even going into the sky. Man going to be on moon he was saying.”

“But how did he know that?”

“But sometimes Dream forgets, too. Like them snakes. Old Man come in my dream, give me rattlesnake song. ‘You going to work with this snakes; they help you,’ he is saying. Then, after that, I seen them. All over my house I seen them: porch, closet, in my bathtub when it's hot, all over. Then I say to him, to that spirit, ‘This is modern times, better take that song out of me … I don't want nothing to happen. People around here might call animal control place.’

“You know, peoples around here they don't always understand things like that.”

After Mabel told the story about the people of Elem seeing non-Indian invaders coming “over the hill in a trail,” we headed east, back to the Rumsey Reservation. On the way home, Mabel again told the story of “The Woman Who Loved a Snake.”

“It was across there. Up in them hills where she lived. That time Charlie

[*] Charles McKay, Mabel's husband.

[was] running stock up there. By stock I mean the cattle. Charlie always wanted to have the stock. That woman lived there. Sometimes she would come down the road the other side there and talk to me. Anyway, how it happened, she was alone at night. Her husband used to go o working, where it was I don't know. I forgot. How it happened, she hears this knocking one night, at her door … ”

I was quieter now, listening. “Well, you see, I know about them snakes,” she said as she finished the story. “They can teach about a lot of things.”

Mabel pulled her purse to her lap and began rummaging for her cigarettes.

― 333 ―

I looked to the cold, damp winter hills. Too cold for snakes, I thought to myself.

“Hmm,” she said. “Maybe you'll get some idea about the snakes.” I looked at her and she was laughing, holding an unlit cigarette between her fingers. “I know you. You'll … you're school way. You'll think about it, then write something.”

She was right.

― 334 ―

19. The Dead People's Home

Lake Miwok
1980

James Knight, narrator

Catherine Callaghan, collector and translator

INTRODUCTION BY CATHERINE CALLAGHAN

This is a Lake Miwok story, told to me in the summer of 1980 by James (Jimmy) Knight, at Middletown Rancheria in Middletown, California. Lake Miwok was formerly spoken in a triangular area south of Clear Lake, about eighty miles north of San Francisco. This language is closely related to Coast Miwok, once the language of the Marin Peninsula, and more distantly related to the Eastern Miwok languages, once spoken on the western slopes of the Sierra Nevada mountains from the Fresno River north to the Cosumnes River, as well as on the floor of the Great Valley between Ione and Mount Diablo.

Aboriginally, Lake Miwok culture resembled that of its Pomo and Wappo neighbors. Hunting, gathering, and trading expeditions took Lake Miwok Indians from the top of the Coast Range to Bodega Bay. Settlements were usually located along stream courses in fertile valleys. Acorns, harvested from a variety of oak trees, comprised the starch staple, and important game animals included deer, elk, rabbits, and squirrels, as well

― 335 ―

as several species of birds whose feathers were sometimes woven into elaborate basket designs.

Contact with the whites during the nineteenth century was traumatic. Ranchers to the south often kidnapped Lake Miwok Indians for use in work forces, and there were at least two massacres of Clear Lake Indians, one in 1843 and one in 1850. As a result, the Lake Miwok population, which might never have numbered more than five hundred, dwindled to forty-one by the turn of the century, and there are now probably fewer than half a dozen that remember the language, although many more can claim Lake Miwok ancestry.

J immy Knight was in his middle years when I first started working with him in the summer of 1956. I had met him through Mrs. Alma Grace, my first consultant, who was living in San Francisco. He and his brother, John Knight, conferred with me in Mrs. Grace's cabin on the Middletown Rancheria. Jimmy told the stories, which his brother later translated sentence by sentence into English. After John Knight's death in 1960, I worked with Jimmy alone, usually at his home.

This story is a version of the Orpheus Myth, common worldwide but surprisingly absent from Judeo-Christian or Islamic traditions. Briefly, the hero (or sometimes, the heroine) grieves over the loss of a loved one and finds a magical route to the Land of the Dead, but after a brief encounter with the dead relative, is forced to leave because he or she is still living.

I elicited an earlier version of this same story from Jimmy during the 1950s, in which the main character is a heroic figure from Lake Miwok history. Otherwise, the principal elements are the same. A brother grieves over the death of his sister, watches at her grave until she rises on the fourth night, and follows her to the top of Mount St. Helena, where her dead relatives greet her and accompany her to the Land of the Dead in the middle of the lake (or ocean). Her brother slips past the chief into the dead people's sweat house, but is forced to go back, following a brief visit. He returns to Cottonwood Place after stopping again on Mount St. Helena, becoming a powerful person who makes a hole through a tree. Although many elements are di erent, this account may be related to an earlier text that Lucy Freeland elicited from Maggie Johnson (Jimmy's aunt) in 1922, featuring a man who searches for a dead brother.

― 336 ―

In the present version, Mr. Knight personalizes the account by casting his father and aunt as the principal characters. Ironically, Maggie Johnson is the dead sister. This version also includes extensive philosophizing, a feature that characterizes the texts Jimmy Knight gave toward the end of his life.

The Orpheus Myth reinforces belief in an afterlife where one will encounter dead relatives, as well as the hope of seeing them even in this life. I once elicited a Northern Sierra Miwok version in which a girl visits her dead mother. My consultant had heard this story after the death of her beloved grandmother, who had raised her from infancy. The heroine must walk across a swinging bridge on her way to the Land of the Dead, an element in a Yokuts Orpheus Myth (see #20a, this volume, for another example) in which the hero is following the ghost of his dead wife. This resemblance suggests a Yokuts origin for the Northern Sierra Miwok account. It is also evident that the Northern Sierra Miwok storyteller had altered its content to fit my consultant's needs—soothing the grief of a young girl whose grandmother has just died.

Versions of the Orpheus Myth were common throughout SouthCentral California. They were always localized to the storytellers' own tribes, indicating that they had at some previous time made conscious or unconscious alterations to render the accounts more relevant. Such traditions also facilitated the spread of the Ghost Dance during the 1870s, with the belief that dancing and good conduct would bring about the return of dead relatives in the immediate future.

J ames Knight was a great storyteller, and he brought verve to his art, so that it was a joy to work with him. His rare sense of irony colored the dialogue of his tales, rendering other versions flat by comparison. Especially in his later years, he believed that his mission was to transmit his cultural tradition to Lake Miwok children, and he was distressed over their apparent lack of interest.

It is impossible to reproduce his oral performance on the printed page, and I now regret that I made only tape recordings and no videos. Unfortunately, he is no longer with us (Jimmy died in 1988), and the opportunity is lost.

Translation of an oral account from a non-Western culture into readable English always presents a challenge. I have not included every instance

― 337 ―

of Lake Miwok words such as 'ekaal ‘then’, ‘aye ‘however’, and weno ‘they say’, which often function as quotation marks or indicators of new sentences, but I have tried to remain as faithful as possible to the original, sometimes at the expense of English style.

In the native-language passage that follows, I present the opening sentences of the story just as Jimmy spoke them to me in Lake Miwok. Underneath the transcription runs a word-for-word gloss of the text. Underneath that comes a more literal translation of the sentence than is found in the translation proper.

Ném 'upél-yomi-n húuni ka-líilaw 'ena. This.is Magician-Home-of story I-tell will. This is the Magicians' [Dead People's] Home story I'm going to tell.
Kaníi 'aye ka-líilaw mipi kaníi 'aye, I however I-tell and I however When I tell it, however,
ka-áppi, ka-'enéene, ka-'únu, ka-páapa, my-father, my-aunt, my-mother, my-grandfather, my father, my aunt, my mother, my grandfather,
ka-wée'ama-kon 7e má-t ka-hóoye. my-relative-plural also it-into I-put my relatives, too—I put them [all] in.

THE DEAD PEOPLE'S HOME

The story I'm going to tell is about the Dead People's Home. When I tell it, I put in my father, my aunt, my mother, my grandfather, and also my relatives. This way it's easy to tell the story. If I put in someone else, I can't tell it well. That's why I'm telling the truth. It'll come out nicely in the end.

I'm trying this; that's why I'm speaking Lake Miwok. This is Lake Miwok I'm speaking. The white people will translate this and understand it, the words that I'm saying.

They claim that dead people used to rise from the grave in three or four days. They rise up from there and land on the top of Mount St. Helena. That's what they said, the old people who knew. That's how they told it.

Then my aunt died. My father was distressed. “All right, I want to see my sister. That's why I'm going to the grave, and I'm going to sit there. And I'm going to wait for her,” he said. Then he sat there about four days or five days, that many days.

He sat there day and night. He said he was sitting there four or five days, and something like wind came. Lots of wind. Then he already knew. My father was a dreamer. My aunt was a dreamer, too. So he just sat there. He didn't cry, he just listened.

In the meantime, something white appeared over his sister's grave. This was a ghost. “Sister! Sister!” he said. “Brother, what are you doing here?” said his sister. (His sister's name was Maggie Johnson; her husband's name was Johnson. So her name was Johnson.) “All right,” she said. “You can't

― 339 ―

go with me, Brother. I'm going to the Chief's Home now, the Dead People's Home. I can't put you there,” she said.

He tells it, my father, whose name was Henry, Henry Knight. Both whites and Indians knew he was a doctor, you see. He went doctoring all over. He went to Upper Lake—wherever someone was feeling bad or sick, he went there and doctored them. That's why they knew him all over. He made a lot of life on this earth.

Henry Knight grieved for his sister and went with his sister to the mountain top. From right there, they flew to the middle of the ocean, and they came down right there to the middle, right to the middle of the Pacific Ocean. At that place, there was a great man, a chief, standing inside the sweat house.

“All right, there's one person here that shouldn't have come. And that one will have to go back from here,” he said, that's what he told them. Then his sister, Maggie Johnson, spoke to her brother Henry Knight, “All right, that's you. You can't go to the Dead People's Home. So you have to go back from here. You can't go around there. I'm going to leave. So I'm not going to see you again.”

This is how they told the story many years ago.

Then he came back home from there, Henry did, from the middle of the ocean. He came out of that sweat house—a beautiful one, he said—the sweat house that was over there. He left his sister there. He came back to Cottonwood Place. He came to the top of the mountain and realized where he had come. He flew from there and hit a tree at Cottonwood Place; he claimed he hit a big tree right in the middle and made a hole there. That tree used to be standing there. But now they've pulled it out and destroyed it.

The chiefs and dreamers and doctors knew him, my father, Henry

― 340 ―

Knight. “Where have you been?” they asked. “I've been to the Dead People's Home … I came from the Magician's Place, but they wouldn't have me because I'm not dead. They sent me back from the middle of the ocean.” That's what he told them.

On that occasion, they danced for four days. For four days they gave a big feast. They celebrated four days. Everything used to go on for four days.

And that's how he became a great man. From then on, he became a doctor, because something was watching over him. That's why his sister was great, too, and helped him. She helped him through dreams. She guarded him with songs. They protected each other by talking. They were both great.

My mother was a doctor, too. My grandfather also was a dreamer. So everything they did came out wonderful, beautiful. They ran the land. They worked for the earth. They cured people. They even made dead people well. They did everything great. Something great granted them this power.

As for me, I claim that God has given them this, because they knew. Because they thought good things. Because they made good rules. Because they had many relatives. Because they did everything the nice way. That's why they were granted many gifts.

Because that's how it was, that's how they taught me. Since they explained it to me that way, here's what I'm telling you now. Now I'm putting what they told me a long time ago onto the tape. So [the tape] is telling you this. My friends and relatives can listen and say, “Yes, this is true.” As for me, I'm happy about what I'm saying and what they know about the grave.

So what I'm saying is this. Everything used to happen four times. Look, now they die on this earth. From there they drop into the water. From there, they'll go to heaven. (Not that place, they couldn't put my father

― 341 ―

in because he hadn't died.) Pretty; up there everything is pretty. Look, this is what they teach us. So we should believe it. We should learn it, become aware of it. I'm sitting here, talking this way now. Here's the way I teach my children, because I feel sorry for them.

As for me, I'm happy to be talking like this today, just like those lying in the grave. My grandfather, my aunt, my relatives are lying in AlreadyMy-Home, resting there. Someday I'm going to see them. That's what I feel. That's what I feel all the time. They are happy for me. And me, I keep dreaming about them.

Sometimes they come to help me. “We've come to help you,” that's what they say; I see them night and day. They keep asking me questions, just like a string coming out. They come at me just like a dreamer. And me, I'm glad that something is watching over me. Look how many times I've gotten sick, how many times I could have died, but I haven't gone to the grave yet. I haven't yet gone to Already-My-Home.

Somehow they sympathize with me because of the way I talk and what I'm going to teach the little ones. The plan is still there. That's the way I'm going to work. That's why something great feels sorry for me from someplace.

As for me, I attribute this to God. And so, I'm grateful for this. I always get up in the morning and sleep in the evening. Oh, I'm grateful: make me dream pleasantly and wake up fine in the morning. What causes me pain—my arm, my eyes—press and fix everything.

“I wish.” That's what I say for my little ones, too. “All right, watch over them wherever they are playing—they don't understand. They're this way because they don't know.” I talk like this all the time, morning and evening.

And me, I'm grateful for what He has put in my head, my feelings, and my blood.

As for me, here's the way I'm going to be from now on. Look: my relatives

― 342 ―

are all there, my older and younger brothers, my father, my uncle, my grandmother, my aunt, my mother. When I get there, they'll welcome me, that's what I feel now. That's why I'm just sitting here not scared of anything.

I'm happy about what I'm going to do. I just say, “Thank you.” I'm grateful and I say, “Thank you.” I laugh because I'm happy. When I'm happy, I talk. When I'm happy, I tell things. I'm grateful for whatever they show me. When I'm happy, I'm grateful for everything: trees, birds, water, food.

Before I eat anything, before they help me, I talk to them. As for me, here's the way I'm going to travel: when I go somewhere, I talk to everything—all the cars, horses, carts.

“All right,” I say. I've come this far and told this much. Now when I'm telling this, I'm enjoying myself. This far. All right, that's as far as I'm telling now.

My relatives are in the graveyard over there, filling it up. So I'm glad they're lying there peacefully. Some day when I see them, I'll teach them. I'll tell them how wonderfully I live, how He takes care of me here on earth. This is the reason I know. This is the reason I'm teaching the little ones. That's why I've been here a long time.

All right, I'm happy. That's all now.

― 343 ―

SOUTH-CENTRAL CALIFORNIA

Kingfisher, kingfisher,
cover me with your power,
Sho ho, sho ho, na na, het na na, het,
I am circling around.
Wikchamni song Anna Gayton, “Yokuts and Western Mono: Ethnography”

― 345 ―

SONG

But Čiq'neq'š knew that the devil [lewelew] wanted to deceive him, and he began to sing:
Now I am beginning,
Beginning to make my defense.
I have just put my plant in this soil.
I don't know the end.
I barely put my foot on land.
I come from a great distance, from the clouds.
I am the son of all the dead and
That is why I'm hungry.
The devil said to himself, “Where did this creature come from? What am I going to do with this little boy? Where did he come from?”
And the devil said to Čiq'neq'š: “Do you know that you are under this sun, and that you are seen by means of its light?”
And the boy started thinking, “This fellow is trying to get me all mixed up, but I'm going to make him cry.”
So he said to the devil, “Do you know that we all see by the light in which we are?”
Excerpt from “The Čiq'neq'š Myth” Ventureño Chumash, Fernando Librado Thomas Blackburn, December's Child

― 347 ―

20. Two Stories from the Central Valley

“Visit to the Land of the Dead”
and “Condor Steals Falcon's Wife”

YOKUTS 1931, 1930JOHNNY JONES AND ROSS ELLIS, NNARRATORSSTANLEY NEWMAN, COLLECTOR AND TRANSLATOR

INTRODUCTION BY GEOFFREY GAMBLE

The Yokuts people once inhabited the south-central portion of California from roughly the crest of the Tehachapi Range in the south to Stockton in the north and from the Coastal mountains in the west to the western slopes of the Sierra Nevada range in the east. This territory ranged about 350 miles from north to south and about 200 miles east to west and presented great variation in where the Yokuts people lived, from marsh lands and lakes such as Tulare and Kern Lakes to the lush banks of river canyons of the Tule, Kaweah, Kings and San Joaquin Rivers. The Yokuts people were divided into about forty small tribal groups with each tribe recognizable by its name and by its particular dialect. By and large these tribes were friendly to one another, and their dialects were similar enough that speakers from opposite ends of the territory could understand

― 348 ―

each other. Of the languages and dialects once spoken, no more than a few are spoken today, and many of those speakers live at the Yule Reservation near Visalia, California.

For most Yokuts people, disturbance by white soldiers and settlers did not come until the early 1860s. Such relatively late contact allowed the Yokuts culture and language to remain relatively intact for a much longer period of time than is seen among the coastal groups of California or in many other parts of North America. This means that the tellers of the two Yokuts stories presented here had learned them from speakers who had little or no contact with outsiders, thus considerably enhancing the fidelity of the material.^[1]

Our knowledge of the Yokuts languages and dialects primarily comes from the work of Alfred L. Kroeber (1907, 1925), John P. Harrington (1914–1925), Stanley Newman (1944), and Geo rey Gamble (1978). The Yokuts language group is included within the California Penutian stock, where it is thought to be most closely related to Costanoan and Miwokan and more distantly related to the Maiduan and Wintun families. Specific details of genetic affiliation and subgrouping are still being worked out. Yokuts is a relatively close-knit language family, and internal variation is most clearly seen among the languages and dialects of the southern-most speakers. The two stories here, “Visit to the Land of the Dead” and “Condor Steals Falcon's Wife,” come from the Chawchila and Yowlumni dialects, which are fairly closely related linguistically.

The Chawchila people lived in the northern third of Yokuts territory, inhabiting both the Sierra foothills as well as the valley locations along the Fresno River. A large Chawchila village was situated near the present town of Friant where the Fresno River has now been dammed to form Millerton Lake. As with other Yokuts people, storytelling was an evening and winter activity. Good storytellers were clearly recognized by their ability to exploit the syntactic and semantic richness of the Yokuts language and to occasionally provide creative twists on the classic stories known to everyone.

“Visit to the Land of the Dead” is one of the best-known and frequently told stories among the Yokuts people and was also well-known by other tribes in the region. This version was collected by Stanley Newman in the summer of 1931 from Johnny Jones, who lived at Friant, California. A translation of the story was first published by Anna Gayton and Stanley Newman in 1940, but Newman had completed a rough translation,

― 349 ―

which forms part of his loose note sheets in the Newman collection, much earlier.

Jones's Chawchila version of the tale not only maintains all the features of this classic story, but also provides a richness that clearly indicates a skilled and talented storyteller. The main features of the story include a young couple, recently and happily married, who are punching at each other in playfulness. As the young woman cleans her ear with a small stick, her husband hits her arm and the stick pierces her ear, killing her. The distraught young man then follows his wife to the Land of the Dead, where he is challenged by the “Captain” of the dead people to identify his wife. He does so and is allowed to take his wife back to the land of the living under the condition that once they return they do not have sexual intercourse until after ten days have passed. Naturally, they do not wait the full ten days, and the young man dies. Jones's version includes the young man's confrontation with his mother about the death of his wife, a graveside vigil, a feast in the Land of the Dead, and a complex dialogue with the leader of the dead people.

The second myth, “Condor Steals Falcon's Wife,” was told to Newman in the summer of 1930. Ross Ellis is the most likely storyteller, because so much of Newman's Yowlumni text material came from Ellis. This particular telling of the story, which was known not only among the Yokuts people but also by other tribes throughout the region, is unusually rich in detail and complexity. The story takes place in mythic times, when people and animal were one and the same. There is a gathering of the people to share food. While Falcon is away, Condor steals his wife. Falcon goes to the leader, Eagle, and asks for help in finding his wife. Eagle sends out a series of people to look for her (Bottlefly is the one who finally finds her), and eventually, after great daring and suspense, Falcon succeeds in rescuing his wife from the malevolent Condor.

Though the California condor today conjures up a precarious, split image of magnificence and vulnerability for those following its struggle against extinction, the Yokuts tradition as reflected in this telling appears to have focused more on the bird's enormous strength and tenacity. Here, Condor is little more than a monster, a brute who willfully kidnaps his kinsman's spouse and forces her to be his wife, keeping her in a house hidden so high among the crags that it takes magic for Falcon to reach it. Condor is so tough he can't be killed, not even cremated: though his body finally burns up, his head slips away during the night “by itself”

― 350 ―

FIGURE 9. Ross Ellis with his son. Courtesy of the Bancroft Library, University of California, Berkeley.

― 351 ―

and resumes its pursuit. Falcon, fleeing with his rescued wife, repeatedly smashes the head with a rock, but the head just keeps on coming. Taken as a latter-day ecological prophecy, this story lays down powerful odds for the condor's survival. But if the ongoing e orts at reintroduction ultimately fail, the story also leaves us a final monument: the “Echo Rock” where Condor's head finally turned to stone.

NOTE

1. The text of Newman's translations has been slightly altered in the following ways. First, as it is clearly a prominent feature of Valley Yokuts narrative style for storytellers to use what we call the “historic present” tense to highlight key moments and passages in the narrative, these sentences have been cast in italics, as a visual correlate of this special rhetorical heightening e ect. Second, to conform more closely with the punctuational style of “Visit to the Land of the Dead,” and also to improve readability, many cases of sentence-initial And in “Condor Steals Falcon's Wife” have been adjoined to the preceding sentence, either with a comma or a semicolon. For instance, in the second paragraph of that story, the sequence “And Coyote went to him. And he questioned him.” becomes “And Coyote went to him, and he questioned him.” Third, bracketed interpolations (some Newman's, some the editor's) have been allowed to supplant the pronominal form they clarify. For example, the sentence “But he [Condor] is already losing strength” becomes “But [Condor] is already losing strength.” (This tactic has been applied to the first story as well.) Readers interested in checking Newman's original presentation of “Visit to the Land of the Dead” and “Condor Steals Falcon's Wife” may consult the versions in Gamble (1994) and Gayton and Newman (1940), respectively.—HWL

VISIT TO THE LAND OF THE DEAD

CHAWCHILA YOKUTSJOHNNY YOKUTS

They were married six days. And they loved each other; they played with each other and punched each other in fun. And the woman got a little stick, and she twisted it around in her ear. And while she was cleaning her ear, her husband hit her with his hand; and the stick stuck there in her ear, and she died. At his wife's death, he went to tell his mother. “Mama,” he said, “my wife died.” And his mother said, “How did she die?” “I struck her while she was cleaning her ear.” And his mother scolded him.

They mourned all night. And after mourning for two nights, they buried her. And, having buried her, the old ones went home to their houses. And they returned; and the man stayed all night at the grave, and he was taken home. And he returned to the grave and slept there on the foot of the grave. And his sister got him and took him home. And again he returned to that grave in the evening.

And he heard the dead one getting up shortly after sunset. And she jumps up.“Eeee,” she says, jumping. And the husband saw her jumping and getting up. “I guess my wife is getting better,” he says. And his wife is standing up, shaking the dirt from her; and she goes north.

― 353 ―

And her husband follows. He is snatching at her in vain. And her husband puts his arms around her; he does not grasp her. When he snatched her, she melted away. He kept doing this while going along. And going far ahead, she says to her husband, “Why are you following me?” And her husband did not speak at his wife's words.

And the two of them keep going north. Already they have gone far. When daylight came, she disappeared. And at his dead wife's disappearance, he went to sleep. And toward dusk, he arose. And the dead one went north. He followed her; her husband went along behind her. He continued this while they were going. And she says to him, “Why do you keep following me? Return!” Her husband does not hear what she is saying. And the two of them keep walking during the night. And at daybreak he went to sleep where his wife disappeared. And again evening comes. And the dead one gets up and walks. And they continue, her husband following her.“Return!” she says to her husband.

And when they arrive at the bridge, [she says], “Don't get frightened. Crow will yell at us; Quail will fly; they will scare us. Don't be frightened at Quail's flying. Perhaps you will fall in the water and become a sturgeon.” And her husband replies, “Yes. I don't think I shall fall in.” And the woman went ahead; she crossed the bridge and arrived on the other side. And while she was looking back at her husband, he took a step on the bridge. And he shook the bridge, and he crossed over and reached his wife on the other side. And while they were going along, she advised her husband, “Don't follow me! You had better stay back there! Don't go in where the dancers are! You must stay back!” she says to the husband.

And the two of them arrived there where the dead people are. He follows his wife in vain. He is stopped.“That is a live man. Stop!” said the Captain to him. He grasps [the man] with his hand. And being spoken to, he stopped there; he stared at his wife. And when his wife reached the place where the dead people were dancing, she went in. And he stared at his wife.

And he is troubled there on his heart.“I am hungry,” he says there on his heart. And the dead Captain heard his worrying there on his heart. And

― 354 ―

the Captain says to him, “Why are you troubled? You are hungry; you say you are troubled. Now I shall give you some food.” And he gave him acorn mush full of acorn-heads. And he is troubled there on his heart.“I don't think I'll get full on this. There is too little.” The Captain says to him, “Don't worry about that. You will get full soon.” And he drinks the acorn mush. And while he was drinking it, it emptied; and again it filled up. He keeps worrying all the time; doing this, he gets full.“Here! I am already full doing this. Take your food away!” he says to [the Captain].

And he saw his wife dancing; he stared at his wife. And it became morning; and the dead dancers disappeared. And her husband sits all day where he had been standing. All the dead ones disappeared.

At sunset the messengers wake up. They call out; they are busy among themselves; they build a fire; they run around looking for wood. Some of them have already made a fire. Some [of the dead] have already emerged from the fire; they have already sat down, ready for their dance. And when the Captain saw it, he arose next to the place where the live man was. And the dead people emerged. And the messengers made a fire for the dead Captain. And the dead people danced.

And the Captain said to him, “Will you recognize your wife?” “Yes, I think I shall recognize my wife,” he said to him. “If you will recognize your wife, then you will bring her [out].”

And there were five dead women, similar to one another. And they looked like recently dead women, but they had been dead a long time. The five dead women were alike beautiful. And the recently dead woman put on her dress. And the Captain said to him, “Recognize your wife!” “Yes, I shall recognize my wife,” [said the husband].

At his saying this, the six women came out. They are very similar! In the middle, that recently dead woman was placed. And her husband saw her. And having come out, they danced around him. “Can you recognize your wife?” “Yes,” he said. “Let us see. Go get your wife and bring her.” And the one who was told went straight to his wife; he grasped her on the arm. “Come!” he said to his wife, looking back. “We shall go to the Captain.”

― 355 ―

And he brought his wife along to the Captain. “Yes,” said the Captain. “Sit down!” And she sat by the side of her husband; and the Captain said to them, “You will go home.” And they [started to] return. “Wait a little while! Listen to my words!” he said to them. And he advised them, “After arriving at your house, you must not have sexual intercourse for ten days. If you do so before ten days, you [the husband] will return here quickly. You must finish all the days as I am advising. And you will tell your people what you have seen here. You will tell your people, ‘I have seen the dead.’”

And after he said that, they went to the road on which they had come; and they crossed the bridge that they had crossed before; and they went to sleep where they had slept before. And they walked all night; and they went to sleep during the day. [They continued this way until] near dusk they reached the place where she had died.

And in the morning he arose and got his people, his father. “I shall tell you what I saw where I went.” And his father said, “Yes. Tell what you have seen!” And he related, “I saw many dead ones. They had a good time; they were always dancing; they had a lively time. Our life here is bad. I shall tell you everything that I saw.” And his father said, “Yes, my son, tell everything that you saw there.” [But] he did not tell [them], “Ten days have been counted for me.” He did not relate that he was told, “Don't have sexual intercourse.”

And after eight days he wanted to have sexual intercourse; and she would not permit him. [But] when there remained only one day to complete, she permitted him. After having sexual intercourse, he died.

And it became daylight. And his father said, “Tell your older brother to get up!” And being spoken to by her father, [the husband's] younger sister went. “Get up, Older Brother!” He did not wake up. “What's the matter with my older brother? I think he died.” And his father came and shook him. “Wake up, my Son!” [But] he did not get up. “My son died,” he said.

And they mourned, and his son was buried; he had died. And that is all.

― 356 ―

CONDOR STEALS FALCON'S WIFE

YOWLUMNI YOKUTSROSS ELLIS

There they were living, above X6lmiu (Clover Place) at the foot of this mountain. Their leaders are thinking about their meeting. And Eagle said, “Tell Cougar and Big Eagle and his friend, the large Crow, and their crier, Dove, and Coyote and Falcon and Wolf.” And Coyote was sent. Now he is going to assemble the people. “In seven days we will assemble.” Now they will be told—Wind and Thunder and Dog too. And Coyote informed them, and Wind said, “Of course I can go anywhere. But tell Thunder. Will he go?” And, “I'm not sure that he can,” he added.

And the seven days came, and already all the people were assembling there. And Thunder did not come. The booming noise he makes is useless; he can't walk. And Coyote went to him. And he questioned him, and Thunder said, “I can't go anywhere. Tell my friend and he will come.” And Wind went to him, and there he arrived. And he said to him, “What's the matter with you! Aren't you able to walk? Haven't I been telling you, I'll see to it that you will go where they want you? Are you ready to leave now?” he says to him. “Stand up now, and you will speak,” he says to him. “Ready?” Wind says to him. “Yes,” then says Thunder. “Speak now,” he says to him. “Will we go now?” And Thunder spoke. Just as soon as he spoke, the two of them walked o.

And they arrived there immediately, and their leader, Eagle, said to him, “Have you arrived already?” he says to him. And [Thunder] said to him, “This gathering of ours is certainly a small one. How is that?” Thunder says. “These are important people. I am thinking about our going west,” says Eagle. “All the seeds are now getting ripe again.” “Good,” they say. “But who will go to look them over?” they say. “Antelope,” they say. And Antelope said, “In the morning I will go.” And he went, and there he arrived. To his surprise, there were a great many seeds. And he took a great many; he placed them in both his feet. And he arrived after sundown.

And, as before, Coyote assembled the people, and all the people assembled. A large covering was already spread over the ground. On it he is

― 357 ―

now going to pour his load. And he poured it, and they said, “There is certainly a lot.” And, “Count these important people,” they say to Dove. Now they are going to divide it. And each of them took his share, and the unimportant ones took what was left, and all of them were pleased. Having taken their food, all of them will now prepare it. And Falcon's friend, Crow, ate a lot of black seeds, and he turned black. “Well,” says their leader, “in seven days we will go.”

Now they are going to gather food. And the seven days arrived, and some of them asked their leader, “In how many days will we return?” “In three days.” And they said, “There is food enough for our children.”

And all the people went, and there they arrived; and they got many seeds. And in three days they returned.

And Falcon probably got a great many. And he said to his wife, “I'll take some of this, and I'll come right back.” And his wife was working; she was getting more. And the woman heard him coming. She looks about, but she does not see anything. And Condor alighted close to her, and after alighting he said to her, “Are you the wife of my younger brother?” he says to her. “Is he your younger brother?” she says to him. “Yes,” he says. “His name is Tsopnix.” And the woman said to him, “What is your name?” she says. “Condor,” he says. “So we will go now,” Condor says to her. He says to her, “Take o your necklace.” Her necklace was money—small beads and big dark beads and small bone beads. And she said, “No!” but it was useless. “Why should I?” she says to him. “I'm afraid he'll be angry,” she says to him. “No,” she says. “We will go now,” [Condor said]. He took her away by force.

And then Falcon arrived after they had gone, and he couldn't find his wife. And in vain he looked for their footprints. He found nothing. And from there he returned. And he arrived at the leader's house, and the leader said to him, “Why are you alone?” “I can't find her,” he says. And the leader said, “I think she has been stolen from you. Now we'll assemble the people,” the leader says to him. And he sent Dove. “Assemble the people,” he says. And Dove got all the people. “Falcon's wife has been stolen,” he says. “Now Eagle will ask the people,” he says. “Who's going to find her?” he says.

― 358 ―

And all the people assembled, and he asked all of them, “Who can find out where she went?” And Buzzard said, “I'll try. But he must take me where she was stolen,” Buzzard said. And there Falcon took him where she was stolen, and there they arrived. “For one day I will search for her,” he says. And Buzzard searched all the ravines. He looks down all the impassable places. He comes down. Where is she hidden? And in vain he goes up again. He finds nothing.

He did not find anything. He worked for one day, and he returned. And, as before, all the people assembled, and they asked him, “What happened on your journey?” “I didn't find anything,” he says. “I walked over the whole world, but it was useless,” he says. “I didn't find anything.”

And the leader said, “Now you,” he says to Wind. “Yes,” says Wind. “I think I can do something. I try to get in everywhere over the whole world,” says Wind. And there Falcon took him, and they arrived there. “Is this it?” says Wind to him. “Yes,” says Falcon. “Well, I'll walk now,” he says. “I will arrive there after sundown,” he says. And Falcon says to him, “Well, I am going now,” he says. And Wind walked over the whole world. He did not find anything. He worked for one day. And he arrived late at the leader's house, and the leader asked him, “What happened on your journey?” he says to him. “I didn't find anything,” he says.

“Now you,” Bottlefly is told. And there Falcon took him, and they arrived there. “Did she go from here?” he says to him. And he stood right there where the woman had been sitting. And he said to Falcon, “You must not go anywhere. You must wait for me right here,” he says to him. And Bottlefly says, “From here I'll find out where she went. I'll turn around here,” he says. “East,” and also, “North,” he says, and also, “West,” and also, “South.” And Falcon said, “Where is she?” he says. “Not there,” Bottlefly says. “She went far up,” he says. “You must wait for me right here,” he says.

And there he went far up, and there he remained. He sni s in all directions. And he turned around, and he saw a house. It was the house of the thief. And there Bottlefly went. And on entering his house, he slipped. He falls on his back. His house was slippery. And it was quiet there. And he saw the woman. From there he returned. He seemed to be very quick.

― 359 ―

He came there where Falcon remained, and he reached Falcon, and Falcon said to him, “Where?” And he said to him, “She is up there.” “I have known it for a long time. I have been thinking,” says Falcon. “It is best that we return, and I will go in the morning.”

And they returned, and they arrived at the leader's house, and the people assembled. Now they will listen to the one who found her. And all the people assembled. And the leader questioned Bottlefly. “The two of us arrived there where she was stolen,” he says. “We arrived there,” he says. “And I couldn't find her east or north or west or south,” he says. “Well! She went above,” he says. “And there I arrived far up,” he says. “There she was,” he says, “that woman.” And Coyote said, “I have known it for a long time,” he says. And he named him. “That is his name,” he says. “Condor,” he says. “All of his body is stone, but his heart can be seen through his back,” he says. And Eagle said to him, “Is he certain to fight us if he comes?” he says; and then he said, “Sparrow Hawk is Falcon's younger brother. Yayil is his name.” And Falcon said, “In the morning I will get her,” he says.

And in the morning Falcon went. He took his musical bow. And far o there he arrived, and there he placed it where his wife had been. And there he sat on his musical bow. And he went up. That musical bow of his took him up.

And far above he came out through a hole in the world, and after coming out he stood there. And there he saw the house. And there he went. And there he arrived at the door, and he said to her, “Come out.” And she said to him, “Who are you?” And Falcon said to her, “It is I.” “So it is you,” she says to him. “Now I will come out,” she says to him, and she came out with a string of human bones around her neck. And Falcon said to her, “Take o your necklace. Now we will go,” he says to her. And from there they went to the place where he had come out, and they arrived there, and there he placed his musical bow. They sat in the middle of it. And from there they descended far below. And from there they went to their house where their leader was. There they arrived. At their arrival, the people are happy.

And then Condor, the fighter, arrived at his house, and there he saw their

― 360 ―

wife's necklace; she had thrown it on the door. And at that he immediately got ready to go. Now he is going to follow his wife. And he descended far below; and from there he went. Now he will go toward them. And far o there he arrived; and he asked them, “Where does Tsopnix live?” he says. And Falcon was told, “Condor is looking for you.” “Has he come already?” he says. “Yes,” says the speaker. And there went Falcon.

All the people are getting very frightened. “Hello,” Tsopnix says to him; “It is really you.” “Hello,” says Condor. “So you took our wife,” he says. “Therefore,” Condor says to him, “therefore, we will settle it between ourselves. If you kill me, then you will take our wife. But if I kill you, then I will take her,” he says. “Which one will shoot first?” he says. “I will be first,” says Falcon.

And they went far o to an open plain. “Ready?” Falcon says to him. And it seems that he conjured up a fog. And “Ready?” says his opponent. And many stones fell where Falcon was standing. And Condor asked him, “Where are you?” his opponent says to him. “I'll take my turn with you. Now I come,” Falcon says to him. And he conjured up a fog again. Soon his younger brother will go in a circle around him. He has many wiregrass [cane] arrows now. He is shooting at the heart through Condor's back. There this heart of his could be seen.“Well, get ready now,” Falcon says to him. “Now I will shoot at you. Three times I will shoot at you,” he says to him. “Ready,” he says to him. “Get ready now. Now I will shoot at you.” And he shot at him. Many stones dropped from his body when he shot. And he shot at him again; and, as before, stones dropped there. And, “Where are you?” Falcon says to him. “Here I am,” he says.

“Now I will take my turn with you. I come next,” Condor says to him. “Good,” says Falcon. “Ready?” he says to him. “Ready,” then says Falcon. His younger brother still keeps shooting at him through his back. And he conjured up a fog again, and many stones dropped where he was standing. And again he went far o to a di erent place. And he says to him, “Where are you?” “I am standing here,” says Falcon.

“And now I will take my turn with you. I will come next again,” Falcon says to him. Already Condor is losing strength. Now he is going to shoot at him again. And a lot of stones fell; they seemed to be very large ones.

― 361 ―

“Again,” Falcon says to him. And he shot at him again. “There is one more,” he says to him. “Now I'll shoot at you again,” he says to him. But [Condor] is already losing strength. And, “Again,” he says to him. And finally he fell down. Yet he does not stop talking. And then they rested. Now he does not get up. Now he has fallen.

And, “What are we going to do with him?” says Coyote. “We will burn him,” say all these people. And all of the people gathered wood. They piled it there where he had fallen, and it was set on fire, and the fire died out. Nothing was burning. “Hello,” says Falcon to him. “Hello,” then says Condor. “So! You are still alive,” Falcon says to him. “There is nothing you can kill me with,” [Condor] says to him. And another kind of wood was gathered; and, as before, it was again piled there where he is lying, and, as before, it was set on fire. It was not burning any longer. “Hello,” Falcon says to him. “It is really you. Hello,” he says to him. “I am well,” he says. “So! You will not die,” Falcon says to him.

And Coyote was asked, “What will we burn him with? He does not burn up,” they say. And, “With grass,” Coyote says; “with that he will burn,” he says. And a lot of grass was brought. Now he will be burned with it. And it was set on fire. And all of his body was burning. But his head still talks.“We have probably killed him now. Leave him right there,” he says.

And they stayed over night. And during the night the head, by itself, went away. His body was not there. And Falcon got the head and took it away. And the head got angry at being taken. Now the head will try many times to harm him. And again Falcon takes it in his hands. Now he is going to keep smashing it down on these stones. And again it kept trying to harm him.

And finally Falcon said, “We had better go to my father's sister.” And Falcon and his wife went o. Now they are going to run away. And the two of them went. And now the head came again. It was trailing them now. And again it overtook them. Again it failed to do any harm to Falcon. And, as before, Falcon took it and kept smashing it down. He broke it in many pieces. And again the two of them went o. And again it overtook them as they were nearing his father's sister's house. And, as before, he again kept smashing it down. And with that the two of them went

― 362 ―

o again. And his father's sister shouted, “Run,” she says to him. “You are coming close now,” she says to him. They were getting very near. And now the head was approaching them again, and already it was overtaking them. Just as it approached, the rock closed shut. Just as it closed, the head arrived there. There the head broke. There it became Echo Rock.

And then Eagle was asked, “Where will you go?” he is asked. “Here in the mountain I am going to roam,” he says then. And Cougar also was asked, “Where will you go?” he is asked. “Here in the mountain I am going to roam,” he says. “I'll kill many deer,” he says. Falcon also says, “I too will walk here in the mountain,” he says. And Coyote was also asked, “Where will you go?” he is asked. “Here I will walk on the plains. Maybe I will steal something there,” he says. And Crow also was asked. “I'll walk west,” he says. “Maybe something will die, and I will eat its eyes,” says Crow. That is the end.

― 363 ―

21. The Contest between Men and Women

TÜBATULABAL
circa 1932MIKE MIRANDA, NARRATORERMINIE WHEELER VOEGELIN, COLLECTOR

INTRODUCTION BY CHRIS LOETHER

The classic myth “The Contest between Men and Women” transcends the cultural milieu of its origins in the universal, timeless appeal of the issue at the heart of the story, the gender roles played out by men and women in human societies.^[1] The story was told to Erminie Wheeler Voegelin, in English, by Mike Miranda during one of her summer fieldtrips to Tübatulabal country in Central California between 1931 and 1933. She had been collecting ethnographic information from Miranda, who oered this myth in answer to her question of whether women had ever had a role in hunting.

Mike Miranda, whose Tübatulabal name was Yukaya, was about fortythree years old at the time he worked with Erminie. Although his mother was from the neighboring Yokuts tribe, his father, Steban Miranda, was the last hereditary chief of the Tübatulabal. (After his father's death in 1955, the Tübatulabal were ruled by a Council of Elders until the early 1970s. At that time they joined with the neighboring Koso Shoshone and

― 364 ―

Kawaiisu tribes to form the Kern Valley Indian Community, which gained tax-exempt status in 1987, though they are still fighting for federal recognition by Congress.)

The Tübatulabal consisted of three bands in aboriginal times: the Pahkanapil, the Palagewan, and the Bankalachi, which occupied three connected valleys formed by the confluence of the Kern River and the South Fork Kern River in the southern Sierra Nevada mountains. The Tübatulabal have no migration myths such as the Mojave and Navajo have; according to their traditions, they have always lived in those three valleys. Linguistic and archaeological findings confirm that they have been right where they now are for a very long time indeed. The archaeological evidence indicates that the Tübatulabal's ancestors probably occupied Kern River territory as early as 1200 b.c. They are clearly distinguished archaeologically at this early time from their Numic-speaking neighbors in terms of settlement patterns, lithic materials, rock art, and milling equipment (Moratto 1984:559). And the comparative linguistic evidence indicates that, by 1500 b.c., the Tübatulabal were already becoming distinct in language from their closest linguistic relatives, the Numic-speaking peoples of the Great Basin, such as the Shoshone, Western Mono (Monache), Owens Valley Paiute, and Kawaiisu.

The Tübatulabal first encountered the whiteman in 1776—ironically, the American year of independence—with the arrival in their territory of two di erent Spanish expeditions. But the people were spared the brunt of outside immigration into Native California until the 1850s, when the California Gold Rush brought hordes of newcomers into their valleys. A turning point (though not a good one) came in 1863, when some thirtyfive to forty innocent Tübatulabal men were massacred by the local white population in retaliation for cattle-raids by Indians in the Owens Valley. After this time it was no longer safe to be a Tübatulabal in Tübatulabal country.

The early California anthropologist Alfred Kroeber estimated the Tübatulabal population to have been between five hundred and one thousand at time of Contact (1925:608), though this figure may be low. By the early 1990s there were approximately four hundred Tübatulabal who still lived in the three valleys, and an additional five hundred living away from the traditional homeland (Holmes-Wermuth 1994:661). As of this writing, there are less than half a dozen fluent speakers of the language.

Culturally the Tübatulabal straddle the border between two Native

― 365 ―

culture areas: California to the west and the Great Basin to the east. The Tübatulabal show influences from both culture areas. In their three valleys the Tübatulabal had access to both acorns (the main staple of California Indian people) and pine-nuts (the main staple of Great Basin Indian people). Influences from these two culture areas seem to permeate all aspects of Tübatulabal culture. Their mythology has been classified as being Great Basin in character (Gayton 1935:588, 595), but their religious rituals and material culture are clearly more similar to their California neighbors, such as the Yokuts. These dual cultural influences are reflected in “The Contest between Men and Women” where, contrary to the norm in Tübatulabal society for each politically independent band to have but one chief, there are two chiefs, Eagle and Coyote. Eagle is the character who is most often the chief in Central California mythology, and Coyote is the culture-hero par excellence of Great Basin mythology.

The Tübatulabal yearly cycle was similar to that of their Sierran neighbors. They spent the winter in permanent villages along the rivers in the three valleys and then migrated to family camps in the mountains during the summer months. Sex roles were strictly determined in Tübatulabal society, with the men hunting and the women gathering. Contact between women and men was strictly limited during certain critical periods—particularly while women were menstruating, and for a severalday period before men went hunting. There were, however, special times when everyone participated in certain food gathering activities, such as fishing in July, the pine-nut harvest in early fall, the acorn harvest in late fall, or occasional rabbit and antelope drives.

Tübatulabal cosmology and worldview were similar to that of their neighbors in that they believed in a previous world that had been inhabited by animals with supernatural powers and very human characteristics. These mythological “animal people” became the animals of this world when the current world, along with humans, was created. The story given here is set in the world of myth-time.

Let us now look at some of the cultural aspects found in the myth itself, which addresses the age-old question of why the sexes play di erent roles that seem in some way inherently predetermined. In this myth, it appears that men and women were created equal in the beginning, since the story hints that, were it not for Coyote's magic at the last moment, the division of labor might well have turned out di erently.

As the story opens, we find the men all living by themselves. While

― 366 ―

they are out hunting all day, Coyote stays home, gathering and stacking wood for each man's camp. (Coyote here is playing the traditional role of the berdache, the man who stays in camp and does women's work, such as gathering and preparing food, and therefore must wear women's clothes.) What is notable is that the men know only how to hunt—there is no mention of any plant foods (the product of women's labor) in their camp. The women, on the other hand, who are also living by themselves, enjoy both hunted and gathered foods.

When the men discover the women's camp, they send Road Runner to investigate.^[2] Interestingly enough, after Road Runner has arrived in the women's camp and been o ered food to eat, it is the chia, a plant food, that makes him sick. Despite its thematic symbolism, though, the scene where Road Runner loses his lunch also happens to be one of the best comic moments in the story:

	Pretty soon he vomited—
	oh, vomited!—
	and everything came up;
	Lizard came up;
	he vomited Lizard and the chia too.
	Lizard,
	he chased all those women;
	they got up,
	and ran,
	and those women said,
	“What kind of food does this man eat?” they said.

The women, a sensible crew overall, are clearly disgusted by this startling turn of events. On top of it all, Lizard, once on the loose again, starts running around like a sex-starved maniac when he sees all the women standing around gaping at Road Runner.

After three days, the women move to the men's camp. Now begins the big adjustment for the men (which, one can argue, is still being played out among humans today). At first they take turns with the daily tasks. First the men go hunting, while the women stay at home and prepare the acorn, pine-nuts, and other plant foods. Next the women hunt, and the men stay at home. Unlike the previous day, though, the women are all successful in their hunting; furthermore, most of the men have problems in preparing the plant foods. This leads to a lot of grumbling on

― 367 ―

the part of the men, especially Coyote, who devises the final “shooting contest” to determine who gets to go out hunting and who has to stay at home to grind seeds.^[3]

The women in this myth seem to be inherently superior, in overall competence, to the men. This portrayal in turn sets up the comic necessity for Coyote to have to “cheat” in order to win the contest, thereby garnering for men the “right” to hunt and establishing for all time the division of labor between the sexes—the gender roles that characterize Tübatulabal society in their native world. The Tübatulabal have traditionally believed that they should model their behavior on that of the previous world, because the mythological animal people were so much more powerful and knowledgeable than humans are today. After all, myths (in any culture) not only explain the origins of the world as we know it, but also validate its status quo.

Just as every story has a purpose, every storyteller has a reason for telling a particular story at a particular moment to a particular audience. This time, the story wasn't told to a Native Tübatulabal audience, but was told in English to a female anthropologist, who wrote it down in a notebook in the course of collecting ethnographic information. Before the advent of recording equipment, taking down a text was a very tedious and time-consuming process, involving constant breaks in the flow of the narration. Despite these difficult conditions, Mike Miranda managed to keep his mind in his story and present a coherent text, formally structured and richly detailed, with its comic flair intact.

One is always tempted to look for the storyteller in the story itself. If Mike Miranda is “in there” at all—his cultural beliefs, his chiefly family background, his sense of the world—it is probably his gift for humor that is best revealed in “The Contest between Men and Women.”

NOTES

1. The only published source for this myth is in Erminie Voegelin's ethnography of the Tübatulabal (1937:53–55). The version of the story that appears here is taken from the Charles F. and Erminie Voegelin Papers (1931–1933: 26–31) in the Bancroft Library at Berkeley. The two versions are virtually the same in text; the only significant change from either involves the presentational form of the story as it appears in this volume. The ragged-line format was discerned by the

― 368 ―

editor, Herbert Luthin, based strictly on the transparently prosodic punctuation patterns in Erminie Voegelin's prose transcription. Punctuation therefore follows prosodic-intonational contours, rather than the usage rules of formal written English. (The paragraph boundaries of the original typescript are indicated by the conjunction of a line space and a flush-left margin.) Finally, in the Bancroft typescript, Voegelin notes occasional accompanying gestures and other performance cues that she recorded at various points in the story. These gesture notes, or their likely content, are presented in the right margin of the text.

2. We have opted not to normalize Erminie's rather charming spelling of Roadrunner's name.—HWL

3. This contest seems similar in some ways to public contests that were traditionally held between shamans to show o their skills and instill respect and awe in the lay population.

The Contest between Men and Women

	There were a lot of people living,
	and Eagle and Coyote were chiefs—
	and all of them were men;
	there were no women.

― 369 ―

	And they hunted rabbits;
	every day.
	Coyote stayed home every time they went;
	he never went hunting,
	he just hauled wood for them;
	he hauled wood for every camp.
	That's all Coyote did all the time.

	And when they got tired of rabbits, you know,
	they went to hunt deer for a change.
	And when all of them went to hunt deer the next day they
	went farther o,
	way up in the mountains.
	And they saw smoke from there,
	way across up on another mountain.
	And they said,
	“Maybe somebody is living over there—
	people.”
	And one of them said,
	“I think we should tell Coyote about it,
	when we get home tonight.”
	That's what he said.

	And they came home in the evening;
	every one had a deer,
	and Coyote had all the wood,
	piled up at every camp.
	And they cut a little piece of meat,
	every one,
	and gave it to Coyote for his work.
	Coyote ate that.

	And pretty soon they told Coyote after supper,
	“We saw smoke from the top of the mountain,
	across on a mountain,
	far away.”

	And Coyote said,
	“Maybe somebody is over there;
	let's send somebody tomorrow and find out.”

― 370 ―

	And they picked one man;
	they said,
	“This fellow—
	Road Runner.
	He goes fast,” they said.

	And next morning Road Runner went,
	after breakfast,
	and those fellows went again,
	to hunt deer.
	And Coyote stayed home,
	and hauled wood for the camp.

	And that fellow, he went; [gesturing]
	he went way up on the mountain,
	and when he saw Lizard running quickly,
	close to him,
	Road Runner ran close, [gesturing]
	grabbed Lizard,
	picked him up,
	and ate him.
	Lizard was his life, I think—
	Road Runner just swallowed him.

	And those women—
	lots of women over there at a big pit mortar bed— [nodding]
	a long one;
	and there lots of women were grinding pine-nuts.
	They were all sitting down there,
	grinding them.
	There were no men;
	all women.

	And pretty soon one woman said,
	“Oh!” she said,
	“the edge of my vagina is shaking,”
	and they laughed;
	all laughed.
	And pretty soon another woman over there said, [pointing]
	“Oh! Mine too.

― 371 ―

	The edge of my vagina is shaking.”
	Pretty soon somebody said,
	“Maybe somebody is coming;
	some man is coming.”
	And they said,
	“Maybe.”

	And then one of these women looked that way and saw one
	man coming. [nodding]
	She said,
	“You see.
	I told you,
	somebody is coming,
	coming over there now.”

	And Road Runner saw those women,
	lots of women;
	he saw those women sitting down there,
	all of them.
	And Road Runner came there;
	he said, “Hello!”

	All those women said, “Hello,”
	and they asked him what he was doing way up there.
	And Road Runner said,
	“Those fellows saw smoke yesterday,” he said,
	“from a long way across the mountain;
	and they told me to come and find out if somebody
	were living here.
	All of them are men over there,” he said.
	“And here no men,”
	they told Road Runner;
	“all women.”

	And pretty soon they all of them got up,
	and they called to Road Runner,
	“Come on;
	come on down to the house,”
	and Road Runner went with them.

― 372 ―

	When they came down to the house,
	they told Road Runner,
	“Come in,”
	and they took a big basket—
	homol, you know—
	and they mixed chia in there,
	about full,
	and they gave it to that man,
	to eat;
	and a piece of meat:
	deer meat.

	And Road Runner drank it all, you see,
	and when he was through eating,
	he sat down there for a while,
	and pretty soon the chia made him sick;
	he felt like vomiting,
	that man.
	Pretty soon he vomited—
	oh, vomited!—
	and everything came up;
	Lizard came up;
	he vomited Lizard and the chia too. [grmacing]
	Lizard,
	he chased all those women;
	they got up,
	and ran,
	and those women said,
	“What kind of food does this man eat?” they said.
	Lizard was alive, you know.

	And those women came back after the man got all right;
	the man recovered, you know;
	and those women came back.

	And one woman went into the house and brought chia seeds,
	tied up in a little bag.
	She said,
	“When you get home,

― 373 ―

	give this to that Mountain Lion Man,” she said.
	And Road Runner said,
	“All right.”

	(That's a Mountain Lion Woman—
	all that company of women,
	were all di erent—
	Hawk Woman,
	Mountain Lion Woman,
	Coyote Woman.
	And it was just the same over there— [pointing]
	Mountain Lion Man,
	Hawk Man,
	and all the rest.)

	And another woman—
	Hawk Woman—
	came out,
	and she had the same thing,
	a little bag of acorns.
	She gave it to that man;
	“When you get home you give this to that Hawk Man.”
	Road Runner said, “All right.”

	Well.
	All of them gave that man a little bag for those fellows.
	Road Runner said, “All right.”
	And last of all came one big woman,
	a fat woman;
	she had a little bag,
	and she said,
	“You give this to Coyote.”

	And those women said,
	“After three days we will go over there;
	three days from now we will all go over there.”
	Road Runner said, “All right,”
	and set o for home;
	he had a big load.

― 374 ―

	And Coyote, over there— [pointing]
	Coyote looks all the time to watch for Road Runner's
	return;
	he is in a hurry,
	he wants to see.
	He goes up a hill and looks,
	every little while,
	to see when Road Runner returns.

	Then he saw Road Runner coming,
	in the evening.
	Coyote went over to meet him;
	he was curious.
	Coyote said,
	“Did you find out,
	about everything over there?”
	And Road Runner said,
	“Oh,” he said,
	“You'd better wait;
	you don't want to find out now;
	you'd better wait.”

	Coyote just came alongside of Road Runner;
	he said,
	“Hurry up— [whispering]
	you'd better tell me!”
	Road Runner said,
	“Wait,
	until those fellows come home.
	Then you'll find out,” he said.

	Pretty soon those fellows came in in the evening;
	those men.
	And after supper they all gathered together;
	they are going to find out now.
	And Road Runner said,
	“They are all women over there,
	lots of them.
	And they gave me little bags,” he said.

― 375 ―

	“They told me to give them to you.”
	(Well,
	maybe that's a present—
	something,
	you know,
	to give to the men.)

	Road Runner gave all those men what the women had given
	him;
	Road Runner told those men,
	“Those women said they were going to come,
	in three days,”
	and Coyote said,
	“Good, good, good!” said Coyote. [laughing]

	And after three days, those women came,
	after three days.
	Every one of them had a load;
	some had acorns,
	chia,
	pine-nuts,
	all kinds;
	all di erent seeds.
	And all of them had bows and arrows;
	all of them had arrows,
	all those women.
	And Road Runner went to meet those women, you see;
	he was going to tell them about each man,
	where each was living, you see—
	in which house.

	And Road Runner said,
	“There's that Mountain Lion Man's house over there;
	he is living over there,”
	and Mountain Lion Woman went over there.
	“And there's Hawk's house over there—
	Hawk's,”
	and Hawk Woman went over there.
	All those women,

― 376 ―

	every one,
	went this way, [points]
	and that way, [points]
	and the last one—
	oh!—
	a big woman,
	came,
	and Road Runner said,
	“There's Coyote's house,
	way over there,” [pointing]
	and the big woman went over there.

	The next day all those men went hunting, you know,
	and those women,
	all of them went to grind acorns,
	and chia, you know.
	And those men returned in the evening,
	and those women had everything ready,
	all cooked,
	and those men came home and ate.

	And the next day those women told those men,
	“We are going to hunt now,
	and you men go grind some acorns”;
	they told those men that, you know.

	And those women returned in the evening and they had deer,
	every one of them, you know—
	those women.
	And those men,
	some of them,
	had gotten through early;
	they had returned home,
	and some of them were still over there,
	cooking acorns, you know—
	they didn't know how to very well, you know.

	And came sundown;
	Coyote hadn't come home yet;
	he was still up at the pit mortar working.

― 377 ―

	Coyote was pretty mad;
	at sundown he hadn't come home yet,
	and his wife went over there,
	to help her man.
	And they got through,
	and came home.

	And the next day all the men went up on the hill to hunt,
	and all the women went to grind acorns;
	all of the men went to hunt deer,
	Coyote too.
	He didn't haul any more wood;
	he went to hunt deer.

	When they got way up in the mountains,
	Coyote said,
	“You fellows wait,” he said.
	“We are going to talk about those women,” he said,
	and they stopped.
	And Coyote said,
	“These women,
	they have arrows,
	and they hunt,
	and they send us over there to grind acorns,”
	Coyote said.
	“That's not right,” he said.
	“I think women better handle the mortar,” he said,
	(you know,
	where they grind pine-nuts—)
	“that's just right for them;
	that's woman's work,” he said.
	“Not man's,” he said.

	“And tomorrow,”
	Coyote said,
	“we are going to talk;
	to have a big talk,” he said;
	“we are going to shoot at a target,” he said.
	“If those women win,

― 378 ―

	then they can handle the arrow,” he said,
	Coyote said.
	“If we win,
	then we keep hunting and handle the arrow,
	and women keep handling the mortars,
	all the time.”

	And everybody said,
	“All right,
	we'll do that.”

	When they returned home in the evening,
	after supper Coyote told those men and women,
	everybody,
	to gather;
	he said,
	“We are going to have a big talk here.”
	And Coyote told them all,
	“Tomorrow we are going to shoot a target;
	if you women win then you can handle the arrows and
	we can handle the mortars,
	and grind acorns,” he said.
	“But this way,
	you women hunt and we handle the mortars;
	that's not right,”
	said Coyote.
	“That's woman's work,” he said.

	“Tomorrow morning,”
	Coyote said,
	“I will put up a target over there;
	we will shoot,” he said.
	Those women said,
	“All right.”

	And Coyote didn't sleep that night, you know;
	he got up,
	at midnight;
	he went way up on top of the mountain, you know,
	and built a fire way up on top.

― 379 ―

	And when he came back home he said,
	“You fellows get up now;
	the morning star is up now;
	you get up,
	hurry.”

	And Road Runner looked and said,
	“Oh, that's not the morning star over there;
	that's a fire you built up there on top of the mountain,
	you devil,”
	Road Runner said.
	Coyote said,
	“Hurry up!”
	but everybody went back to sleep again.

	And when daylight came they all got up;
	and after breakfast Coyote went out,
	and set a target over there,
	and Coyote said,
	“Everybody line up,” he said,
	“get ready.”
	And one of those women,
	Mountain Lion Woman,
	was a pretty good shooter,
	pretty hard to beat with an arrow.

	And every woman stood here with her husband,
	and they were going to shoot together,
	each woman and her husband, [gesturing]
	at the same time.
	And Coyote and his wife stood way over there on the edge.
	And Coyote said,
	“I'm going first;
	I'm going to shoot first.” [laughing]
	He wanted to win, you know. [laughs]

	And Coyote said,
	“You ready?”
	and his wife said,
	“Yes,”

― 380 ―

	and they shot.
	And they never hit the target;
	Coyote missed the target,
	and his wife too;
	they didn't hit the target.

	Coyote said,
	“Next,
	ready,” he said,
	and the next two shot,
	and they never hit the target.
	And all of them missed;
	just two,
	Mountain Lion and his wife,
	had not yet shot.
	And Coyote said,
	“You fellows next,”
	and then Coyote,
	he came round to Mountain Lion;
	he told Mountain Lion,
	“You shoot good; [gesturing]
	your wife is a good one,
	but you shoot good,” he said.

	And when they were ready to shoot,
	one man shot— [pantomimes drawing bow]
	that was Mountain Lion,
	and his wife shot too.
	Coyote said,
	“Break,
	you string,
	break!”
	and Mountain Lion Woman's string broke,
	and her arrow went to one side.
	And that Mountain Lion,
	Mountain Lion hit right in the center;
	that man hit it.
	And those women lost, you know;
	the men won.
	Coyote said,

― 381 ―

	“Now,” he said,
	“all right;
	you women handle the mortars,” he said,
	“we will handle the arrows,” he said.
	“We are men,”
	said Coyote.

	And those men won,
	and lived there.
	That's the end.

― 382 ―

22. The Dog Girl

INESEÑO CHUMASH 1913MARÍA SOLARES, NARRATORJ. P. Harrington, COLLECTORRICHARD APPLEGATE, TRANSLATOR

INTRODUCTION BY KATHRYN KLAR

The Chumash occupied the territory of Coastal California from about Paso Robles and San Luis Obispo in the north down to Malibu (a Ventureño name, humaliwo ‘place where the waves make noise’) in the south. The first known recording of any California Indian language was made by the Catalonian soldier Pedro Fages (probably in May 1772); the language for which Fages recorded some seventy vocabulary items from the “natives of the mission of San Luís and twenty leagues round about there” was what is now called Obispeño Chumash. Although Alfred Kroeber asserted the relationship of the Chumash languages in the first decade of the last century, a definitive grouping of the family had to await the perusal of John P. Harrington's fieldnotes in the 1970s. The Chumash family turns out to have been remarkably diverse, with three main languages (Northern, Central, and Island), each group consisting of one or more dialects with salient distinguishing features. Northern Chumash

― 383 ―

(two dialects) is very di erent from any of its cognates, and Island Chumash (one dialect) is also quite distinct from Central Chumash (four or more dialects); but regular phonological correspondences can be adduced for all the languages, and an outline of the protolanguage can be tentatively reconstructed. This pattern argues for a great time depth for the family and, by extension, a long occupation of some or all of the historical territory. The same things that still attract residents and visitors to this part of California (fine climate, beautiful scenery, and an abundance of marine and terrestrial resources) enabled the Chumash to live beyond mere subsistence. Their culture was technologically and verbally sophisticated, and the land supported a dense population organized into towns headed by chiefs, both male and female.

Chumash language and culture, broadly construed, was the field to which John P. Harrington gave his greatest and most continuous e orts; from 1912 until his death in 1961, there is no great stretch of time in which he was not engaged in some aspect of his Chumash work. Harrington's name looms so large in Chumash studies that it is sometimes hard to remember that, without the phalanx of workers who came after him and diligently deciphered his fieldnotes, almost none of the material he collected and reworked would be available or usable to Native people, scholars, or the general public. Those who work with the Chumash linguistic materials and stories Harrington collected are, perforce, a specific variety of researcher known as a philologist (“one who is fond of words or learning”). Their “field” is not the last speakers of Chumash languages or the best storytellers or the finest basketmakers; rather, the philologists work with the papers, wax cylinders, and aluminum discs on which Harrington the fieldworker recorded his consultants' information about these things. There is no way ever to add another word or sentence to the Chumash corpus, but the philological work of organization and analysis will ensure that Harrington's vast corpus can be utilized to its fullest. Any discussion of this material thus implicitly recognizes the contribution of those who have brought it to publishable form as necessary partners in the grand endeavor in which Harrington was engaged throughout most of his life.

Harrington was born in Waltham, Massachusetts, in 1884. The family—father Elliott, mother Mary Lydia, John, and younger brother Robert—moved (probably for reasons of Elliott's health) to Pasadena, California, in 1891. They then moved to Santa Barbara in 1892, where

― 384 ―

the family established a home in the city that remained Harrington's main base of operations throughout his life. Following his graduation from Stanford University in 1905, Harrington spent his wanderjahr studying at the Universities of Leipzig and Berlin with linguistic giants such as Eduard Sievers and Karl Brugmann. He evidently planned to return to study with Franz Nikolaus Finck in Berlin, to whom he became close during this German year; the plan was cut short by Finck's untimely death in 1910. At this point, Harrington was seriously considering extended fieldwork among the languages of the Caucasus. Finck, both personally and through his published writings, may have been instrumental in shaping the young Harrington in his characteristic way of approaching unfamiliar languages. Finck's 1899 work on an Irish Gaelic dialect, Die araner Mundart (The dialect of the Aran Islands), is based upon the result of a brief, intensive period of living “in the field” with the islanders in the remote western extreme of Ireland. Finck stressed the need for work with remote dialects, even of relatively well-known languages (as Gaelic was at the time), in order to carry out comprehensive comparative work on related languages. These ideas are features of Harrington's work throughout his life.

Between 1906 and 1912, Harrington cast about for a purpose in life. He never seemed to want to venture far from his boyhood home for long (his letters home from Germany are touchingly domestic), and among other things, he taught modern languages (German and Russian) at Santa Ana High School, worked on Mojave and Yuman (at Kroeber's behest), worked in several southwest fields in connection with employment at the School of American Archaeology, helped Edgar Lee Hewett prepare exhibits for the 1915 Panama-California Exposition in San Diego, and gave several series of summer lectures on anthropology and linguistics in Colorado and Washington State. He considered some academic options: further study in Germany, a graduate fellowship in anthropology at Berkeley (arranged by Kroeber, but turned down by Harrington), work on Caucasian languages, and graduate study at the University of Chicago. In 1912, however, for some reason (had he heard that Kroeber was busy in the Chumash area?) he returned home and began the work that formed a focal point for much of the rest of his life: his Chumash fieldwork. He worked on every Chumash dialect for which he could find a speaker, in a frenetic attempt to record everything. He and his new bride, Carobeth, spent their June 1916 honeymoon working on Obispeño and Purisimeño!

― 385 ―

FIGURE 10. María Solares. Photograph by J. P. Harrington. Courtesy Smithsonian Institution.

Harrington did most of his Ineseño work between about 1914 and 1919. About his principal consultant, María Isabel del Refugio Solares, little is known; there is no good, extensive source of information on the fieldwork with her, only the linguistic notes themselves. She was born in 1842 at Monterey, and died in 1923, probably in Santa Inez. That she was a fluent Ineseño speaker and a master storyteller is clear from her story “The Dog Girl.” She also apparently spoke some Purisimeño, though Harrington never recorded any text in that dialect from her or anyone else.

So much material has been preserved in various Chumash languages that we have an opportunity rare in California, that of getting some idea of both the range and depth of cultural experience and verbal dexterity of the people. “The Dog Girl” is the merest drop of this material; but like a drop of honey, it is very satisfying and leaves one craving more. Because the story has been left, as closely as the translator is able, in the style in which it was told, one senses the rhythm of the storyteller's art and the hearer's reception. As Leanne Hinton noted (about Yahi) in her

― 386 ―

introduction to Ishi's Tale of Lizard,“Some phrases are repeated a lot, and there is a rhythm in the telling that make it something like a poem. Read it out loud if you have a chance to: it sounds best that way.” This applies as well to this story. It was paraphrased in Thomas Blackburn's December's Child (an extremely rich collection of Chumash narrative folklore), but because Blackburn worked only with Harrington's notes in translation, the full linguistic richness of the text was not realized. Blackburn's long, conjoined, written-English phrases are not characteristic of the Chumash oral storytelling style (as indeed they are not characteristic even of English oral style).

The short Chumash-language passage that follows (the nine opening lines that constitute the introductory scene of “The Dog Girl”) should give readers a better sense of María's storytelling style, which can be formal, comic, and moving by turns. Here, the most striking rhetorical feature lies in the careful disposition of her phrases and the stately, almost processional rhythm that results:

Sikk'um'ewaš ahuču:	There were some very poor dogs;
šiyaqyaquyepš ašiyaš$i$n;	they scavenged to eat;
ma'uš'uškuyaš' šiyaqiyepš.	refuse, they scavenged.
Wahač' ač'ič'ihi':	There were lots of children:
kasilunan',	they grew,
siyoq^h o yila'.	they were all thin.
Šiyuxnišukutačìš:	They were quick to stand:
siyuqmawil;	they were su ering;
šiyaquyepš as^h ese'.	they scavenged bones.

The fine, formal balance of this passage, based on increments of three, is readily apparent.

As Hinton said of Ishi's story, María's tale is something like a poem, with short narrative episodes full of concrete imagery strung together without a wasted word. Repetitions punctuate the narrative and draw attention to important actions.^[1] This technique demands close attention by listeners; nothing is overtly explained, and the sequence of events must be closely observed. The tale is meant to be heard; take Hinton's advice, and your enjoyment—and understanding—will increase immeasurably.

― 387 ―

NOTE

1. Readers will find a more extended discussion of the poetics of repetition in “The Dog Girl” in the essay “Making Texts, Reading Translations” (this volume)—HWL

The Dog Girl

	There were some very poor dogs:
	they scavenged to eat;
	refuse, they scavenged.
	There were lots of children:
	they grew,
5	they were all thin.
	They were quick to make themselves stand: [] The idiomatic meaning of this line is unknown. The Chumash text reads šiy-uxni-šukuta-č$i$š: šiy- … č$i$š ‘3 PL. RFLX’, uxni-‘quickly’, su-kuta'* ‘to cause to stand’ (literally, then, something like ‘They quickly made themselves to stand’). A wild guess as to the lost meaning of the expression might be “They were quick to beg”—but this interpretation makes some unverifiable assumptions, however plausible, about the way the Chumash interacted with their dogs.—HWL
	they were su ering;
	they scavenged bones.

	One of the children (she was already grown)
10	climbed a range of hills,
	and she saw many people.
	The men were playing the hoop game.
	There she sat:
	she watched the people.
15	She said: “So many people,
	so many people!
	A town!”
	They called out: “Come, come!”
	She didn't go down.
20	She said: “Tomorrow I'll go down there.”

When it was evening she went home.

― 389 ―

	She told her mother, she said:
	“Many people I saw;
25	they were calling to me,” she said.
	“I didn't go.”
	Said her mother: “Why didn't you go?
	Weren't they indulgent with you? [] Harrington's notes provide a Spanish gloss for this line: no te chiquéas!* ‘Don't indulge (adorn?) yourself’. However, the Chumash text reads 'inišamuštiktikus, which means something like ‘They were not indulgent with her’, making this a narrative line, not a line of dialogue. The Spanish gloss has been followed in this instance, because it appears to flow better and may have represented a revision on the narrator's part.—RA
	You're going to disgrace yourself.
30	Go on over there.”
	“I'll go tomorrow.” the girl said
	“Come here so I can comb you— her mother said
	you will be going where there are people.”
	She combed her,
35	she readied her by combing:
	the dog was beautiful.

	Next day the girl got up before dawn. [†] With respect to this and the preceding line, note that the dog girl is referred to sometimes as “the dog” and sometimes as “the girl”—perhaps depending on which aspect of the dog girl's character the narrator is emphasizing or sympathizing with at any given point in the story.—RA
	“Take heart,” said her mother,
	“Don't disgrace yourself!
40	You will see fine people.”

	She went,
	she came to her spot.
	They saw her,
	they called out to her:
45	“Quick, quick! Come, come!”
	She went to them;
	they went to meet her.
	It was good:
	the girl was beautiful,
50	she was pretty.

― 390 ―

	“Come, come! Eat something!”
	They took her to the chief's house; [*] This was the old custom that a stranger was taken to the chief's house and given food, etc.—JPH
	they gave her food. [†] For some reason this line was crossed out by Harrington.—RA
	She saw the food:
55	acorn mush, islay, chia,
	many kinds of food;
	fish, deer meat—
	the hunters would go out to hunt,
	and bring it to the chief's house. [‡] Informant added that men were also in former times sent to the beach to bring? ušqoyičaš ‘shellfish’. They brought it to the captain's house, whereupon the chief paid them and women cooked it up for the people.—JPH
60	They gave her food.
	She ate:
	there was a lot of food;
	she got full.

	In the evening she said:
65	“I have to go home already.”
	She was very full.
	They said to her:
	“Be content,
	come back!”

	Back at her house, she vomited. 70
	The children ate it;
	the mother ate it, too.
	She said to her: the girl to her mother
	“It's not enough,
75	not a lot of food.” [§] Literally, ‘it's not good, lots of food’, which doesn't quite make sense, though the words are simple and unambiguous. Perhaps ‘This [referring to the dog-like act of regurgitation] is not good—[there was] lots of food’, an interpretation that would tie in with the theme of dog behavior being “shameful”—in which case, the following line (“I made a mistake”) might be interpreted as ‘Sorry daughter, I was acting like a dog’.—RA
	“My poor child,
	I made a mistake.” said her mother

― 391 ―

	“I will go again tomorrow.” said the girl
	“Be of good cheer; said her mother
80	I will comb you,
	come quick so I can comb you.”

	She went, in the morning
	she sat down again at her spot.
	They called: “Come, come!”
85	The chief's son took a fancy to the girl.
	The chief's son no sooner saw her
	than he took a fancy to her,
	he fell in love with her.
	He didn't speak to her,
90	he just looked.
	To his mother he said:
	“Mother, I like this girl.”

That was the custom of the ancient people long ago.

	He said to his mother:
95	“I like the girl.”
	The old woman said:
	“Good,
	I will speak to her, my son.”

	As soon as the girl came, the old woman called her.
100	She said to her:
	“Be quick to eat,
	eat something!”
	As soon as she had eaten, she said to her:
	“My child wants to marry you,
105	he wants to marry.
	What do you say?” she said to her.
	She didn't make a sound. the dog girl
	“Speak!” she said to her. to the girl
	She said: the chief 's son
110	“Oh!—I can't say!—
	Good people—
	No!—

― 392 ―

	I will tell my mother to see what she says.”
	Said the chief's wife: “Good.”

	In the evening (it was already late), she said: 115
	“I'm going already;
	I will tell my mother.”
	Said the old woman: “Good.”
	They gave her dinner,
120	a good meal;
	she was full.
	They gave her food to take to her house.

	She got back home:
	she vomited;
125	they ate what she had “carried.”
	Her mother said:
	“How did it go for you, my child?”
	She said to her: “Good, my mother—
	the chief's son wants to marry me.
130	What do you say, Mother?”
	She said: “What am I to say?
	Good, good!” she said to her,
	“Marry him!”
	“Tomorrow I will go,
	I will return.” 135 said the girl
	Said her mother: “Good.”

	She went; in the morning
	he came out to meet her.
	They were married:
140	much food did the people eat at the house of the chief.
	They were married at the chief's house;
	his wife was beautiful.

	The boy had a sister;
	the sister liked her sister-in-law very much.
145	His mother said:
	“Don't let your wife go hungry.”
	“Right,” he said.

― 393 ―

	As for the dog girl:
	she had a bracelet,
150	a bracelet of fine beads;
	she had a necklace,
	a pendant,
	a pendant of ap$i$ beads,
	of ap$i$ beads;
155	a nose stick;
	a basket hat;
	she had many ornaments.
	Her hair was all fixed up in a braid wrap—
	she had braid wraps—
160	and her apron,
	her apron was of otterskin.
	His wife was well dressed—
	she was adorned.

	But after a while, she reverted to her old habit,
165	of eating excrement.
	And after a while, her sister-in-law saw her doing it,
	her sister-in-law saw her šitoxč^h oš išpiliwaš. There are several words I can't figure out here—unfortunately crucial ones. The undecipherable words are simply retained in the original Chumash.—RA
	That's what the girl was doing:
	the girl was eating shit!
	The sister stopped to look at her; 170
	she said nothing.
	That's what the dog's sister-in-law saw;
	she just sat there.
	The sister returned home.
175	“My mother,” she said,
	“my sister-in-law has been eating excrement.”
	She was pounding something. The chief's wife was preparing food, probably acorn meal or chia seeds.—HWL
	“Don't speak of this,” she told her.
	“Your poor brother!
180	Stay here.
	Don't follow her where she goes.”

― 394 ―

	As for the woman, the dog girl
	she stood up and went;
	she hid.
185	“I don't want to make my husband unhappy,” she said.
	She took nothing;
	there was nothing;
	she took nothing.

	He said to his sister: the chief's son
190	“Where did she go?
	Call for her!”
	He looked around;
	he couldn't find her.
	“I don't know where she went,” she said,
195	“nobody's there.”
	The man went out himself:
	he looked for his wife,
	he didn't find her.
	And his mother said to him:
	“Maybe you scolded her.”
	They looked for her.
	She had already gone.

	She went up the hill;
	she headed back to her village;
205	she wept.
	“I did it to myself:
	there was lots of food,
	but I had to go and eat excrement.

	“If only I had worn my bracelet! [singing]
210	If only I had worn my necklace!
	If only I had worn my pendant!
	If only I had worn my basket hat!
	? iya yaya yaya!

“But I didn't.

	“If only I had brought my apron, I would be happy! 215 [singing]
	If only I had brought my bracelet, I would be happy!

― 395 ―

	If only I had brought my braid wraps, I would be happy!
	If only I had brought my otterskin, I would be happy!
	? iya yaya yaya! [] The second song here is reconstructed from notes in Harrington's notebook, where he transcribed the first line (‘If I had brought my sm$i$l$i$,* I would be happy’), but merely alluded to the rest: “song goes on to mention waštap', tik'otuš.” A plausible object for the song's missing but structurally implied fourth line has been supplied.—RA

	“My otterskin apron—I didn't bring it. 220
	My husband would be ashamed.
	What hope have I of being kept?
	My husband would be ashamed.
	Now I will turn into an animal:
225	when I get back home,
	I will turn into an animal.”

	She got back home.
	“How did it go for you, my child?”
	“I had bad luck:
	there was no lack of food,
	but I wanted to eat shit.
	My sister-in-law saw me.
	I don't want to go back there,
	but I'll be leaving soon.”

	They all turned into animals; 235
	they were ashamed, all of them.
	The mother and the children,
	all of them, turned into animals.
	The animals, in the old days, knew shame;
240	nowadays, people do not know shame.

― 397 ―

SOUTHERN CALIFORNIA

I have told you to come away from the shore,
Because the small crabs will bite you—
You [will] want to say, “Ai! Ai! Ai! Ai! Ai!”
Coyote song, San Buenaventura (Ventureño Chumash) Robert Heizer, “California Indian Linguistic Records”

― 399 ―

SONG

	Whatever is it,
	that stu,
	that smoke,
	when it goes—
	it burns,
	and when the smoke goes,
	the person,
	the one who has come to an end and is finally gone
	goes into the sky as smoke,
	he goes like this and like this,
	he is the one,
	and they go back and describe it again:
	that one is cloudy,
	and it's windy,
	and it stays in the sky like this;

it's cloudy, like this;

it's windy, and it stays in the sky;

	and as for the moon,
	the moon is giving instructions,
	that's the one,
	it goes back like this,
	it goes that far in time and it rains,
	it goes that far in time and it's cold,
	it goes that far in time and it's hot,
	it goes that far in time and it's cloudy and shady,
	and so,
	it goes along;

― 400 ―

	that's the tradition,
	that's what it must be, they say,
	that's the tradition,
	and it comes back like this.

Excerpt from an account of “The Soul” Quechan, Tom Kelly, 1978 Abraham Halpern, Kar'úk

― 401 ―

23. The Creation

SERRANO 1963SARAH MARTIN, NARRATORKENNETH C. HILL, COLLECTOR AND TRANSLATOR

INTRODUCTION BY KENNETH C. HILL

Serrano is a Uto-Aztecan language formerly spoken around the San Bernardino Mountains in Southern California. With the advent of the missions, some speakers of this language retreated into the mountains, whence their name, Spanish for “mountaineer.” Aboriginally, Serrano may have had around 1,500 speakers (A. Kroeber 1925:617), but at the time of my fieldwork in 1963 and 1964, on the Morongo Indian Reservation at Banning, California, there were only about half a dozen known speakers.

Mrs. Sarah Morongo Martin told me this story when I was working on the Serrano language with her in the summer of 1963. Mrs. Martin had learned this story from her mother, Rosa Morongo, who also told it to Ruth Benedict. Benedict published a version of this story in her “Serrano Tales” (1926).^[1] Mrs. Martin had a copy of Benedict's publication, which she used to jog her memory before retelling it to me in Serrano.^[2] (It was only many years later that I learned that the reason she

― 402 ―

felt she had to use the written copy to get her started on a story was probably a cultural constraint: I was working with her in the summer, and stories of this sort are normally supposed to be told only during the winter.)

She begins the story by citing her mother as her source. In this way it is overtly acknowledged that the narrator is not responsible for the content of the story. But then, neither is the person she learned the story from directly responsible: almost every story sentence is marked by a “quotative” modal particle (kwun ‘it is said’), indicating that the content of the sentence comes not from personal experience, but rather from what someone has said. Except in the narrator's coda, I have represented the quotative force of each sentence either by the use of the English narrative tense (the simple past tense) or by “they say.” Sentences that don't use kwun are rendered either as English present tenses or as appropriately modalized forms.

At one point in the narrative, the quotative marker is omitted for a couple of sentences. This seems to create a sense of immediacy:

	Taaqtam kwun u poahu'k.
	Ama' puu-na' ovia uk hoonav.
	Ovia mumu'.
	Ovia-m maahoa'n.
	Ama' kwun wahi'—
	ya'i.

	The people were in a circle, it is said.
	Their father is already lying in the middle.
	He is already dead.
	They are already cremating him.
	The coyote, it is said,—
	ran.

In the translation, such lines are set in italics, as a way of conveying this highlighting e ect visually.

Mrs. Martin didn't like to translate sentence-by-sentence, but rather one word at a time, and she left it to me to understand the sentence structure. The translation o ered here is my own, therefore, and is quite literal, though I have omitted the occasional false start. The division into

― 403 ―

lines is based on what the narration sounds like on the recording tape, and the indentation pattern is based on my understanding of the meaning of the text.

So that the reader may obtain some notion of the distance that separates an original oral text from its translation, I present the opening lines of the story here, as transcribed directly from the tape of Mrs. Martin telling the story.^[3] The translation o ered here is somewhat more literal than is the case in the finished translation. False starts are given in italics and do not appear in the finished translation.

	Ni-yukchoi'v a-päävchan ivi'.
	My late mother \| her story \| this
	This [is] my late mother's story.

	Hiita'u—/
	Something-or-other

	Oviht moto' vum/
	Long ago \| still \| (?)

	—ivi' taamiat kwu'/
	this \| sun \| (?)

	ivi' tiüva$tD
	this \| earth

	—moto' namaa'i ñiaaw;
	still \| soft \| being

	kwunumu' qa$tD wöh.
	QUOT-they-PAST \| sit/dwell \| two
	there were two.

	Puu-tuwan—
	Their name(s) [were]

	Paqöoktach ami' Kokiitach.
	Paqöoktach \| and \| Kokiitach.

― 404 ―

	Kwunu poyo—tom hiiti icho'kin iip tiüvav—
	QUOT-they \| all \| INT \| something \| make \| here \| on earth
	It is said [that] they made everything here on earth.

	Mia tamu' hiiñim—päähavim—
	May \| they-PAST \| something-or-other \| supernaturally powerful beings
	They must have been powerful beings.

	Kwunu icho'kin—poyo tom hiiti.
	QUOT-they \| make \| everything
	It is said [that] they made everything.

	Wii'wunai-kwunu—
	Want-QUOT-they
	They wanted, it is said,

	Haokp—
	[I mean that] one [of them]

	ama' Kokiitach kwun wii'wun—
	the \| Kokiitach \| QUOT \| want
	Kokiitach, it is said, wanted

	taaqtam püü-qöi'va',
	[that] people \| upon their death

	puvaipa' ta qöi'v ami' ta—mii'/—ami' tam/—
	if \| they \| will die \| and \| they \| (?) \| and \| they(?)
	should they die, when they

	qöi'v
	will die
	might die,

	ami(') ta möch mana'q$tDoi'v,
	and \| they \| will return
	they should return again

― 405 ―

	iingkwa' iingkwa',
	to here \| to here
	this way this way,

	ivi' tiüvaika'.
	this \| to earth
	to this earth.

As a final note on the translation, the characters in this story are rendered as “the frog” and “the coyote” rather than as “Frog” and “Coyote” because that is how Mrs. Martin spoke of them in English. Names are rarely used in Serrano stories. Even when individual names are known, characters tend to be referred to as “her older sister,” “the boy,” “that old woman,” and so on.

NOTES

1. Benedict says of the stories she published: “These stories are recorded as told by old Rosa Morongo, who learned them from her father-in-law, chief of the Marina (Morongo) [‘Maarunga’—kch] local group, who died thirty-five years ago” (1926:1).

2. For comparison, here is Benedict's published version of Rosa Morongo's story (1926:1), the version that Sarah Martin referred to to jog her memory before she retold it to me:

THE CREATION

In the beginning was darkness. Then there were two: Pakrokítatc and Kúkitatc. They made the animals. They quarreled, and Pakrokítatc departed, and Kúkitatc lived with his people. Kúkitatc said: “When people die, they shall come back.” But the people said, “If they come back, the world will fill up, and there will be no room. We will get rid of Kúkitatc.”
They employed a powerful shaman to bewitch Kúkitatc. He watched and saw that Kúkitatc came out every night to defecate in the ocean. Therefore he sent Frog to bite his excrement. Kúkitatc heard that the excrement did not splash as it fell into the water, and he knew that Frog was below. Now he knew he was going to die. He told his people to send Coyote far away to the north for wood to burn his body, and he said, “Immediately, as soon as I am dead, burn my body.” He died, and his people lighted the funeral pyre. Coyote had not yet gone far, when he saw the pyre burning, and he knew that Kúkitatc was dead.
― 406 ―
The people were standing close together all around the funeral fire, so close nothing could get through, for they were prepared lest Coyote should come back before the body was burned. Coyote ran round and round the circle and could not get in. But at last he saw his chance. Badger was standing bow-legged (as always) and Coyote slipped in between his legs and snatched Kúkitatc's heart before it was burned. He ran away with it and ate it.
(All prayers in the old time were addressed to Kúkitatc.)

3. The letter u is used for the high back (or central) unrounded vowel, the “barred i” of most Uto-Aztecan studies; o represents the mid-to-high back rounded vowel; the apostrophe is the glottal stop; ä, ö, ü are retroflexed (“rcolored”) vowels; ţ is a t- or ts- like sound made with the tip of the tongue. Word stress is on the first syllable. The following abbreviations appear in the gloss lines: quot, “quotative”; int, “intensifier.”

THE CREATION

This is my late mother's story …

	Long ago
	when this earth
	was still soft,
5	there were two.
	Their names
	[were] Paqöoktach and Kokiitach.
	They made everything
	here on earth.

― 407 ―

	They must have been powerful beings. 10
	They made everything.

	They wanted,
	I mean that one of them, Kokiitach, wanted
	that people, upon their death,
15	should they die,
	when they might die,
	they should return again
	this way this way,
	to this earth.

	“No,” said his older brother, 20
	“because if they could return again,
	then you could be crowded here,”
	he said.

	Well, they quarreled then,
25	and that one went away.
	That Paqöoktach went away,
	he went away somewhere.

	And then his younger brother stayed with his relatives,
	with them,
30	with the people.
	He stayed there.

	He went on creating everything then.
	Then the people got tired of him.
	They didn't like him.
35	They were unhappy.

	And then they said, “We ought to kill this one.”
	Then, “Yes,”
	they said.

	And then they must have sent the shaman to bewitch him.
40	He became ill.
	Once he didn't even go to the edge of the water.

― 408 ―

	He went there to relieve himself,
	always.

	And so they said, “It looks like we can't do anything with him.”
45	“Yes, but we can tell the frog.
	Maybe he can swallow his excrement,”
	he said then.
	“Yes,”
	he said.

	And then, he did go there to relieve himself. 50
	And then that frog was there.
	And then he swallowed his excrement.

	He already knew.
	Kokiitach said, “Now indeed I'm going to die,”
55	he said.
	“He has already eaten my excrement,”
	he said.
	He went away.
	He lay down at home.
60	“I'm already dying,”
	he said.

	And then he called the people.
	And then he told them,
	“I am already dying,
65	and you should send that coyote
	away to the edge of the earth.
	Over there is a dry stick.
	He [the coyote] should get it.
	You should cremate me with that,”
70	he said.
	“Because he might do something,”
	he said.

	And then they sent the coyote o.
	He went away.
75	He ran o.
	But he knew.

― 409 ―

	“Something must have happened,
	” he said.
	“My father must have died,”
80	he said.
	(For that person was their father).
	Then he went.
	He went up on the mountain.

	And then he looked back.
85	He looked back as he went.
	He didn't see anything.

	Suddenly he saw smoke.
	“My father has already died,”
	he said.
90	He ran, grabbed the stick.

	And then with it he returned.
	He arrived.
	The people were in a circle.
	Their father is already lying in the middle.
95	He is already dead.
	They are already cremating him.
	The coyote—
	ran.

	And then he said,
100	“Let your hands go,
	so I can go in!”
	he said.
	“Move aside,
	move aside,
105	so I can go in!”
	he said.
	Nobody moved.

	He was running.
	He kept going around the circle.

	The badger was standing there. 110
	His legs were spread far apart.

― 410 ―

	And then the coyote dived through there.
	He dives through.
	Now his father's heart was still not burning.
115	He grabbed it and swallowed it.
	With it,
	with it he ran away.

	Out of the circle and away he ran.
	Up the mountain he climbed.

	There this earth being still soft, 120
	where he climbed, they say his footprints still show.
	The blood all spilled out from it.
	But he swallowed his father's heart.

	Today they say he lives far o,
125	far away.

	“To the Pines” [Big Bear] we say now.
	That is where, long ago, they stood in the circle.
	They stood in the circle.
	They say those pines were the people,
130	who were standing crying,
	who were crying for their father,
	for their father.
	Now they are in our songs, the pine trees, far away at “To the
	Pines.”

	Long ago, it was di erent from the way it is now,
135	because long ago they changed it.
	It isn't there any more.
	Long ago they cleared it all o.

This is the end.

― 411 ―

24. A Harvest of Songs from Villiana Calac Hyde

LUISEÑO 1988–1992VILLIANA CALAC HYDE, SINGER AND TRANSLATORERIC ELLIOTT, COLLECTOR

INTRODUCTION BY ERIC ELLIOTT

The following song texts were selected from Yumáyk Yumáyk (Hyde and Elliott 1994), a compilation of personal memoirs and historical texts narrated in Luiseño by Villiana Hyde.^[1] Luiseño is a member of the Cupan branch of the Takic subfamily of the Uto-Aztecan family of languages. The Uto-Aztecan family includes languages spoken from the American Northwest to Central America. The Cupan languages were all spoken within the boundaries of modern California. Within the Cupan languages, Luiseño is most closely related to the now-extinct Cupeño language.

Born Villiana Calac, Mrs. Villiana Hyde was a native speaker of Luiseño and a proud member of the Luiseño community at the Rincón Reservation of San Diego County. In Luiseño orthography the name “Calac” is spelled “Qáálaq” and literally means ‘(the earth) caves in’. In complete contrast to the literal meaning of the family name, the Calac

― 412 ―

family has a long history of never “caving in,” but rather of standing tall and providing the community and the world beyond with prominent leaders.

True to the Calac family tradition of serving the community, Mrs. Hyde found her niche early on as historian and linguist. Forbidden to speak Luiseño at Sherman Indian School in Riverside, California, Mrs. Hyde became painfully aware at a young age that her language and culture were in peril. As a young woman she gained an acute understanding of what it means for a language and culture to die. Mrs. Hyde's own mother-in-law was a native speaker of Cupeño, Luiseño's closest geographic and linguistic neighbor. The Cupeño people, including Mrs. Hyde's mother-in-law, had been forcibly evicted from their home at Warner Springs. Mrs. Hyde watched as her mother-in-law, now living among Diegueño and Luiseño speakers, saw her language and culture fade into extinction as the few remaining Cupeño speakers passed away around her.

Mrs. Hyde thus had a clear understanding of the ominous task of preserving her language and culture for future generations. Her formal career as a linguist began in the 1960s, when she first collaborated with Professors Margaret Langdon and Ronald Langacker of the Department of Linguistics at the University of California, San Diego (UCSD). This work eventually culminated in the publication of Mrs. Hyde's first book, An Introduction to the Luiseño Language (1971). Among those who collaborated with Mrs. Hyde on the Introduction were Langacker and the linguists Pamela Munro and Susan Steele, all of whom have continued their linguistic research on Luiseño language to the present day.

As an undergraduate student at the University of California, Irvine, I had the good fortune to stumble onto Mrs. Hyde's Introduction to the Luiseño Language. Long fascinated by the indigenous languages of California, I also happened to sign up for a class on Amerindian languages oered by Professor Mary Key, a linguist who had spent decades working on various American Indian languages of Mexico and South America. Professor Key encouraged my interest in Native American languages, opening up her office and personal linguistic library to me. When I showed up with Mrs. Hyde's Introduction, Professor Key further encouraged me to contact Mrs. Hyde and Professor Margaret Langdon of the Department of Linguistics at UCSD.

― 413 ―

At the time, Mrs. Hyde's telephone number was listed in the directory. I simply called up directory assistance, got her number, telephoned Mrs. Hyde, and asked her whether she would teach me more about her language. Mrs. Hyde graciously agreed. Armed only with the Introduction, my tape recorder, and William Bright's Luiseño Dictionary, I drove to Mrs. Hyde's house. Our technique was simple. I would ask Mrs. Hyde about a particular subject of interest. She would tell me details on tape in Luiseño. I would take the tape home, transcribe the Luiseño, analyze it morphologically, translate it into English as best I could, and bring the work back to Mrs. Hyde for editing. At first, the work was painstakingly slow. Mrs. Hyde, who opened up her home to me most Saturdays, thought nothing of working from nine o'clock in the morning until as late as five o'clock at night.

Mrs. Hyde and I ended up collaborating for more than eight years. Our work has thus far yielded Yumáyk Yumáyk (‘long, long ago’), and we also have a dictionary and grammar in the making. Mrs. Hyde passed away in 1994, several weeks before Yumáyk Yumáyk was published. Mrs. Hyde was a good friend to me. She was also an ideal linguistic consultant. With her passing I lost a friend and also the possibility of further data collection or further clarification of material already gathered. The following excerpts from Yumáyk Yumáyk are therefore presented raw, as they appeared in the original—that is, with no further interpretation or explanation on my part. Mrs. Hyde provided explanations where she felt them necessary in Yumáyk Yumáyk. As with any culture's history, or as with any individual's own life story, there will always be facets of that history that are more readily comprehensible to outsiders, and other aspects that are less transparent. In order to fully understand the culture of a given community or individual, one has to be a member of that culture. I am not a member of the Luiseño-speaking culture presented in Yumáyk Yumáyk, a culture where speaking Luiseño and having one's gallstones removed by a shaman (Hyde and Elliott 1994:175–84) were as natural to Mrs. Hyde as speaking English and going to the dentist for a filling is to me. Yet, the more one reads of Mrs. Hyde's life and times, the better picture one forms of her culture, which really did exist not so long ago. It is my hope that these selections will provide readers with a glimpse of the grace and beauty of the language and culture that Mrs. Hyde worked so hard to document.

― 414 ―

NOTE

1. Song numbers here refer to text numbers in Hyde and Elliott's Yumáyk Yumáyk (1994). For the sake of reference, they have not been renumbered for this volume. The titles of songs given in Luiseño, in the absence of an explanatory phrase at the beginning, may be translated with reference to the first line of the song itself.—HWL

A HARVEST OF SONGS FROM VILLIANA CALAC HYDE

BADGER SONG (#138)

	These are the ones who looked down
	These are the ones who peered down

	The badger and the vulture, long ago
	These ones [are] the vulture …

	Look at his stained hand with a ring around it
	Look at his speckled hand

	These are the ones who looked down
	These are the ones who peered down

― 415 ―

	I speak of my [own] spirit
	I try to speak of my heart

	I try to speak of my spirit
	I try to speak of my heart

“They too looked down. And that's why they look that way. That badger saw, he looked down.”

[*] These explanations were provided by Mrs. Hyde and are not part of the song itself. The remaining lines of the song are apparently lost.

KÁÁMALA SONG (#145)

	Child, ?á$kat's song:
	The ones inside her rolled and moved
	The ones in her chest,
	the ones in her chest rolled and moved
	The ones inside her,
	their beloved sons, rolled and moved

TEMÉÉNGANISH SONG (#149)

THE DAWN SONG
[†] “They would sing this song toward dawn,” Mrs. Hyde explained. (The star names chuyúkmal and kayá'mal may refer to animals. The Vulture Star is Arcturus.)

	I speak of the East
	I speak of the East
	I tell my story, of how I was dying
	In the first little month called Táwsanmaytal

	The chuyúkmal star, the kayá'mal star
	Made growling sounds
	They opened their mouths when I was dying
	In the first little month called Táwsanmaytal

The bullfrog and the angleworm …

I speak of the Antares star of the East

― 416 ―

	I speak of the Vulture star of the East
	I tell my story of the East
	I tell my story of the East

LULLABY IN IMITATION OF A CRICKET CHIRPING (#153)

THE CRICKET'S SONG

	The oak trees are standing there
	The oak trees are standing there
	In the house, in the house, in the house

PÍ'MUKVOL SONG (#162)

DEATH SONG
[*] The song has two parts, as numbered.

	1
	The mááxwala hawk, the wasíímal hawk
	They left speaking of their spirits, of their hearts
	They left singing of their spirits, of their hearts

	2
	The qáwqaw bird, the kingbird and the wasíímal hawk
	They left speaking of their spirits, of their hearts

PA'LÁÁKWISH SONG (#165)

THE PA'LÁÁKWISH BIRD'S SONG

	My nephew, get your arrow
	To shoot and kill someone

CHALÁÁWAAT SONG (#167)

THE CHALÁÁWAAT (“STANDING UP”) DANCE

	I suppose I've survived the first little month
	I suppose I've survived the first big month

― 417 ―

	Oh, I am surviving through the days
	I am surviving through the days

PIWÍÍSH SONG (#170)

THE MILKY WAY SONG (SECOND PART)
[] The phrase makes me spark* is a poetic idiom meaning “keeps me awake.” The word rattle at the beginning of lines 3 and 4 translates literally as “my little fire.”

	It keeps waking me up
	It keeps waking me up
	It makes me spark
	My rattle, my turtleshell rattle
	My rattle keeps me awake

QAXÁÁL QAXÁÁWUT SONG (#171)

	The valley quail and the mountain quail singed their hair [†] This is not the whole of the “Qaxáál Qaxááwut” song. The two stanzas presented here represent two separate parts of the song. Neither part begins the complete song, but they are not necessarily sequential either.
	They cut o their hair, with tears and lamentations
	They singed their hair
	The mountain quail singed o his hair
	The mountain quail singed o his hair
	They cut o their hair, with tears and lamentations

	The flicker bird and the roadrunner
	They cut o their hair, with tears and lamentations
	They singed their hair
	The flicker bird singed o his hair
	The roadrunner singed o his hair
	They cut o their hair, with tears and lamentations

PÍ' TÓÓWISH HULÚYKA SONG (#174)

	And the spirit landed
	And the little dove landed

― 418 ―

	And it stopped to warn
	And so it wandered around to warn

	And the coyote landed
	And it stopped to warn
	And so it wandered around to warn

	The owl landed
	And the fox landed
	And it stopped to warn
	And so it wandered around to warn

	The screech owl landed
	And the péépimal bird landed
	And it stopped to warn
	And so it wandered around to warn

	The páátapi duck landed
	And the nóóchaqi duck landed
	And it stopped to warn
	And so it wandered around to warn

	The pááwnat bird landed
	And the killdeer bird landed
	And it stopped to warn
	And so it wandered around to warn

TÓÓWISH MIXÉÉL SONG (#178)

	The spirit, the dove
	This spirit [cried] over me
	This dove [cried] over me
	And so it cried over our future death
	Over my future death
	Over my future disappearance
	Over my future disappearance
	The fox [cried] over me …

― 419 ―

WUNÁL PÍ' TUMÁMKAWISH SONG (#181)

	There was an earthquake in the north
	Our future death rumbled
	My storehouse was shaken up
	Our hearts rumbled
	Our future death rumbled
	My darkness was shaken
	My darkness was shaken
	Our future death rumbled

	There was an earthquake in the north
	Our future death rumbled
	My storehouse was shaken up
	Our hearts rumbled
	Our future death rumbled
	My darkness was shaken
	My darkness was shaken
	Our future death rumbled

[Singer begins dancing]

	Our future death rumbled
	My storehouse was shaken up
	Our house rumbled
	My darkness was shaken
	My darkness was shaken
	Our house rumbled

SECOND KÁÁMALA SONG (#182)

THE CHILD SONG

	The dust from the area around Pááyaxchi
	Billowed up from their feet as they walked along
	And erred along the way

― 420 ―

CHALÁWYAX MILA MÓÓTA SONG (#190)

	The gopher danced the chaláwyax [] The chaláwyax* and yúngish are dances. The gopher and meadow mouse's father is Móyla Wuyóót (the Moon). The vocables héé héé at the end of the song work in much the same way that the word amen does—by “sending the song to heaven.”
	The meadow mouse danced
	They danced the chaláwyax and the yúngish
	After their father
	They danced when their father died
	They danced all night
	They danced, héé, héé, amen …

― 421 ―

25. From “The Life of Hawk Feather”

The Bear Episodes

CUPEÑO 1962, 1992ROSCINDA NOLASQUEZ AND SALVADORA VALENZUELA, NARRATORSJANE HILL AND PAUL-LOUIS FAYE, COLLECTORSJANE HILL, TRANSLATOR

INTRODUCTION BY JANE HILL

The “Bear Episode” is one part of a longer account of the life of Hawk Feather, the greatest hero in Cupeño history. Roscinda Nolasquez told me two parts of the “Bear Episode” when she was teaching me the Cupeño language during the summer of 1962. In 1920 Paul-Louis Faye collected several events from this episode in a single text. The teller was probably Salvadora Valenzuela, because, among the texts where Faye bothers to note his consultants' names, she is consistently listed as the teller of the longer and more elaborate stories. Salvadora Valenzuela comes from a lineage of storytellers and authorities on Cupeño culture; her mother, Mrs. Manuela Griffith, was a principal consultant for William Duncan Strong. Miss Nolasquez had known Mrs. Valenzuela and considered her to be a particularly skilled narrator of Cupeño history. The 1920 text has some

― 422 ―

elements that Miss Nolasquez's two later tellings lack, but hers includes some details that are absent in the text that Faye recorded. This publication gives us an opportunity to put the two parts of the Bear Episode together. In addition to bringing together versions by two narrators, we have inserted into the story the texts of the songs that a teller would have sung in a formal winter recitation. Faye apparently recorded the song texts separately from the story (and left us no musical notation for them), but on the story text itself, in Faye's fieldnotes, there are instructions about where the songs should be. I have placed them there, writing them in italics.

The story of Hawk Feather is in the genre that Cupeños refer to with the verb root a'alxi ‘telling history’. Histories tell us how the world has come to be the way that it is today. The story of Hawk Feather is only one part of a longer history that begins in the creation of the world and continues into the present day. An important new history in the a'alxi genre includes stories about the removal of the Cupeño in 1902 from their ancestral communities at Pal Atingve ‘Hot Springs’ (which included the villages of Kupa ‘Fire Place’ and Wilakalpa ‘Buckwheat Place’), known to non-Indians as Warner's Hot Springs.

Hawk Feather is born into chaos, as enemy warriors (Strong [1929] says that they were Diegueños) attack and burn the village of Kupa. His mother flees with her baby to live with relatives at Soboba, called Yuykat. The boy grows into a great hunter. But, perhaps because they are jealous of his accomplishments, people do not like him, and he hunts alone. It is in the Bear Episode that his special powers are first manifested, when he blows up the skin of the dead bear and brings it to life. In Salvadora Valenzuela's telling of how he did this, she says,

	He carried the hide to the brush.
	He gathered the softest grass that he could find.
	He stu ed the hide.
	He sewed up the hide into the shape of a body.
	And then he blew it up.
	And then it breathed.
	And he tied it with cords,
	for it was trying to run away.

Miss Nolasquez's segment of the narrative ends in the touching moment when Hawk Feather begs his mother not to be afraid of him. At

― 423 ―

this point in the story, we switch narrators, turning to Salvadora Valenzuela's telling from 1920. We pick up her story when the hero and his mother set forth with the bear to kill their enemies, traveling across a countryside punctuated with place-names that record the moments in their quest. But when they reach Kupa, the bear is killed by the terrified people. They manage to take away from him the magic stone that was his “heart” (according to Paul-Louis Faye's notes), and the women come and “cut his beads” from the carcass. The 1920 text (as well as the present version) ends there.

In her second set of episodes from the life of Hawk Feather, Miss Nolasquez narrates Hawk Feather's maturity—events in his life that occurred after the death of the magic bear. He takes two wives. They bear three sons, who are the founders of the three Cupeño lineages. Hawk Feather continues to exhibit magical powers: his dances control whether oak trees will bear the acorns that were the staple of the Cupeño diet.

One of the most delightful moments in Miss Nolasquez's part of the Bear Episode shows her special gift for sparkling narrative. This is the section where the hero tries to figure out who might be stealing his caches of meat. Miss Nolasquez seizes the opportunity to poke fun at Coyote, through the voice of the hero's mother. (Roscinda Nolasquez knew innumerable Coyote stories and took great pleasure in the humor in these texts.) Thus lines 48–54 of her story go like this in Cupeño:

	Muku'ut aye peye peyik peyaqal,
	“Ishmi'ishep ne'ey ni'ituqa,”
	peyaqal ku'ut.
	“Ivi'aw ham iyaxwe,”
	peyaqal ku'ut.
	Pi'isniqal pexuchi.
	“ISILY shepe”
	peyaqal ku'ut peye.
	“Isilyem pe' eyet!
	Meshepe isilya i'itu'qa!”
	peyaqal ku'ut.

	And then they say he said to his mother,
	“Something must be stealing from me,”
	they say he said.
	“Here is how it looks,”

― 424 ―

	they say he said.
	He draws the outline of a footprint.
	“It MUST be a COYOTE!”
	they say his mother said.
	“Coyote is SUCH a THIEF!
	It must be Coyote who is STEALING from you!”
	they say she said.

One interesting feature of Cupeño historical texts that we can see in this passage is that all narrative sentences (excepting those in quoted speech) contain the quotative particle ku'ut ‘they say’. Here, I have translated all the quotatives, so that their frequency is obvious. In the main translation, only a few of these remain, but in Cupeño every sentence in a history is marked with this particle, reiterating again and again and again the authoritative force of the story and the teller's humility before tradition.

Another striking feature of Roscinda Nolasquez's storytelling style in part 1 is the exaggerated emphasis, with loud, drawn-out syllables (marked in the text in capital letters) that she gives to the speech of the mother as she diagnoses the footprint: ISILY shepe ‘COYOTE must be him!’, pe'EYet ‘He is such a THIEF!’, i'iTU'qa ‘He is STEALING from you!’ This way of telling the story must have made audiences laugh out loud, thinking of all the times Coyote has foolishly stolen something that turned out to do him no good. The solemnity of history, thus punctuated with a good joke, is rendered delightful, and the serious privileges of humor are equally revealed.

T here are any number of interesting problems in interpreting this story. One of them is why Miss Nolasquez finished her telling at the moment when Hawk Feather reassures his mother that she need not be afraid of him. Some are internal to the story; others are external to it, pointing to the interpersonal context of the recording session itself. Miss Nolasquez's story really centers around Hawk Feather's relationship with his mother. Miss Nolasquez herself had a very close relationship with her son and with her grandchildren. Indeed, Miss Nolasquez was known to everyone at Pala as “Grandma” Nolasquez. Furthermore, there was every reason for her to think about motherhood when she worked with me, because

― 425 ―

in August 1962 I was seven months pregnant with my first child. (The next summer, Eric went with me in his portable crib as a not-sosilent listener to Miss Nolasquez's teaching.) Finally, because I hardly knew any Cupeño, most of the stories Miss Nolasquez helped me with that summer were simple stories appropriate to children. The part of the Hawk Feather episode that she told is, in fact, excellent entertainment, with magic and humor. No enemies are killed in it—instead, Hawk Feather tricks them into using up all their arrows, which he adds to his own arsenal. However, the story grows darker when Hawk Feather, his mother, and the pet bear set out toward Kupa, slaughtering their enemies along the way. The death of the pet bear at the hands of the enemies who remained in Kupa is an especially sad moment in the history. This part of the episode might be frightening and confusing to little children, or inappropriate to an atmosphere of grandmotherly nurturing, as opposed to the solemn world-renewing ritual context of the winter tellings. Thus Miss Nolasquez's version of the Bear Episode suggests how she could use the story as a flexible resource, drawing from it for entertainment and for moral contemplation as a part of everyday life.

Another problem involves Hawk Feather's name. Miss Nolasquez used the name Kisily Pewik ‘Hawk His-Wing/Plume’ for this hero. Paul-Louis Faye's 1920 version calls him Kisily Pewish ‘Hawk His-Down’, and this is also the name recorded by Strong. The problem is, Miss Nolasquez had the latter word only in the meaning ‘feces’. Apparently in her speech two ancient Uto-Aztecan words had merged in pronunciation. The first, listed by Wick Miller (1967) as Proto-Uto-Aztecan, is **pi ‘feather’ (probably it was **pi'wi:, with Cupeño retaining only the second syllable). The second word is listed as **kwita ‘to defecate’; its etymological reflexes often mean ‘feces’ (in Cupeño, the sound **kw appears as /w/, and **t as /sh/, yielding wish). This ambiguity gave Roscinda Nolasquez's son, Robert Lovato, the opportunity to tease me with a naughty bilingual pun—that the hero's name was really Kisily Pewish, or “Hawk HisNumber Two”! For this translation, I have decided in favor of Kisily Pewik—that is, Hawk Feather rather than Hawk Down (or worse).

The monolingual format of this volume requires a final note or two on the translation. I wish that the text did not have to be translated at all; I wish that it were being told, every winter, in community gatherings, and being quoted with pleasure, and that its songs were being hummed, by speakers of the language. I hate having to put it in English,

― 426 ―

so my translation is in a way an act of resistance to my own language; it is as literal as possible, consistent with the joy and dignity of the original. I have left in as many quotatives as I could get away with, because I think that their drumbeat rhythm is part of the power of this history.

And about the lines. The division of the text into lines partly reflects the way that Roscinda Nolasquez divided her recitation into what linguists call “breath groups” or “intonation units”; that is, it reflects her pattern of slowing down, and speeding up, and pausing. For the 1920 text, I have simply guessed about this, based on my experience with Miss Nolasquez's speech. The line divisions also serve to open the text up and make it more readable—they represent the flow and phrasings of ordinary speech. However, they do not reflect the sort of rhythmic performance—Hymes's “measured verse”—that is found in some Native American languages, especially in the Pacific Northwest. This is, in my opinion, prose, not verse, and the narrative sentences are very di erent from those in songs.

FROM “THE LIFE OF HAWK FEATHER”: THE BEAR EPISODE, PART 1

Roscinda Nolasquez, 1962

	One young man, it is said, lived there,
	and he was always hunting.

― 427 ―

	He would go to the mountains,
	and he would always kill deer,
5	and he would bring the carcass to his mother.
	His mother never wanted to eat,
	for of course it was not proper for a woman to eat such deer.
10	“Take it to the chief in the Big House,”
	she would say;
	“To the chief's house.”
	And he would take it there,
	to the chief's house,
	for the people to eat the deer.
	And he would gather his relatives together,
15	and they would all eat that deer.
	But not his mother.
	For if a person kills a deer, then he should not eat it.
	And his mother never wanted to eat,
	since her son was the one who had killed it.
20	And he would go o again.

	He would go o, it is said, to a certain place,
	going looking here and there,
	and he would always kill something,
	a rat, or a rabbit,
	and he would take it o to his mother.
25	But she did not eat.
	“To the other place, to the Big House,”
	she would say;
	“They will eat it there.”
	And it is said that the people really did dine there,
30	they ate what he had killed.
	And then he would go out again.

	He used to go hunting, it is said, at a certain place,
	and he would kill a deer,
	and he would leave it there.
35	And always, when he returned again in the morning,
	his cache would be gone,
	for something was always stealing it.
	And the man said,

― 428 ―

	“I wonder who is stealing from me?”
40	he would say.
	And he would go o again.

	It is said he would kill some rats somewhere,
	and bring them from there to his mother.
	But when he came around,
45	“To the Big House,” she would say.
	And he would take it there,
	even if it was only one thing.
	But he said to his mother,
	“Something must be stealing from me,” he said.
50	“Here is how it looks,” he said.
	He draws the outline of a footprint.
	“It MUST be a COYOTE!” said his mother.
	“Coyote is such a THIEF.
	It must be Coyote who is STEALING from you,” she said.
55	And he went o again.

	And it is said then he arrived again at that same place,
	and again he saw a footprint there.
	That footprint was huge!
	And he said to his mother,
60	“Something is obviously coming around.
	I saw the track there,” he said.
	“You'll catch it,” she said,
	“in a trap,” she said.
	“Here is how wide the foot is,” he said.
65	And his mother said,
	“It must be a BEAR!” she said.
	And he went o again.

	Now, his mother, it is said, always stayed behind when he went
	hunting.
	And he killed that bear,
70	and then he carried it back.
	It was a really big bear.
	But he carried it back from there,
	and he brought it to his mother.

― 429 ―

	And his mother said,
75	“To the chief's house,” she said,
	“I cannot eat this, for this is a human being,” she said.

	And then, it is said, he skinned it, the man skinned the bear.
	He took it ALL out,
	all of that flesh,
80	and he prepared the hide.
	And he BLEW it up,
	he BLEW it up,
	until he made it really ENORMOUS.
	And his mother was there,
85	and she was watching
	while he made the body of the bear.
	And then he played with it there.
	It was just like a dog;
	it was playing,
90	it was jumping around.

	And it is said his mother went o to tell the other people.
	On the way she crossed a stream,
	and she scratched up her feet,
	with all the sticks, so many,
95	where she crossed several times from this side to that.
	So her feet were completely scratched up.
	And still she kept going;
	she was looking back.
	She got home, and she said,
100	“He is definitely over there,” she said,
	“the Bear.
	He is just like a dog.
	The two of them are playing,” she said.
	And so many people set o.

	It is said they readied their bows and arrows. 105
	And they went o.
	And there he was, under a shelter.
	And from under there, a paw REACHED out.

― 430 ―

	And then it disappeared again.
110	And it came out—
	it was the body of the bear.
	And then it disappeared again.
	And then the people shot at him,
	their arrows flew everywhere.
115	Underneath the shelter he would duck,
	he would turn into something di erent,
	he would come out again,
	and again they shot.
	Back under the shelter he goes!
120	Then their arrows were used up,
	from all their shooting.
	And then they went away.
	And they said,
	“It is impossible for us to kill him,” they said.
125	And then he came out.
	He gathered up ALL those arrows.
	And he piled them up.

	Arrows in piles
	You went looking around
130	You went crawling around
	You went touching the ground
	You were weak
	That is all

	And then, it is said, his mother came.
	And he said,
135	“Where did you go?” said the son.
	And his mother said,
	“I went over there to the foot of the mountain.”
	“You must have washed your feet.
140	You got your feet all scratched up,” he said.
	“My feet did get wet there,” she said.
	And then she kept standing there,
	she kept standing there.
	His mother was afraid of that bear.
145	And her son said,

― 431 ―

	“Don't be afraid,” he said to his mother.
	“It was only me,” they say he said.

FROM “THE LIFE OF HAWK FEATHER”: THE BEAR EPISODE, PART 2

Salvadora valenzuela, 1920

	And then, it is said, when the sun rose,
	all of those many warriors came again.
	Again they called him, and he came out as an old man.
	In the same way now they shot at him,
5	but they could not hit him,
	since he would duck back under the shelter.
	“Mother,” he said,
	“Now I am going to come out in the shape of a baby,
	and they're going to see me, and they're going to shoot
	at me,
10	and all of them are going to grab at me.
	And I will come back in here,
	and you and my pet bear will come out.
	They have no arrows left.
	They are going to go away,
15	they are going to say that they will come again tomorrow.
	And now I will say that I will show them my pet.”
	And then they said,
	“You won't show us your pet bear.”
	“Now you will see it,
20	and now you will kill me as I come out to you.”
	“No,” they said,
	“we will do it tomorrow.”
	And they say that he said to his mother,
	“Now we are going to chase them.”
25	And he gave her his club.
30	And he said to his mother,
	“This pet of mine will come out of the bushes at them,

― 432 ―

	and I will shoot them from atop a level place,
	and you will hit them about the ears, breaking their jaws.”

	And then, it is said, they chased them, he and his mother,
	they caught up with them,
	he shot them,
	he killed them. When they tried to escape into the bushes,
35	the bear then came out at them,
	reaching out his arms to them.
	The bear killed them,
	while the man came along shooting them
	while his mother came along clubbing them about the ears.

	Halayla! Hahahalayla! 40
	The bear, his paws!
	Halayla! Hahalayla!
	The bear, his paws!

	One enemy would run to the south,
45	another, in the same way, to the west,
	but it was no use,
	they could not pass.
	Now two of them appeared,
	and the man chased those two.
50	He caught up with them,
	he grabbed them,
	and he dashed them repeatedly against a White Oak.
	And they say that he said,
	“You will all go and tell one another,
55	so the name of this place will be
	‘Where He Dashed Them against the White Oak,’
	and you will tell about me, how I finished them o.”
	And they went away to tell.

	And then, it is said, he and his mother returned to their victims,
60	in order to scalp their heads.
	And they packed the scalps into their carrying net,
	to take them to their shelter,

― 433 ―

	to take them there.
	And he said,
	“Mother, tomorrow I think that we will go home
65	to Kupa.”
	In the morning they left, he and his mother,
	carrying their burdens on tumplines.
	And at a certain place he adjusted his burden.
	And they say that he said,
	“This place will be called ‘Where He Adjusted His
70	Burden’;
	its name will be thus.”
	And they went on.
	And then at a certain place he was climbing,
	and he caught his breath.
75	“This place will be called, ‘Where He Caught His Breath.’”
	And they went on.
	And at a certain place he stopped to eat.
	And they say that he said,
	“‘Meal Place’ is its name.”
80	And then they went on from there.
	And then they came to Mekwashma,
	and because of him its name is ‘Flea Place.’

	And then, it is said, while they rested there at Mekwashma,
	he turned his pet bear loose.
85	And the bear killed women, and men, and children,
	those who remained of his enemies.
	And at Kelelva, the bear would come out in the morning,
	to graze in the meadow grass.
	And there also he killed those who remained.
	And so the old women went to the chief of the Teshvekinga
90	Clan.
	They said to him,
	“You men must do something for us,
	you should kill that bear for us,
	for he has almost finished us o.
95	When the sun rises, that is when he appears.”

― 434 ―

	And it is said that there is a place where there are rocks on each
	side.
	And the men set o.
	One sat on this side, on top of one of the rocks.
	And another did the same on the other.
100	And then the bear appeared.
	And they tried to shoot him.
	And he caught their arrows,
	he broke them in half.
	And then the bear shook his head.
105	And a stone fell from the back of his neck.
	And he swallowed it.
	And then those men went away, for their arrows were
	exhausted.
	“Tomorrow, we will come again.”

	It is said that again, in the morning, they came.
110	The ones on the rocks kept watch.
	And one of them said to the other,
	“Now I will tell you what he is carrying on the back of his
	neck.
	And you will shoot at it first; you are to shoot.
	And I will jump down from here,
115	and I will knock that thing far away,
	so that he cannot swallow it,
	and when he tries to grab it,
	we will shoot him from both sides.”

	And then, it is said, the bear appeared.
120	The man did as he was told,
	he shot him.
	The bear shook himself as before.
	And the man on top of the rocks jumped down,
	and knocked the stone away.
125	They shot at the bear,
	they killed him.
	And they skinned him,
	and the place is named ‘Bear-skinning Place.’
	And when the bear lay dead,

― 435 ―

	those old women came. 130
	And the bear was cut,
	they cut loose the bear's beads.
	“He was going to eat us, he was going to catch us.”

	The bear's beads
135	They were cut
	They were cut loose
	“He is going to eat us”
	“He is going to take us”

― 436 ―

26. In the Desert with Hipahipa

MOJAVE 1902INYO-KUTAVÊRE, NARRATORJACK JONES, INTERPRETERA. L. KROEBER, COLLECTOR

INTRODUCTION BY A. L. KROEBER

[The text that follows is an excerpt from a much, much longer (yet still incomplete) Mojave migration epic collected by A. L. Kroeber in 1902. The portion reproduced here, “In the Desert with Hipahipa,” is the ninth of eighteen sections distinguished by Kroeber.^[1]The introduction is taken, with a few emendations and reductions, from Kroeber's own general introduction to the study as a whole. The orthographic conventions used for writing Mojave words and names have changed since Kroeber's time (as indeed has the spelling of “Mohave” itself, Mojave being the preferred form today). However, I have chosen not to modernize Kroeber's spelling system in the present selection, not only because they are appropriate to the era of collection (1902), but to avoid confusion for readers who may consult the remainder of this fascinating epic. Readers—particularly those who take the trouble to consult the original publication—may find that some of Kroeber's comments and evaluations of the text as a work of oral history seem unnecessarily dismissive. We must keep in mind, though, that he has come to his conclusions on the basis of quite exhaustive investigations into the substantive historical content of this and other versions of the narrative. Even so, I think that scholars today would be far less likely to dismiss the oral-historical basis of documents such as this one, seeking instead to understand better the nature of the interaction between dreaming and traditional knowledge.—HWL]

― 437 ―

Circumstances and Nature of the Tale

The story of the recording of this tale is this. In a previous visit to the Mohave I had learned of their male-lineage clans or simulye, known each by the name which all the women born in the clan shared, these names in turn having totemic reference or connotation, though in most of the names no etymologic denotation of the totemic animal or object was apparent. There is no evidence that these clans functioned other than as regards coresidence and exogamy: they had no ritual associations. Settlements normally consisted of kinsmen in the male line, and thereby of men of the same clan; but there were said to be usually several places thus “belonging” to each clan, especially if it was large. I found it difficult to engage Mohave interest in reciting to me a list of such clan localizations: the simulye were now “all mixed up,” they said, compared with old times. When I said it was the old times that I wanted to know about, the answer was, that how it was with the clans in the old days, how they came to be, was known only to certain old men who had dreamed about that and about the traveling and fighting of the Mohave. Itš-kanavk ‘great-telling’ was the name of that kind of story; people who had not dreamed that—that is, did not specialize in it—would know nothing of moment about it.

Several old men were mentioned as informants; but a train of ill luck accompanied my endeavors to secure from any one of them the full version of what he knew. The well-informed on the subject, or at any rate those generally reputed well-informed, were evidently all of an advanced age that made their mortality high in the first decade of this century. As this clan or migration legend also was not associated with a cycle which would be sung at festivals or funerals, the series of men inclined to “dream” it—to hear, learn, and refantasy it—would be pretty thoroughly and suddenly cut o when the remodeling of Mohave life by American contacts had reached a certain point. To men who had worked, however intermittently, on railway maintenance of way, in the locomotive roundhouse or in the ice plant, a legend about ancient migrations of bands that lived o the land must have seemed irrelevant and fairly pointless, and even more so to the prospective all-night audiences whose interest would provide much of the stimulus for dreaming up the tale. By contrast, singing has an appeal in itself, reinforced for the Mohave by the emotional associations of their custom of singing their cycles as a gift at impending

― 438 ―

deaths of kinsmen. Around 1903, accordingly, song-cycle myths were still being learned and dreamed by individual Mohaves; but I now suspect that no one had then learned and reelaborated a version of the migration legend in several decades. If this is a fact, it was the very last of the crop of aged migration dreamers that I encountered at Needles about 1900 to 1905.

However, in March 1902, my customary guide and interpreter, Jack Jones, took me across the river from Needles and some two or three miles inland, more or less to the settlement Ah'a-kwinyevai, … [on the] eastern side of Mohave Valley. I was purchasing ethnographical specimens on the way. At Ah'a-kwinyevai, in a sand-covered Mohave house, we found the old man whom we had come to see, Inyo-kutavêre ‘Vanishedpursue’, who was reputed to know about the origin of clans. He admitted that he did, and would tell me the story. It would take a day, he said when I asked the length. As that day was partly gone, I arranged to come back in the morning.

Of course he did not realize that it would take Jack about as long to English to me his telling in Mohave as that took him, and I overlooked the fact, or had long since learned not to be too concerned about inaccuracy of time estimates by natives. However, he went on for six days, each of three to four hours' total narration by him and as many of translation by Jack and writing by me.^[2] Each evening he believed, I think honestly, that one more day would bring him to the end. He freely admitted, when I asked him, that he had never told the story through from beginning to end. He had a number of times told parts of it at night to Mohave audiences, until the last of them dropped o to sleep. When our sixth day ended, he still, or again, said that a day would see us through. But by then I was overdue at Berkeley; and as the prospective day might once more have stretched into several, I reluctantly broke o, promising him, and myself, that I would return to Needles when I could, not later than next winter, to conclude recording the tale.

By next winter Inyo-kutavêre had died, and his tale thus remains unfinished, though its central theme, the final conquest of Mohave Valley and the taking of lands by the clan leaders, is completed. I made e orts to find other old men who might continue where Inyo-kutavêre had left o. I came to realize soon afterward that no Mohave could “continue” the narration of another.^[3] The versions di er too much through being after all individually refantasied, as I would construe the core to be of

― 439 ―

FIGURE 11. Jack Jones. Courtesy Phoebe Apperson Hearst Museum of Anthropology and the Regents of the University of California.

what the Mohave mean by “dreaming.” With a di erent informant it would have been necessary to get a new version of the entire tale; only in that sense could Inyo-kutavêre's tale have been “finished” by another. However, I was given the names of two surviving old men who might furnish a completion; and in the spring of 1903, and again of 1904, I returned

― 440 ―

to Needles to look them up: only to find that one of them was speechless from a paralytic stroke. The other, I wrote on April 15, 1904, to my chief, F. W. Putnam, I had as yet been unable to go to see because he lived too far from the telegraph office at Needles, to which I was then tied by an expected message. I do not recall now why I was unable to connect with him later; and before long he too died.

In 1908 I was again at Needles. The Mohave seemed to think that their recognized dreamers of the clan migration were all gone. But meeting an old man called Kunalye, I asked him whether he knew anything of Hipahipa, the greatest hero in Inyo-kutavêre's version. He affirmed that Hipahipa was the name of a Kutkilye clan band living in Mohave Valley in ancient times, and proceeded to tell me their story on March 1. I returned to him on March 3 for another installment, in which as yet the warfare that was to be the central theme of the plot was only being threatened. The old man then became ill. I had to discontinue, and so another attempt remained fragmentary. … For the time spent in its recording, its text is proportionally briefer than Inyo-kutavêre's telling, owing probably in part to my having as interpreter Leslie Wilbur, younger and less accustomed to me and the work than Jack Jones was.

To return to Inyo-kutavêre. He was stone blind. He was below the average of Mohave tallness, slight in figure, spare, almost frail with age. His gray hair was long and unkempt, his features were sharp, delicate, [and] sensitive. … He sat indoors, on the loose sand floor of his house, for the whole of the six days I was with him, in the frequent posture of Mohave men, his feet beneath him or behind him to the side, not with legs crossed. He sat still whether reciting or awaiting his turn, but drank in all the Sweet Caporal cigarettes I provided. His housemates sat about and listened, or went and came as they had things to do.

The tale is discussed in detail in parts 4, 5, and 6 [of Kroeber 1951]. A few of its more salient qualities are mentioned here now by way of preliminary orientation.

Like almost all elder Mohave, the narrator asserted he had dreamed his narrative, had seen it. …

The story is wholly without songs. It has “historical” appearance in that it might have actually happened almost as told. There is no magic or supernatural ingredient in the tale, beyond such occasional deeds as the Mohave believed living members of

― 441 ―

their tribe were able to perform or experience: sorcery, charming, omens. The strength or size of a leader is sometimes exaggerated, but almost never with any great extravagance. The story is therefore factually sober. As regards its content and form, it might well be history.

At the same time there is nothing to show that any of the events told of did happen, or that any of the numerous personages named ever existed. The type of events is largely drawn from Mohave pre-Caucasian actual tribal experience; but I doubt whether any of the specific incidents were really handed down by tradition. In short, the story is a pseudohistory. It is a product of imagination, not of recollection, and therefore [is] an e ort at literature. In that circumstance lies perhaps its greatest interest. It can in e ect be characterized as a prose epic, or at least an eort at one. It is also a secular epic: it contains neither mythology nor ritual elements, just as it is without trace of metrical or other formally stylized language, except to a very slight degree in the names of personages.^[4]

In my opinion, the one item of possible historical fact in the tale is that it may reflect a time when the Mohave were not yet permanent residents of Mohave Valley but were in the process of occupying it. Beyond that, the enumeration and localization of totemic bands or subclans after the conquest of Mohave Valley, as given in paragraphs 174–176 [of Kroeber 1951], probably rests on fact. But this list is static: it reflects the landholdings as they were more or less remembered to have existed synchronously a few generations ago—probably within a century before the telling. All the people and events of the long story I consider to be a fantasy, produced as an end in itself by the dreamer-narrator—and, with analogous but largely independent content, by a few other like-minded individuals.

The successful attainment of an appearance of historicity in a fantasy creation within an unlettered tribe, especially one wholly lacking mnemonic devices, is significant as a cultural event because of its unexpectedness and near-uniqueness. The historic-mindedness of the story is further evidenced by the consistent “nativeness” of the culture depicted: wheat, chickens, red cloth, white men are never even hinted at, though they have crept both into origin myths and ritual song-cycle tales of the Mohave. No purist ethnographer reconstructing the old culture could have been any stricter than Inyo-kutavêre.

― 442 ―

In our recording, Jack Jones allowed the old man to proceed—for perhaps five to ten minutes—until the interpreter had as much as he could remember, then Englished it to me. With omission of repetitions, condensation of verbiage, and some abbreviating of words, I nearly kept up writing in longhand. If Jack got too far ahead, I signaled him to wait. On the other hand, if names of new places or persons came too thickly, Jack would stop translating and ask Inyo-kutavêre to repeat the names slowly, directly to me.

NOTES

1. At the end of his introduction, Kroeber makes the following comments, which are important to understanding the format of the text as presented here:

To give a narrative of the prolixity of this one some organization, I have divided it into 197 paragraphs, according to sense, and then grouped these into 18 sections designated A to R [of which the present excerpt is section I]. For orientation I have also prefixed to each paragraph a summary side-head of my own manufacture, as well as title headings to the 18 sections. These heads are arbitrary: but I am sure they will help the reader. The need of organization was greater in this narrative than for most Mohave myths, which come punctuated by songs so that the narrator, as he concludes each incident or topic, naturally says “so many songs” and comes to a pause.

The translation is heavily annotated in the original publication (A. Kroeber 1951); the section presented here, for example, contains 147 endnotes. Only the most literarily germane of these notes have been included here, as footnotes. In addition, to open up the page for the reader and help make section-internal rhetorical organizations more transparent, I have “sub-paragraphed” the text within the numbered sections of Kroeber's original presentation.—HWL

2. They were not continuous. I took about two days o to wander about and pick up specimens, believing that even so Inyo-kutavêre would finish by the date on which I ought to return to the university.

3. Unless possibly, in some degree, a young man who was still learning from a father or other kinsman.

4. Unfortunately, because Kroeber did not record the Mojave and greatly reduced the amount of repetition and “excess verbiage” (see remarks in the final paragraph of this introduction), there is no way today to verify or contradict his assertion here.—HWL

― 443 ―

27. An Account of Origins

QUECHAN (YUMA) 1908TSUYUKWERÁU (JOE HOMER), NARRATORJ. P. HARRINGTON, COLLECTOR AND TRANSLATOR

INTRODUCTION BY J. P. HARRINGTON

[What follows is an excerpt from the introduction that accompanied Harrington's original publication in the Journal of American Folklore in 1908.^[1]Some of Harrington's comments here on the Quechan reflect the times he lived in. Anthropologists today no longer believe in the old-fashioned distinction between so-called primitive and modern cultures, once a staple of anthropological discourse. All contemporary human cultures by definition are modern cultures, regardless of level of technology or social organization. In any case, what Harrington appears to mean here is more along the lines of “uncontaminated” (by European influences), rather than “primitive” per se, with all its negative connotations.—HWL]

The Yuma occupy a central position in the Central Group.^[2] They held both banks of the Colorado from fifteen miles south to sixty miles north of the Gila confluence. They are now nearly all settled on the Yuma Indian Reservation, California, where they number in 1908 about 960, including over sixty persons belonging to other tribes.

The Yuma are still primitive in religion, and largely so in life. The Christian influence has been slight. Two missions were established among them in 1780 by the military commander of Sonora, but were

― 462 ―

destroyed by the Yuma the following summer. They were then free from missionaries for over a hundred years. The present Catholic Church is attended by few Indians. The Protestants have as yet no mission building. The medicine-men, who have much influence over the people, talk openly against the missionaries and regard their traditions as a perverted form of the Yuma traditions.

The religion of the Yuma, like that of the other tribes of the Central Group, is based on revelations received in dreams. Dreaming is declared to be more real than waking. Every individual “can dream vivid dreams”; and whatever is dreamed is believed either to have once happened or to be about to happen. Only a few men, however, dream proficiently and professionally. These are known as “dreamers” (sumátc). They have power to reach in their dreams the ceremonial house on the summit of Avikwaamé, a gigantic flat-topped mountain thirty miles north of Needles, California, called “Ghost Mountain” by the whites. There the dreamer finds everything as it was in the mythic past. There he receives instruction from Kumastamxo, the younger of the two great gods of the Yuma. All singing and dancing ceremonies are taught by Kumastamxo and his assistants on the top of that mountain, and the dreamer of such a ceremony is bidden to teach the others who are to participate. The various practices for curing the sick may be learned there, and there only. Thus “doctor” (kwasidhé) and “dreamer” (sumátc) are synonymous. When a man dreams myths, he usually dreams his way first to the top of that mountain, and there perceives with his senses everything which is narrated in the myth.

The “best dreamer” among the Yuma is Tsuyukweráu, a man of the Xavtsáts “nation,” whose English name is Joe Homer. He is about fortyfive years old, and the syphilis has already a ected his eyes so that he is almost totally blind. Besides the Yuma account of origins published herewith, which it takes him four days to tell, he knows a score of animal stories, some very long tales of adventure, and sixty-four ceremonial songs.^[3] This material was collected by me at my own expense. It has been carefully revised by the narrator himself.

Joe Homer made to me at various times the following statements concerning his powers and training as a dreamer:

Before I was born I would sometimes steal out of my mother's womb while she was sleeping, but it was dark and I did not go far …. Every good

― 463 ―

doctor begins to understand before he is born, so that when he is big he knows it all. … When a little boy, I took a trip up to Avikwaamé Mountain and slept at its base. I felt of my body with my two hands, but found it was not there. It took me four days and nights to go up there. Later I became able to approach even the top of the mountain. At last I reached the willow-roof in front of the dark-house there. Kumastamxo was within. It was so dark that I could hardly see him. He was naked and very large. Only a few great doctors were in there with him, but a crowd of men stood under the willow-roof before the house. I tried to enter, but could not. The lightnings were playing all about. They hurt my eyes. Since then I have grown blind. … When I was a boy, I used to eat jimsonweed leaves (smal^y kaapít^a) plucked from the west side of the plant, in order to make me dream well. …I now have power to go to Kumastamxo anytime, tonight if I want to. I lie down and try hard, and soon I am up there again with the crowd. He tells me everything I want to know, and it takes only a little while to go there. …He teaches me to cure by spitting and sucking. …He tells me when I “speech” or sing wrong. …One night Kumastamxo spit up blood. He told me, “Come here, little boy, and suck my chest.” I placed my hands on his ribs and sucked his sickness (hiráv^a) out. Then he said, “You are a consumption dreamer.^[4] When anybody has the consumption, lay your hands on him and suck the pain out continually, and in four months he will be well.” When I returned home, I went to my nephew, whose lungs were all rotten. He spit all the time. I took him to my house for four months. I sucked his chest till I sucked the sickness out. Now he is well and is going to school. …It takes four days to tell all about Kwikumat and Kumastamxo. I am the only man who can tell it right. I was present from the very beginning, and saw and heard all. I dreamed a little of it at a time. I would then tell it to my friends. The old men would say, “That is right! I was there and heard it myself.” Or they would say, “You have dreamed poorly. That is not right.” And they would tell me right. So at last I learned the whole of it right.

This approval and disapproval by the old men, it would seem, tends to unify versions of the same myth originating in the dreams of various dreamers, rendering the Yuma myths less variable than those of some peoples who do not claim to dream their mythology.

Since the writer hopes to publish in a subsequent number of this journal shorter creation myths of the Cocopa, Mohave, and Wallapai, a discussion of Joe Homer's Yuma account will be reserved till then.^[5] Let him here, therefore, merely hint at Christian influence, and point out how

― 464 ―

this myth di ers from similar myths found among the Mohave.^[6] The myth di ers from any similar account which has been found among the Mohave in the prominence and creative activity of Kwikumat (in Mohave, Matavíl^ya), who in Mohave mythology merely leads the people to Axavol^y pó, builds a house there, and dies; in the mention of Blind-OldMan; in the doctrine of four destructions of the people; in the prominence of Marxokuvek, “the first Yuma Indian”; in the instruction of the people by Kumastamxo (in Mohave, Mastamxó) at Axavol^y pó as well as at Avikwaamé; and in the vivid description in the story of Rattlesnake and the account of the cremation of Kwikumat.

NOTES

1. I have done little to emend or modernize Harrington's 1908 text. Readers should note, therefore, that Harrington's spelling of Quechan words—as also his spelling of certain tribal designations, like “Mohave” and “Wallapai”—is no longer consistent with contemporary practice. (For a layperson's guide to modern Quechan orthography, see Hinton and Watahomigie 1984:296–97.)

In only three areas have I felt the need for editorial “tinkering.” First, both introduction and translation are heavily footnoted in Harrington's original, mostly with etymological information; I have retained only those notes that are germane to the story itself. Second, for convenience of reference in such a long and complex myth, I have added numbering to Harrington's original paragraphs and, on occasion, seen fit to break some of the longer paragraphs into (unnumbered) “subparagraphs.” Third, I have inserted section titles in brackets at three points in the narrative; these titles correspond to apparent divisions at the highest level of thematic organization and are intended as “guideposts” for the reader.

Finally, a word about the Latin passages encountered in the translation. In deference to the more delicate sensibilities of his time, Harrington translated the “dirty bits” of this myth into Latin, as was then customary in publications of this nature. Since few readers today are likely to be conversant in Latin, I have had these passages translated into English. Instead of silently replacing the Latin text with English, though, I have gathered the translated passages in a section of their own at the end of the myth—not out of some outmoded sense of decorum, but simply because I find the Latin passages of the original version pleasantly quaint. Harrington's translation—like all translations, whether we are aware of it or not—is very much a product of his literary time and fashion. To replace the Latin, I felt, would have damaged this translation's patina of age.—HWL

― 465 ―

2. The “Central Group” that Harrington mentions here refers to an earlier classification (now no longer considered to be a single branch of Yuman) that included—in addition to Quechan (a.k.a. “Yuma”) itself—Mojave, Maricopa, Diegueño, and Cocopa.—HWL

3. Only a few of these songs were recorded by me. They, as well as the songs which occur in the myths and animal stories, abound in archaic, mutilated, and repeated wordforms. Compare the song “wat^c amár umár, wak^y ak^yér uk^yér” (‘the house will burn, the house will crackle’) with Yuma prose, “avat^c hamárk, hak^yérk.”

4. A Yuma doctor usually treats only one class of diseases. He is a “specialist.”

5. Harrington refers here to the Journal of American Folklore, where this myth originally appeared.—HWL

6. The Indians compare Kwikumat with the God, Blind-Old-Man with the Devil, and Kumastamxo with the Jesus of the Christians.

An Account of Origins

[The Age of Kwikumat]

1. There was water everywhere. There was no land. Kwikumat and another man who at that time had no name kept moving at the bottom

― 466 ―

of the water. Suddenly with a rumbling sound Kwikumat emerged and stood on top of the water. The other man wished also to come to the surface. He asked Kwikumat, “How did you emerge from the water?” Kwikumat said, “I opened my eyes.” He had really held them closed. When the other man opened his eyes, the waters fell into them and blinded him. As he emerged, Kwikumat gave him his name: Kweraák Kutár (‘Blind-Old-Man’).

2. All was dark. There were neither sun, nor moon, nor stars. Kwikumat was not pleased. He took four steps north, and four back. He then stepped in like manner west, south, and east. This made the water subside. He stirred the water with his forefinger as he sang four times—

	I am stirring it around, I am stirring it around.
	It will be dry land, it will be dry land.

The place about which he stirred became an island.

3. “Aqa,” said Blind-Old-Man, “it is too small. There will not be room enough for the people.”—“Be patient, you old fool!” said Kwikumat. Blind-Old-Man seated himself on the ground and took up some mud. He shaped out of it clay dolls (hantapáp) such as boys now make. He made them after his own fashion, asking Kwikumat for no instruction. He stood them in a row. Kwikumat stood behind Blind-Old-Man. “What are you trying to make?” asked he. “People,” said Blind-Old-Man. “You must first watch how I make them,” said Kwikumat. Blind-Old-Man said nothing. He was angry.

4. Kwikumat said, “I will make the moon first.” He faced the east. He placed spittle on the forefinger of his right hand and rubbed it like paint on the eastern sky until he made a round, shiny place. Said Blind-OldMan, “Something is coming.”—“I call it the moon (hal^y'á),” said Kwikumat. He made just one star at the same time. Kwikumat said, “This moon shall not stand still. It shall move toward the west.” Blind-Old-Man said, “But it will go into the water, and how will it get out again?”—“I shall turn the sky, so that the moon will move along the northern horizon and thus reach the east again.”

5. “I do not believe that,” said Blind-Old-Man, as he continued working on his mud people. Kwikumat sat down also and took up some mud.

― 467 ―

He feared that Blind-Old-Man might anticipate him in creating people, and that Blind-Old-Man's people might be wrongly made. First he made a Yuma man, then a Diegueño man, then a Yuma woman and a Diegueño woman. Next he made a Cocopa man and a Maricopa man, a Cocopa woman and a Maricopa woman. They lay there on the ground.

6. Blind-Old-Man showed Kwikumat some of the people he had made. They had feet but not toes, hands but no fingers. “They are not right,” said Kwikumat, “the fingers are webbed. How can your man use his hands? Like you, I made hands, but I also made fingers and fingernails; like you, I made feet, but I also made toes and toenails.” BlindOld-Man felt grieved at this. “But my man is better, because, if he wishes to pick up anything, he can pick up plenty of it.”—“No,” said Kwikumat, “your man is not right. I made ten fingers. If my man injures some of them, he has still some left, and can use his hands; but when your man hurts his hand, it will become sore all over.”

Saying this, he sprang toward Blind-Old-Man and kicked the figures which he had made into the water. Blind-Old-Man, raging with anger, sank into the water after them, making a great whirlpool which emitted all kinds of sicknesses. Kwikumat promptly placed his foot upon the whirlpool. But some foul wind still escaped. If none had escaped, there would be no sickness in the world. Blind-Old-Man remained beneath the water, emitting sickness. Kwikumat stood long on the shore, watching and listening.

7. When Kwikumat returned to the people he had formed, he picked up the Yuma man. Lifting him by the armpits, he swung him far north and back, west and back, south and back, east and back. Previously this man had been as long as a human hand. Now he was as long as we are. This man had all his senses, but he could not talk. Kwikumat commanded him to keep his eyes closed. Then Kwikumat animated the other people in the same way. He swung the Cocopa man south first, then east, west, but did not swing him north, for he was to dwell in the south. He swung the Maricopa man east, north, south, but did not swing him west, for he was to dwell in the east.

8. Kwikumat next gave the people speech. He took the Yuma man aside and thrice commanded him to speak. He understood, but could not speak. At the fourth command he spoke a few words. Then Kwikumat

― 468 ―

gave him his name, Kwitc^yán^a. In like manner Kwikumat made each of the other men talk. He named the Diegueño Kamyá, the Cocopa Kwikapá, the Maricopa Xatpá. Kwikumat did not teach the women to talk. They learned from the men.

9.The Yuma man looked into the face of the Diegueño, and the two became friends. The Cocopa man stood close to the Maricopa, and the two became friends.

10. The Yuma woman meditated, “Why did Kwikumat make women di erent from men? How shall children be born?” A man overheard her and said, “I will ask Kwikumat.” But Kwikumat said to the woman, “I know already the thoughts which you are hiding in your heart. Why be bashful? Women alone cannot conceive children. You must marry that Yuma man.” Hearing this, the woman felt happy. But she meditated again, “I want a good-looking husband. I do not want that Yuma man. The Cocopa man is handsomer.” She wished to marry the Cocopa man. She looked very sweetly at him. Kwikumat said, “Do not marry the Cocopa man, for you and he are destined to dwell in di erent places.”

The woman did not believe Kwikumat. She went aside and sulked. Blind-Old-Man arose out of the water and found her here. He said, “Do not believe what Kwikumat tells you. He can do nothing for you. But if you believe in me, you will have many possessions and eat six meals each day.” Kwikumat had become aware of Blind-Old-Man's presence, although he did not see him. As he sprang toward the woman, Blind-OldMan disappeared in the ground. Kwikumat said to the woman, “You did not believe what I told you. Therefore I shall destroy you and all the other people.”

Kwikumat then faced the north and talked rapidly four times. Then it rained for four days. Water covered the earth. The people were still swimming about when the rain ceased. Kwikumat picked them up, and said, “I will make you into wild beasts.” He made from the Cocopa the mockingbird (sukwil^y lá); from the Diegueño the deer (akwák); from the Maricopa the buzzard (asé). The Yuma man only he retained in human form, and named him Marxókuvék.

[*] Ancestor and especial friend of the Yuma Indians. In Yuma and Mohave, marxó means ‘groundsquirrel’.

“I cannot accomplish much thus alone in the world,” said Marxókuvék. Kwikumat said, “I will teach you

― 469 ―

how to make other people, and how to help me fix up the world. I made earth, sky, moon, and star, and even the darkness of night, and I shall make other things also.” Kwikumat was standing on the water. He sang four times—

	This water is not deep. I could drink all this water.
	This water is good. I could drink it.

He told Marxókuvék to close his eyes. As he did so, the water went down until they stood on the ground.

11. “I made eight people,” said Kwikumat, “and they had no faith in me. This time I shall make twenty-four. And I shall make them right.” He kept wandering about. He went west, then east. At last he said, “Here is the center of this world. Here I shall build my dark-house.”

[*] In Yuma, avakutinyám—a house without openings, used, according to this myth, like any other Yuma house, both as a dwelling and for religious purposes.

He picked four head-lice (n^y iíl^y) o himself and threw them on the mud. They became little black-abdomened ant (xurú), little red piss-ant (xanapúk), big red ant (tc^y amadhúl y), and big black ant that lives on the mesa (tc^y amadhul^y avi). They dug holes. They drained the mud dry. “How will you build your house?” asked Marxókuvék. He did not have a stick or a pole or a cottonwood trunk. He created these by thought. Four posts were born in the darkness, then other material. Then he built his dark-house. “I call this place Cottonwood Post (Axavol^y pó),” he said.

12. Marxókuvék made a man out of mud. He asked for no instruction. His man looked good to ride on, so he jumped on his back. Kwikumat cried, “Now that you have ridden on him, he will never walk on his hind legs only. I call him the burro (alavúr).”

13. Kwikumat created a woman and a man. The man asked the woman, “Has Kwikumat told you any secrets?”—“None,” said the woman, “but I am going to ask him.” The woman went to the dark-house, and Marxókuvék called Kwikumat thither. “I want you to marry the Yuma man whom I have just made,” said Kwikumat. “But I want to bear a child,” said the woman, “and he does not know what to do.” Kwikumat said, “I will show you, but do not tell anybody.” He told Marxókuvék to prevent the Yuma man from coming about. The woman was frightened.

― 470 ―

She thought that she would conceive by merely standing there in the darkhouse. Ut virgo bene intellegeret, ipse ei quid facturum esset demonstravit. Cum ea enim humi concubuit et quater copulavit. Femina, multum sudans, sibi sudorem quater manibus abstersit. [See p. 488, A.]

Kwikumat then named the woman Xavasumkul^yí, and the man Xavasumkuwá. In four days the woman became sick. She wanted a doctor. There was none to be had. But the baby within her was already a wise doctor. He told her, “Lie down!” Then he made himself very small, so that he would not cause the woman pain. In a few days he could walk and talk. Kwikumat named him Kumastamxó, and told him that he was his son and assistant in fixing up the world.

14. “Is it to be dark always?” asked Kumastamxo. “The moon and the star shine dimly.” Kumastamxo spit on his fingers and sprinkled the spittle over all the sky. Thus he made the stars. Then he rubbed his fingers until they shone, and, drawing the sky down to himself, he painted a great face upon it, rubbing till it shone brightly. “What are you going to call that?” asked Kwikumat. “This is the sun (in^yá). The moon goes west and returns, it dies and in two days it is born again. But I have made the sun at a di erent time, and it shall move di erently.” Kumastamxo allowed Marxókuvék to make daylight and darkness. “Both eternal darkness and eternal daylight would strain our eyes. Therefore one half of the time it shall be night (tin^yám), and one half day (in^yám^e k). Some creatures will sleep by day, some by night.”

15. Kwikumat made another Yuma man and a Diegueño man and instructed them in the dark-house. Then he made a Cocopa man, a Maricopa, an Apache, a Wallapai, a Havasupai, a Chemehuevi, and a Kawia, and a wife for each. Marxokuvek said, “These are enough. If you make more people, this earth will be too small for them.” Kwikumat told him that the earth was growing bigger all the time.

16. Kumastamxo stamped until he shook earth and sky. Everything was frightened. Kwikumat was in the dark-house. He knew that Kumastamxo was trying to make cracks in the earth, so that plants and trees might grow up. The arrow-weed (isáv) was the first plant to grow up through the cracks in the mud.

17. Kumastamxo talked north four times. He said, “It will hail.” But the sky-kernels (amain^y etadhítc) which fell were not hail-stones, but grains

― 471 ―

of corn. The people began to eat them. “Do not eat them all,” cried Kumastamxo. “Plant some.”—“How shall we plant them? With our hands?” He sent the people north to get sticks. Each one found a sharp stick. “This is corn (tadhíitc),” said Kumastamxo. “Take it, plant it.”

18. Kumastamxo then made seeds of the gourd (axmá) and melon (tsemetó). He made them out of spittle. He gave them to the Cocopa. He gave seeds of the prickly pear (aá) to the Maricopa. The people planted the seeds in the wet ground.

19. Nobody knew how to make it rain. “To the Maricopa man alone I give power to produce and to stop rain,” said Kumastamxo. “When the people thirst, let them remember me, for I have power to cover up the face of the sun with a rain-cloud and to send a rain-wind every day. When a man plants upon dry ground, let him remember me. If he calls my name and sees me, it will rain four or five days, and he can plant his seed.”

20. Kwikumat said, “I am tired. I think I shall take a rest. It is about time to have some darkness.” Kumastamxo said, “I will give you all the darkness you want.” He fastened the sky so that the sun could never rise again. But Kwikumat stamped four times. This jarred the sky free, and the sun came up. Kumastamxo was in the dark-house. He said, “I see the daylight coming. Who did that?”—“I did,” said Kwikumat.

21. Marxókuvék tried to make some people. He made the coyote (xatal y wí). Coyote began at once to look for something to eat. He would not stand still. Marxókuvék also made the raven (akák), the mountainlion (numéta), and the cougar (axatakúl y). Kwikumat appointed Coyote as head man (piipá xe l tanák) over these three. Marxókuvék next created a girl and a boy. He was about to name them when Coyote said that he wished to. Coyote named the girl Sakil^y kil^y namá,

[*] Joe Homer tells a very long myth about Sakil^y kil^y namá, who weds Madhemkwisám.

and the boy Ax'al^y esmetn^y itc^yót.

22. Kwikumat noticed that none of these people were behaving properly. Mountain-lion tried to catch Sakil^y kil^y namá. Kwikumat told him to stop. After that he prowled about, trying to catch Marxókuvék and Kumastamxo, and even Kwikumat himself. “I must get rid of these animals,” said Kwikumat. He assembled all the good people in the darkhouse. He talked rapidly at each of the four corners, invoking a flood.

― 472 ―

First came a blinding dust storm. Then it rained thirty days. No water entered the dark-house. In vain the wicked besought Kwikumat to let them in. Most of them were drowned. Burro has, since then, great white spots on his belly.

23. Raven flew up to heaven. He hung by his beak at the very top of the sky. The water rose until it wet his tail. One can see where the water touched it. Then Kumastamxo caused the water to subside, for he did not want to drown this bird, for he was so pretty. Raven was black at first, and was then called akák; but Kumastamxo gave him many-colored feathers, and then named him kukó.

[*] In Wallapai, kukwóka means ‘woodpecker’.

Kumastamxo built him a cage, and in this he floated on the subsiding waters. Kumastamxo built the cage out of nothing, because he loved Kuko so much. When the cage rested on the earth, Kuko wished for freedom. In return for his freedom, he promised to be a faithful servant of Kumastamxo. He accompanied Kumastamxo everywhere he went. He would ascend high in the air and, descending, report to him what he saw. He could hear the tread of an enemy a day's journey distant.

[†] In Joe Homer's version of the Kwiyu myth, Kuko guides Kumastamxo to the dwelling of Axalykutatc.

24. When the water had subsided and the earth began to grow dusty again, Kwikumat told the people that they might go outside the darkhouse. Far in the west the storm was disappearing over the ocean.

25. The water sank so low that little was left in the ocean. Blind-OldMan feared it would dry up. He crawled out upon the northern shore. He found Xavasumkul^yí and Xavasumkuwá in the dark-house. He promised them many things if they would renounce Kwikumat. He told them, “Kwikumat is going to kill you by and by.” Xavasumkuwá believed him. But Xavasumkul^yí showed that she did not believe him, and feared him. Blind-Old-Man tried to seize her. She ran. He caught her. He promised her six meals a day. “Bring them here, then,” she said. “I would like to,” he said, “but I fear Kwikumat.” Kwikumat approached, and Blind-Old-Man sank into the earth. “He had a tail, and claws on his fingers,” said Xavasumkul^yí. “He wishes to take you down under the earth,” said Kwikumat. “How could you catch anything to eat down there?”

― 473 ―

26. Xavasumkul^yí walked over to where the people were standing, and told them how to produce children. They did not believe her. Nec invitus unus ex viris conatus est ea agere quae ipsa dixisset. Penem autem in anum et non in vaginam inseruit. “Mox pariam aliquid,” dixit femina. Exspectavit parere infantem paene eodem temporis momento. Cum id non accederit ea femina et ceterae ira commotae sunt. “Cur in me incensae estis?” inquit Xavasumkul yí. Atque iterum explicavit, “Vaginae penem insere!” At ille vir in vaginam quidem non penem sed testes inseruit.

Turn rediens ea marito dixit illas mulieres numquam concepturas esse. Kwikumat eam incusavit quod dixisset ceteris ea quae ipse eam occultim docuerat. “Nec metuo ne intellegant,” Xavasumkul y í inquit. Kwikumat jussit: “Duc has mulieres gradus quattuor ad septentriones, ad occidentem, ad meridiem, ad orientem et ego, item, viros ducam.” Hac saltatione facta imperavit omnibus ut humi jacerent et copularent. [See p. 488, B.]

27. Because Kwikumat had wearied in his work and had stamped the sun loose again, Kumastamxo felt anger against him and boasted that he was the greater of the two. Kwikumat said, “You are only my little boy, too young to do better.” Kumastamxo went into the dark-house and dreamed Kwikumat and Marxókuvék sick.

28. Kwikumat became crazy. He tried to turn the sky north instead of west. Then he walked from the dark-house out into the desert. He walked east, then west. Since he had turned the sky the wrong way, it got stuck, and would not turn at all. “Can I assist you?” asked Kumastamxo.

29. Kwikumat seated himself on a mountain and thought that he would make some more people. So he picked up a little stick, and, taking mud on his forefinger, he plastered it upon one end. Then he threw the stick away. This made it angry. It became the rattlesnake (av e '). The mud became the rattle. Rattlesnake feared the people, and they feared him. But the people discovered him and surrounded him. He tried to catch a woman. But the Apache Indian seized him and tied him around his waist. Kwikumat gave him power to do this, and he in turn gave power to his friends. Rattlesnake bit several persons. Among those bitten was Marxókuvék. Everybody said, “Kill that snake.” But Marxókuvék was unwilling to kill it, for he knew that this would displease the Apache. “I suppose that I am going to die,” said Marxókuvék.

― 474 ―

“No, you will not die,” said Kwikumat, who then bade the people catch Rattlesnake and pull o his rattle, so that if Rattlesnake should thereafter bite anybody, the bite would not poison. Kwikumat then threw Rattlesnake far to the north. There he made a roaring sound, trying to make his rattle grow again. A man said that Rattlesnake had other rattles in his mouth. Kwikumat caught him again and opened his mouth. He found no rattles, no teeth, no poison. He then hurled Rattlesnake so far to the north that he fell into the ocean. He swam swiftly through the water, but soon went to the bottom, where he dwelt and grew fat.

30. The people asked Kumastamxo, “If we fall sick, who will cure us?”—“Men who have been instructed,” said Kumastamxo. “We do not believe that,” said the people, “for when you get sick, you cannot even cure yourself.” Kumastamxo called all the Yuma men into the dark-house. “You are my favorite people,” said he, “and I will tell you all secrets.” He then made a dust storm arise in the east. It covered up the sun. It became like night. “Now sleep,” said Kumastamxo. Dreams came. One man noticed that Kumastamxo's eyes were sore. He rubbed spittle on them and cured them. Another man saw that Kumastamxo had rheumatism. He found the pain and pressed it out. To another man Kumastamxo appeared to have the diarrhea. Kumastamxo sang, and this man sang with him, till it became cured. When a man talked wrongly, Kumastamxo stopped him, and asked another man to talk. “Most of you fellows talk right,” he said, “and will be great doctors. If a man gets sick, let him call a Yuma doctor.”

31. Marxókuvék had died from the snakebite. Kwikumat said, “Come here, you doctors, and cure this man. It is a difficult case. He is already dead. Well, I will show you how.” He grasped Marxókuvék's hands. He then made himself imagine that Marxókuvék was breathing. “This man is not dead, but sleeps. I shall awaken him.” He then took a stride in each of the four directions, reaching the ocean which surrounds the earth each time. Then a whirlwind came and breathed upon Marxókuvék. He stood up with closed eyes. Kwikumat then called the thunder from the west. All the places about grew bright. Marxókuvék opened his eyes. “You were sleeping too long,” said Kwikumat, “so I awakened you.”—“The snake bit me, and I felt drowsy,” said Marxókuvék. “You died,” said Kwikumat, “but the whirlwind came and cured you.” When the people

― 475 ―

learned that medicine-men had such power, they were afraid that they might kill as well as cure.

32. All the women asked one another, “What is coming within me?” They asked Xavasumkul^yí what was to happen, but she would not tell. All the children were born on the same day. The women were disappointed in them. “Why so small?” they said. “We wished to bear big men and women. These have not even hair on their heads, and cannot stand erect on their hind legs.” They did not know that babies have to grow up. Kwikumat told them, “You will bear no more children unless you cohabit again.”

33. Kwikumat created four more men—the Wallapai, Mohave, White, and Mexican. Some of these held themselves aloof from the other people. Kwikumat stamped four times in anger, and fire sprang up all over the earth. Kumastamxo saved the good people by covering them up with snow. The Mexican and the White escaped by flight. “This will not do,” said Kumastamxo. “You make people and then destroy them, only because you yourself did not make them right.” Kwikumat felt ashamed, and quenched the fires by rain.

34. Kwikumat took two whitish sticks. One he threw east, where it became a horse. The other he threw into the water, where it became a boat. He gave boat and horse to the whites.

35. Kumastamxo told the whites that if they would enter the darkhouse, he would instruct them. But they distrusted him. They were rich and stingy. Kumastamxo told the Indians to drive them away. When the latter hesitated to do this, Kumastamxo invoked a hot windstorm, and the whites fled far to the west in a boat.

36. The people heard a great noise in the water. It seems that the figures made by Blind-Old-Man which Kwikumat had kicked into the water had come to life. The people were the duck (xanamó), the beaver (apén), the turtle (kupéta), and the wild goose (yelák). Their fingers and toes were webbed. “I fear they will kill us,” said Kwikumat.

37. Kumastamxo made bow and arrows and gave them to the people. He then threw a handful of mud north, where it became a bird. “Shoot that,” he said. The Cocopa man shot at it. But the arrow broke, for the bird was hard as stone. The man felt sad. He had no more arrows. Kumastamxo pulled up an arrow-weed and showed how to make arrows.

― 476 ―

He then went west and turned himself into a deer. He asked the Yuma man to shoot the deer. He refused, for he knew it was Kumastamxo. The Apache, however, shot into the hindquarters of the deer, which fell to the ground. When he tried to skin it, Kumastamxo said, “Foolish man! That deer is of stone.” This explains why the Apache kill deer. Kumastamxo was angry because the Apache shot at him and gave bow and arrows to the Yuma man alone, and forbade the others to use them. A big stone was coming out of the ground. That was the bow.

38. Kwikumat made another flood. The waves made the mountains and the high places as they now are. Before then the earth was flat. Kumastamxo lifted one man and one woman of each kind of people upon his shoulders. Nonnulli refugium petierunt in ejus anum ascendentes. [See p. 488, C.] Others stood on the top of Avihaatác Mountain. When these entreated Kumastamxo to save them, he turned them into rocks. It rained forty days. Kumastamxo spread his arms four times. The waters went down.

39. When the earth was dry again, Kwikumat created just one person more, Akoikwitc^yán (‘Yuma-Old-Woman’). She belonged to the Xavtsats nation.

[THE DEATH OF KWIKUMAT]

40. Kwikumat had no wife, but he had a daughter, Xavasúmkulapláp (‘Blue-Green-Bottom-of-her-Foot’). People now call her the Frog (Xan^yé). She was born in the water, like Kwikumat himself. They lived in the darkhouse. Kwikumat lay at the north wall of the house. Frog lay naked by the door. Kwikumat felt sick. He staggered outside to defecate. As he passed Frog, he touched her private parts with his hand. He went south and defecated. Frog straightway turned over and burrowed under the earth. Coming up under Kwikumat, she opened wide her mouth, into which fell four pieces of excrement. She then burrowed back to the hut and lay down as before. Kwikumat came back into the house dizzy and groaning. All his strength had left him. Frog said, “Father, what ails you?”

	“I am sick, I am sick.
	What made me sick? What made me sick?

― 477 ―

	Did rain-cloud make me sick?
	Did foul-wind make me sick?
	My head is sick, my belly is sick,
	My limbs are sick, my heart is sick.”

Kwikumat lay with his head turned successively in all four directions. The people squatted around. All the doctors together could not cure him.

41. The Badger (Maxwá) fetched cool sand and placed it on his breast. Although Badger was not a doctor and did not know the reason for his own action, Kwikumat said, “I think I am getting better.” Then he grew sicker. He said, “I do not think I shall live long, I am going to die. But I shall feel all right again sometime, somewhere.” The people did not understand what he meant by “die.” His was the first death. Kwikumat sweated. His sweat is white pigment. They get it north of Yuma. Beaver threw some clothes over him, for he felt cold. That is why people wear clothes. Kwikumat called to Kumastamxo, “Little boy, come here!” The fourth time Kumastamxo heard him. Kwikumat told him, “I am going far away. I leave everything in your care. Complete my works! I have taught you long. Do everything right.” Frog said, “He is nearly dead. I will flee from here.” She burrowed under the earth.

42. When the dawn came, Kwikumat died. He lay in the dark-house. His head was toward the west. All the people were silent. They thought he was asleep. Wren (Xanavtcíp) said, “He is dead. He is a shadow. He is a wind. You will never know him more.”

43. Kwikumat, when dying, told Coyote, “Since I placed you as chief over three, you must behave yourself and set a good example.” Kwikumat knew that Coyote intended to steal his heart, and all the others knew it also. Wren said to Coyote, “You take my heart as a substitute” (‘In^yép iwá madháuk matsin yóxa’).

[*] Often said at cremations in a figurative sense.

And the people understood that Coyote would take Wren's heart instead of Kwikumat's.

44. Wren deliberated silently how he might thwart Coyote in his purpose. He asked himself, “Shall we hide the body? Shall we throw it into the water? Shall we burn it up?” Wren said to the people, “We must burn him up.” Wren then told Beaver, “Fetch cottonwood-logs from the north,

― 478 ―

where you will find them standing dry, ready to burn.” Beaver felled them with his teeth. He brought them back with his teeth. Wren told the antlion (manisaár), “Dig a hole here quickly; dig it as long, broad, and deep as a man.” When the hole was finished, Wren commanded Beaver to fill it with dry arrow-weed, and then to lay three logs lengthwise across the hole, and two more on each side of these. Beaver had brought only four. He had to fetch three more. On these logs Beaver and others piled dry logs and arrow-weed.

45. There was no door nor opening in the dark-house. “Which side shall we tear open in order to take the body out?” asked Kumastamxo and Marxókuvék. They decided to bear it south. Wren said, “Because some of us are born in the north, bear it north.” Wren said, “Lift him up!” They seized the body with their hands. They took one step north. Then they laid it down. They were still inside the house. Kumastamxo broke open the north wall without touching it. Then they took another step north and laid it down again. Thus with four steps they laid it, head south and face down, on the pyre, and piled wood and arrow-weed over it.

46. All was ready. But they had no fire. Wren sent Coyote east to get fire. He told him to run to the place where Kumastamxo had rubbed his spittle on the sky. He did not wish to have Coyote about. Coyote reached the dawn with four bounds. He rubbed his tail in the white fire. Meanwhile Wren directed two women to make fire. They were the House-Fly (Xalesmó) and Big-Blue-Fly (Kwixvacó). They took turns at twirling a dry arrow-weed stalk on a piece of willow-wood. They fed the sparks with willow-bark. Kumastamxo said that all people would make fire thus. Lizard (Kwaatul^y) lighted a wisp of arrow-weed. He lighted the southeast corner of the pyre first, and last of all the southwest corner.

Coyote came bounding back, his tail all light. He leaped straight for the burning pyre. He was angry. The light on his tail went out. That is why it is black on the end. “Stand close together!” all the people cried, “for he is going to jump.” They crowded thickly about the fire. Badger and Squirrel (Xomir) were the shortest men. Coyote sprang over these, seized Kwikumat's heart in his teeth, and then, springing back again, ran swiftly southwest. Chicken-Hawk (Its'ór^a) was the best runner in the crowd. They sent him after Coyote. But Coyote left Chicken-Hawk far behind. Still he did not stop. Only when he had reached the Maricopa country did he lay the heart down and eat it. The heart became a mountain.

― 479 ―

It is called Greasy Mountain (Avikwaxós). It is greasy from the fat of the heart. It is always shady about this mountain.

47. After Coyote ate that heart, his mouth was black and his tongue blood-red. They were burnt by the heart. Kumastamxo said, “Coyote is not worthy of being called a man. He shall be wild. He shall have neither a friend nor a home. He shall sneak about the mountains and sleep with the jack-rabbits. I call him Xuksaraviyöu.”

Coyote was crazy. He tried to marry his own daughter. One day he noticed a girl among the bushes cui erat vagina ulcerosa et putrida, quam omnes fugerent. Cum ad eam lupus decurreret, exterrita in manus genuaque descendit. Tum lupus cum ea copulavit. [See p. 489, D.] He could not disengage himself. The girl carried him with her up to the sky. Coyote may still be recognized as the dark spot on the moon.

48. All sat in silent grief about the burning pyre. The old people felt saddest, for they knew they must soon share Kwikumat's fate. But none knew about crying. It was the Yuma man who cried first. His name was Xanavá. He is now a kind of red bug which cries, “Tci-tci!” He was sitting on a mesquite-tree, looking at the ground. He raised his little voice, and cried, “Tci-tci-tci-tci!” Then Tin^y amxworxwár joined in. He cried, “Xwurrxwurr!” He was sitting on a willow-tree. He is now a green bug. All the people began to cry, everything cried. The wind cried. The sky cried. Kumastamxo shouted, “Because we have lost our father, all people will lose their fathers. Our father dies. Everybody dies. People are born and must die. Otherwise there would be too many people. They would have to sleep on top of one another. Maybe somebody would defecate all over you.” As he said these words, all the people trimmed their hair (or feathers) and threw it into the fire. Deer (Akwák), Jack-Rabbit (Akúl^y), Cotton-Tail (Xal^yáw), and Bear (Maxwát) cut their tails o and threw them in. They found it hard to make their tails grow again. Roadrunner (Tal^y pó) was the only man who kept his tail long. He needed it.

49. A whirlwind now blew all about. The people thought that Kwikumat was about to appear again. “No,” said Kumastamxo, “that is the holy spirit-wind. Sometimes it will come very near you. But you will see nobody, only dust-laden wind.” He sang four times—

	The wind is wandering, is wandering.
	The wind is wandering, is wandering.

― 480 ―

Then all the people cried anew.

50. Kumastamxo said, “Wren was a poor manager. Henceforth I will attend to everything myself.”

51. Frog kept burrowing beneath the earth with guilt and fear in her heart. She felt that she must emerge in order to open her mouth and cool it, for it was burning hot from the excrement which she had eaten. But hearing the wailing of all things, she burrowed under again, lest the people discover and kill her. She emerged four times—(1) at Amatkoxwítc, a round pit near Mellen, Arizona; (2) at Samkótcave,

[*] In this hole the Yavapai are said to have married.

a hole in the ground near Bill Williams Fork, three miles above its confluence with the Colorado; (3) at Avix^aá, Cottonwood Mountain, a mile east of Yuma, Arizona; (4) at Avixan^yé, Frog Mountain, near Tucson, Arizona. Frog was transformed into this mountain.

[THE AGE OF KUMASTAMXO]

52. Rattlesnake remained in the ocean. He feared to come on shore, lest the people take vengeance upon him for having bitten Marxókuvék. He grew to such enormous size that he could encircle the earth with his body. The people feared that if Kumaiavěta were allowed to grow much larger, he might come on land and kill them all. Kumaiav;ta was a powerful doctor. Kumastamxo feared that he might send forth pestilence from under the water, or that he might eat somebody's excrement, as Frog had done. Therefore Kumastamxo resolved to destroy Kumaiavěta. “We will summon him to Axavol^y po,” said Kumastamxo, “and I will manage the rest.” Kumastamxo sent Spider (Xal^y tót) to request Kumaiavěta to come to Axavol^y po in order to cure a sick man there. Spider darted down and back. “Kumaiavěta says that he does not wish to come.”—“Tell Kumaiavěta that the man will die if he does not hasten hither,” said Kumastamxo to Spider.

When Spider delivered this message, Kumaiavěta said, “It is my duty as doctor to go, although I know exactly what you fellows are trying to do. I have, however, one request. Grind corn and place some of it at four places on my way, that I may not famish on the long journey.” When Kumaiavěta reached the first stopping-place, he found more corn there

― 481 ―

than he could eat. He thought, “I know now that they wish to kill me, since they have placed a lunch for me here. But it is my duty to go ahead.” Spider said, “You had better hasten, lest the man die.” At that Kumaiavěta grew angry. He shook his tail, making a noise like thunder. Enveloped in storm-dust and lightning, he reached Axavol^y po. The people all fled from the dark-house when they saw that Kumaiavěta had four heads. Only Kumastamxo remained within. Kumaiavěta smelled of the house. “Nobody is in there,” said the people. “Yes, a sick man is there,” said Kumaiavěta. “That is true,” said the people, “but we thought you would prefer not to have us about when you cure him, so we came outside.”

Kumastamxo stood inside the house, west of the door. In his hand he held a great stone knife. There was no sick man there. He had merely thrown up earth in the center of the floor, so as to resemble a sick man. Kumaiavěta tried in vain to wedge his heads through the door. Kumastamxo made the door wider. Kumaiavěta then caught scent of Kumastamxo. He pushed his four heads inside the house. With a single blow Kumastamxo severed all four heads from the neck. Then he sprang outside, leaving the heads in the room. He brandished his knife before the people. “When you want to kill somebody, use this.” This is why people have knives. He tossed it up and caught it. Kumastamxo said, “Because Kumaiavěta has been killed, other bad doctors will be killed.” There is blood and spittle in the mountains all along where Kumaiavěta's body lay. The whites call the red “gold” and the white “silver.” Kumastamxo took the four heads, cut them apart, and pounded up each one separately west of Axavol^y po. They are now gravel-beds.

Kumastamxo said, “I know you all fear that there will be another flood. There have been four floods. There will never be another; for I shall take this great body and place it along the shore about the whole world, and above it the water shall not rise. But if you kill my bird Kuko, I will make the water rise and drown you all.” When Kumaiavěta was killed, he urinated freely. The ocean is his urine. That is why it is salty, has foam on [it], [and] is not good to drink.

53. Kumastamxo said, “This place is unclean. I shall burn the house.” Marxókuvék said, “No, leave it there; for I will call the birds and wild animals, and they will dwell about there when we have already journeyed forth.” [Song, repeated four times:—]

― 482 ―

	The house will burn, will burn.
	The house will be crackling, will be crackling.
	It will blaze.
	We are going to [dance?].
	It is going to be lighted.
	It is going to be lighted.
	It will blaze.
	We are going to [dance?].
	Something bird-like is coming.
	Bird-like tracks will be about the place. [*] When a man dies, and his house is burned, seeds are thrown into the fire. Birds come later and pick them up.
	We are going to light this unclean house.
	It will blaze, blaze.

Kumastamxo took four steps, lighting the house at the four corners. Then they all danced. When they ceased, Kumastamxo called NightHawk (Wiú). He taught Night-Hawk to sing when the dawn is coming, so as to awaken the people. Kumastamxo promised him great wisdom if he would do this regularly. “Let me sleep a little longer,” said Night-Hawk. After a while Night-Hawk called out, “Qrr8 rr8 rr8 rr8!” When he calls thus, the people know it is time to wake up.

54. Kumastamxo said, “Let us leave this place!” He took four great strides to the north. The people moved with him. He had a wooden spear. He made it out of nothing. He pressed the sharp end into the ground and moved the other end toward and from himself four times. Then he pulled it out toward the north. Water gushed forth and started to flow north. He stopped it without touching it. A second time he drew the spear out toward the west. He stopped the water. Then toward the east. He stopped the water. Then he threw it out toward the south. He let the water flow freely. He took four strides south. At each stride he made a great scratch with his spear in order to guide the water to the ocean. Where he held the spear-blade flat, the river is broad. Where he held it sidewise, the river-channel is narrow, and most of the water flows on one side. At Yuma he cut the mountains asunder to let the river through. Taking four more steps, he returned to the source. [Song, repeated four times:—]

― 483 ―

	This is my water, my water.
	This is my river, my river.
	We love its water.
	We love its driftwood [foamwood].
	It shall flow forever.
	It shall flow forever.
	When the weather grows hot,
	It shall rise and overflow its banks.
	It shall flow forever.

55. Kumastamxo made a raft of cottonwood-logs out of nothing. On it he placed four medicine-men—a Maricopa, Yuma, Diegueño, and Cocopa. On a second raft he placed four more medicine-men. One of these was a Mohave. The other people walked down.

56. They stopped first at a whirlpool near Kwiyuhitáp, north of Mellen, Arizona.

[*] Mohave, Kwayuhitápmave (‘place [ave] where Kwayu was killed [hitap]’). Kwayu was a gigantic cannibal.

A great snake (Xikwír) was traveling southward “behind the river.” He wanted to bite somebody. Kumastamxo caught him. That he might always stay in the water, and never become a man, Kumastamxo pulled the snake's teeth out.

[†] My informant explains that his body is a red stratum on the California bank. Nearby is a cave. If one enters, Xikwír will not bite, but will make one sick. He stabs in the abdomen, and blood flows forth. All about lie Xikwír's teeth. They are shiny and as large as fingers.

57. At Avikarutát, south of Parker, they stopped a second time. Kumastamxo told the Yavapai to live there on the Arizona side. He forbade them to cross the river. They did not know how to swim. At last they crossed on a tule-raft. Kumastamxo made a bright light shine forth from Avikarutát Mountain. But the California side was dark.

58. Kumastamxo said to the people, “Because you are good people, I want you to find a good place to stay. We are going to move up to the top of a high mountain, and I shall teach you everything up there. From there we can see far over the earth.” He moved north with four steps. The people moved with him. “This is my homeland,” said he, “this is High Mountain (Avikwaamé).”

59. “Here is the place for the dark-house,” said he. He sent Beaver to bring four cottonwood-posts. Ant-Lion (Manisaár) dug four holes.

― 484 ―

Lizard (Kwaatúl^y) brought willow-poles. Big Red Ant (Tcamadhúl^y) brought sand and placed it on the roof.

60. Kumastamxo stationed the learners in the northeast corner, the good doctors in the southwest corner. Dead people stayed in the southeast corner, for they go in that direction when they die. The door was in the northern side. Kumastamxo made the bad “speechers” sit down. He did not allow them to bewitch one another. Kumastamxo alone bewitched, and gave only those sicknesses which others had power to cure.

61. Kumastamxo said, “I should like to keep all of you in here all the time. But it is so crowded that you cannot learn well. So I ask you to go outside.” He sent them out. Only Ampot^a xasarkwitin^yám remained within. Kumastamxo produced a great star and showed it to him there in the dark. “You are a good ‘speecher.’ With this find the road, with this find your own house in the darkest night. This is the great star (xamasé vatái).

[*] That is, the morning star.

Take this out when you cannot see well.” Kumastamxo called in each of the great doctors separately. He taught some of them how to kill a man in four days.

62. Kumastamxo called all the people into the dark-house again. He made everything dark. All fell asleep. He ascended into the sky. The people could not find him. He entered the dark-house again, and they discovered him there. Then the sun, moon, and stars disappeared. There was consternation among the dreamers. Even Marxókuvék did not know how to make a light. But after a while a certain man pulled out the morning star. It shed light all about. Then Kumastamxo took the very sky away with him. They found him with it in the dark-house. He taught by alarming the people and then assisting them.

63. Kumastamxo made a cottonwood-tree grow up in the dark-house. He cut the roots with his mind. It fell toward the west. “Who wishes to have this tree?”—“We,” said the Yuma. “We will tie feathers along the sides of it and make the sacred sticks (xaukwíl^y) used in Yuma fiestas.”

64. Kumastamxo bade the people go outside. He taught them how to fix up and fight. He gave them bows and arrows and war-clubs as they went out.

― 485 ―

65. He kept the people outside. He allowed only one Yuma man and one Diegueño man to enter. He taught them how to make fiesta houses (avakarúk).

[*] Shade-roofs built of cottonwood-poles and willow-branches for ceremonial use during the various “fiestas.”

That Yuma Indian was Pamavíitc, ancestor of all the women who bear the name Mavé. They had no cottonwood nor willow trees. They built it out of nothing. They made a shade-roof. Meanwhile all the other people were standing in a line east of the house, and facing east. Kumastamxo announced that all was finished. When the people turned about, they beheld not one but two fiesta houses, one for the Yuma, and one for the Digueño. Kumastamxo led one half of the Cocopa under the Diegueño house and taught them how to make one for themselves. These told the other Cocopa people. Kumastamxo said, “When you lose a big man, you will have a fiesta some months after he is dead.”

66. It became dark. Kumastamxo detailed Ampot^a xasarkwitin^yám to take charge of the speeches. Kumastamxo gave him many songs. Then Kumastamxo changed the darkness into daylight. He knew what each Yuma man could do. He called each man to him separately. He was in the dark-house. He said to each man, “You know to what tribe you belong. Kwikumat told you not to forget. For if you forget, you will not be swung into the right place [?].”

67. To the first man thus called into the dark-house Kumastamxo said, “Since Frog was eldest-born, I call you ‘Xavtsáts’; but since Frog fled, I call her ‘Xan^yé’. Call your daughters ‘Xavtsáts’.”

[†] The informant at first stated, and later denied, that [the first man] was Ampot^a xasarkwitin^yám. Each Yuma man has one or more names of descriptive or fanciful meaning. Each woman, however, bears an inherited name, which is the same as that of her full sisters, father's sisters, and father's father's sisters. The Indians, when talking English, call such names of women “nations.” A woman … is always known by the name of her nation, although this may be coupled with one or two other names which serve to distinguish her from other women of the same nation.

Then he called in Paxipátc and gave him his nation, too. He said, “Call your daughters ‘Hipá’. But I now call Coyote ‘Xatalwí’.”

To Pagel^yótc [?] he gave the nation-name ‘^t l^a ots’, which is connected with rain-cloud. Rain-clouds are now known as akwí.

To Pamavíitc he gave the name ‘Rattlesnake’ (Maav:). Rattlesnake is now called ‘Av:’.

To the next man he gave ‘Red-Ant’ (Ciq^u pás). Red-Ant is now called ‘Ikwís’.

― 486 ―

To the next man he gave ‘Roadrunner’ (Met'á). Roadrunner is now called ‘Tal^y pó’. Kumastamxo named him after he ran.

To the next man he gave ‘Mesquite-Beans’ (Al^y mōs).

[*] An old woman of this nation bears the additional name ‘Akoiitchámál’ (‘Old-Woman-Something-White’), because the mesquite beans referred to by Kumastamxo were ripe and white.

To the next man he gave ‘Deer-Hide’ (Sin^y kwál).

To the next man he gave ‘a kind of Brown Bug’ (Èstamadhún), not an ant-lion.

When the next man came in, Kumastamxo had to stop and think. All the good names had been given. He gave him ‘a bunch of shreds of willow-bark which had been soaked at least ten days in water’ (Kwickú).

When the next man came, Kumastamxo said, “‘Xal^y p$o$'t’, call your girl thus.” Xal^y p$o$'t means “already done.”

One lone man came running up. “Am I too late?”—“No, I call your nation ‘Hard-Ground’ (Xakcí).”

68. Kumastamxo then called out the stones and trees, and gave each its nation.

69. Kumastamxo gave each man a gourd rattle and taught him to “throw the gourd.” Then they all danced. They stood east of the house, grouped in tribes. Inside the house the Yuma stood north, the Diegueño west, the Cocopa south, the Maricopa east. Kumastamxo told the Wallapai and the Havasupai to go northeast, and he told the Chimehuevi to go northwest, and the Kawia to go west. Then he said to the others, “I send you four kinds of people south. Because I send you, you must remember me wherever you stay, for I am going to turn into something.” The Mohave alone stayed there with Kumastamxo. They were little children, too young to march.

70. Marxókuvék led the Yuma and Diegueño people away first. The Cocopa and Maricopa followed. They marched west across the desert, crossing many mountains. When the Yuma and Diegueño reached Aviivéra, east of Riverside, they found the eastern slope wooded, and they held a fiesta there. There the Cocopa overtook them. Kumastamxo did not want them to fight. But soon they began to shoot at the Yuma and Diegueño. The Maricopa Indians stood close to the Cocopa and sided with them.

71. Kumastamxo tried to produce a thunderstorm. Only a few drops of rain fell. Then he said, “I must return to Avikwaamé.” He took Marxókuvék

― 487 ―

with him. When they neared Avikwaamé, Marxókuvék sickened. The people carried him down the Colorado river-valley, for they liked him. At Yuma the river was so swift that they could not carry him across. Kumastamxo knew their difficulty, and made the river shallow. Then they carried Marxókuvék across. At Avixol^y pó,

[*] Now Castle Dome, on the Arizona side, near Laguna.

Marxókuvék said, “This is my homeland. Here we shall live. Burn my body by yonder mountain.” Then he died, with his head to the south.

They burned him at the base of Mokwintaórv Mountain, at a place called Aaux'rakyámp.

[†] Meaning ‘fire all around’

The rocks are still red from the fire. The people cried loudly, “He is dead, he is dead!” referring to Kwikumat and Kumastamxo, as well as to Marxókuvék. They burned Marxókuvék on top of that mountain. The Yuma go to that place,.

[‡] In their dreams.

and Marxókuvék shows them how to do wonderful things. He tells us everything. Men also climb this mountain. It takes four days to climb it. On its summit they fall into visions at midnight. Marxókuvék asks them what they want and satisfies them. But great doctors go up to Avikwaamé and see Kumastamxo. It takes four days to go up there. No songs are taught at Mokwintaórv.

72. Kumastamxo said, “Havíirk,” meaning, “It is finished.” He stood there. He thought, “I will sink into the ground.” He sang four times—

	Into the earth I go down, go down.
	Nothing but earth will I be seeing, will I be seeing.
	I sink down into the old riverbed,
	Down into the interior.

The first time he sang thus, his feet sank into the earth; the second time, his thighs sank into the earth; the third time, his neck sank into the earth; the fourth time, he sank out of sight, and remained there in the interior of the earth four days.

73. Then he came up again. He stood there. He said, “I am going to ascend.” He extended his arms horizontally toward either side. Then he sang four times—

	I am springing, springing.
	Wing-feathers!

― 488 ―

	Body-feathers!
	On my hands, wing-feathers.
	On my body [?], body-feathers.

He flew awkwardly into the air as he sang this the fourth time. He flapped his wings four times. He said, “I shall be called ‘the black eagle’ (aspakwaan^yíl y) in the west,

[*] This eagle protects the whites. That is why they have it on their money.

‘the high eagle’ (aspakwaamaí) in the east,

[†] High eagle lives in the Maricopa country. It is seen by medicine-men only.

‘fish eagle’ (aspaatsikwítc) in the south,.

[‡] About the gulf.

‘white eagle’ (aspahamál) in the north.”

LATIN PASSAGES

A. So that the virgin might fully understand, he himself demonstrated to her what should be done. Indeed, he lay down on the ground and copulated four times. The woman, sweating profusely, four times wiped away the sweat from her body with her hands.

B. Not unwillingly, one of the men tried to do those things which [Xavasumkil^y i] herself had described. However, he inserted his penis into [his woman's] anus, not into her vagina. “Soon I will bear something,” said the woman. She expected to bear a child at any moment. When it did not happen, she and the other women became greatly agitated. “Why are you all inflamed against me?” asked Xavasumkul^y i. And so she explained again, “Insert the penis into the vagina.” This time, though, the man inserted not his penis but his testicles into her vagina.

Returning, [Xavasumkil^y i] told her husband that the women would never conceive. Kwikumat scolded her because she had told to the others those things that he himself had taught her in secret. “I am not afraid that they should learn,” said Xavasumkul^y i. [Then] Kwikumat ordered: “Lead these women four steps toward the north, toward the west, toward the south, toward the east, and I will lead the men likewise.” When this dance was done, he ordered everybody to lie down on the ground and copulate.

C. Some sought refuge by rising up into his anus.

― 489 ―

D. One day he noticed a girl among the bushes whose vagina was ulcerous and putrid, from which everything fled. When Coyote ran toward her, she fell down on her hands and knees, terrified. Then Coyote copulated with her.

1. SELECTIONS

CREATION SONGS

1A

1B

1. Kwaw Labors to Form a World

Atsugewi 1996 Darryl Babe Wilson

NORTHWESTERN CALIFORNIA

SONG

2. Test-ch'as (The Tidal Wave)

Tolowa 1985 Loren Bommelyn, author and translator

INTRODUCTION BY LOREN BOMMELYN

NOTES

FURTHER READING

Test-ch'as (The Tidal Wave)

3. “The Young Man from Serper” and Other Stories

Yurok 1951, 1985–1988 Florence Shaughnessy, narrator R. H. Robins, collector and translator Jean Perry, collector

INTRODUCTION BY JEAN PERRY

FIGURE 1. Florence Shaughnessy. Copyright 1988 Jean Perry.

“The Young Man from Serper” and Other Stories

BLIND BILL AND THE OWL

RAGGED ASS HILL

THE YOUNG MAN FROM SERPER

4. Coyote and Old Woman Bullhead

Karuk circa 1930 Margaret Harrie, narrator Hans JØrgen Uldall, collector Julian Lang, translator

INTRODUCTION BY JULIAN LANG

FURTHER READING

Coyote and Old Woman Bullhead

5. The Devil Who Died Laughing

Karuk 1950 Mamie Offield, narrator William Bright, collector and translator

INTRODUCTION BY WILLIAM BRIGHT

Word Order

Repetition

FURTHER READING

THE DEVIL WHO DIED LAUGHING

6. “The Boy Who Grew Up at Ta'k'imi l ding” and Other Stories

Hupa 1963–1964 Minnie Reeves and Louisa Jackson, narrators Victor Golla, collector and translator

INTRODUCTION BY VICTOR GOLLA

Hupa Language Sample

FURTHER READING

“The Boy Who Grew Up at Ta'k'imi ding” and Other Stories

THE BOY WHO GREW UP AT TA'K'IMI LDING

Minnie Reeves

GRANDFATHER'S ORDEAL

Minnie Reeves

THE STOLEN WOMAN

Minnie Reeves

IT WAS SCRATCHING

Louisa Jackson

7. The Bear Girl

Chimariko 1921 Sally Noble, narrator J. P. Harrington, collector Katherine Turner, translator

INTRODUCTION BY KATHERINE TURNER

FIGURE 2. Sally Noble. Courtesy of the Bancroft Library, University of California, Berkeley.

FURTHER READING

THE BEAR GIRL

NORTH-CENTRAL CALIFORNIA

SPELL SAID BY A GIRL DESIROUS OF GETTING A HUSBAND

8. How My Father Found the Deer

Achumawi 1970 Lela Rhoades, narrator Bruce Nevin, collector and translator

INTRODUCTION BY BRUCE NEVIN

NOTES

FURTHER READING

HOW MY FATHER FOUND THE DEER

9. Naponoha (Cocoon Man)

Atsugewi 1931John LaMarr (Dixie Valley), NARRATORSusan Brandenstein Park, COLLECTORDarryl Babe Wilson, EDITOR

INTRODUCTION BY DARRYL BABE WILSON

note

FURTHER READING

Naponoha

10. A Story of Lizard

Yahi 1915Ishi, narratorEdward Sapir, collectorHerbert W. Luthin and Leanne Hinton, translators

INTRODUCTION BY HERBERT W. LUTHIN

FIGURE 3. Ishi. Courtesy Phoebe Apperson Hearst Museum of Anthropology and the Regents of the University of California.

Arrow-making

Pine-nutting

Grizzly Bear and Long-Tailed Lizard

The Night Dance

FIGURE 4. Narrative structure of Ishi's “A Story of Lizard.”(I = Introduction; P = Pine-nutting; A = Arrow-making; GB = Grizzly Bear; ND = Night Dance; C = Conclusion.)

A NOTE ON THE TRANSLATION

NOTES

FURTHER READING

3. “The Young Man from Serper” and
Other Stories

“The Young Man from Serper” and
Other Stories

6. “The Boy Who Grew Up at Ta'k'imi l ding”
and Other Stories

“The Boy Who Grew Up at
Ta'k'imi ding” and Other Stories

SPELL SAID BY A GIRL DESIROUS
OF GETTING A HUSBAND

1. Love Song: “Oh my Father,
what will you do?”

4. CRY SONG: “WHICH TRAIL SHOULD I TAKE TO
GO OVER THE HILL?”

MAIDU
CIRCA 1902

Eastern Pomo
1930